Volvo V60 PLUG-IN HYBRID, 2014 Late Owner's manual

Volvo V60 PLUG-IN HYBRID, 2014 Late Owner's manual
V60 PLUG-IN
HYBRID
WEB EDITION
Owners Manual
DEAR VOLVO OWNER
THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO
We hope you will enjoy many years of driving
pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been
designed for the safety and comfort of you and
your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in
the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to
satisfy all current safety and environmental
requirements.
In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we
recommend that you familiarise yourself with the
equipment, instructions and maintenance information contained in this owner's manual.
Table of contents
00 Introduction
01 Safety
Important information................................. 6
Volvo and the environment....................... 10
Plug-in hybrid - overview.......................... 13
Seatbelts ..................................................
Airbags......................................................
Activating/deactivating the airbag*...........
Side airbags (SIPS bags) .........................
Inflatable Curtain (IC) ...............................
WHIPS ......................................................
When the systems deploy ........................
Safety mode..............................................
Child safety...............................................
02 Locks and alarm
18
21
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
Remote control key/key blade..................
Privacy locking*.........................................
Battery replacement, remote control
key/PCC*...................................................
Keyless drive*............................................
Locking/unlocking.....................................
Child safety locks......................................
Alarm*.......................................................
00 01 02
2
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
46
52
54
56
60
65
66
Table of contents
03 Your driving environment
04 Driver support
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Instruments and controls.......................... 70
Volvo Sensus ........................................... 83
Key positions............................................ 84
Seats......................................................... 86
Steering wheel.......................................... 91
Lighting..................................................... 93
Wipers and washing................................ 103
Windows, rearview and door mirrors...... 106
Compass*............................................... 111
Power sunroof*....................................... 113
Alcolock*................................................. 115
Starting the engine.................................. 119
Starting the engine – external battery..... 121
Drive systems ......................................... 123
Gearboxes............................................... 128
All Wheel Drive - AWD............................ 132
Foot brake............................................... 133
Parking brake.......................................... 136
DSTC – Stability and traction control system.......................................................... 146
Road sign information - RSI*.................. 148
Speed limiter........................................... 151
Cruise control*........................................ 153
Adaptive cruise control*.......................... 155
Distance Warning*.................................. 166
City Safety™........................................... 169
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Pedestrian Protection*............................ 175
Driver Alert System*................................ 183
Driver Alert System - DAC*..................... 184
Driver Alert System - LDW*..................... 188
Park assist syst*...................................... 191
Park assist camera*................................ 194
BLIS*....................................................... 197
Menus and messages.............................
Menu source MY CAR............................
Climate control........................................
Preconditioning the car ..........................
Heater ....................................................
Trip computer.........................................
Adapting driving characteristics.............
Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................................
03 04 05
204
206
214
225
231
233
238
239
HomeLink® *............................................ 140
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3
Table of contents
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment......
Radio.......................................................
Media player...........................................
External audio source via AUX/USB*
input........................................................
07 During your journey
246
257
264
Recommendations during driving...........
Refuelling................................................
Fuel.........................................................
Charging - hybrid battery .......................
Loading...................................................
Cargo area..............................................
Driving with a trailer................................
Towing and recovery..............................
08 Wheels and tyres
296
300
301
304
312
314
317
323
General ...................................................
Changing wheels ...................................
Tyre pressure .........................................
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*............
Emergency puncture repair (TMK) .........
328
333
336
337
338
06 07 08
268
Media Bluetooth®* ................................. 271
Bluetooth® handsfree*............................
Voice recognition* mobile phone............
TV*...........................................................
Remote control* .....................................
4
274
283
287
291
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Table of contents
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment...............................
Lamps.....................................................
Wiper blades and washer fluid................
Battery.....................................................
Fuses......................................................
Car care..................................................
10 Specifications
346
353
359
362
365
379
Type designations...................................
Dimensions and weights.........................
Engine specifications..............................
Engine oil................................................
Fluids and lubricants...............................
Fuel.........................................................
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure ........................................................
Electrical system.....................................
Type approval.........................................
Licenses..................................................
Symbols in the display............................
11 Alphabetical Index
388
390
393
394
396
398
Alphabetical Index.................................. 414
09 10 11
399
401
402
407
410
5
Introduction
Important information
Reading the Owner's Manual
Introduction
A good way of getting to know your new car
is to read the owner's manual, ideally before
your first journey. This will give you the
opportunity to familiarise yourself with new
functions, to see how best to handle the car
in different situations, and to make the best
use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the
manual.
The specifications, design features and illustrations in this owner's manual are not binding. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice.
©
Volvo Car Corporation
equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).
The equipment described in the owner's
manual is not available in all cars - they have
different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and
national or local laws and regulations.
In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo
dealer.
Special texts
WARNING
Warning texts advise of a risk of personal
injury.
IMPORTANT
Do not remove this manual from the car should a problem arise then the information required about where and how to seek
professional help would be missing.
Option
All types of option/accessory are marked with
an asterisk*.
In addition to standard equipment, this manual also describes options (factory fitted
6
IMPORTANT
Important texts advise of a risk of material
damage.
NOTE
NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for
example.
Footnote
There is footnote information in the owner's
manual that is located at the bottom of the
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
page. This information is an addition to the
text that it refers to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are
used instead of numbers for referral.
Message texts
Text messages can be shown in the combined instrument panel and in the screen.
These text messages are highlighted in the
owner's manual by means of the text being
slightly larger and printed in grey. Examples
of this are in menu texts and message texts in
the screen (e.g. Audio settings).
Decals
The car contains different types of decal
which are designed to convey important
information in a simple and clear manner. The
decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/
information.
Introduction
Important information
Information
G031593
Risk of property damage
G031592
Warning for personal injury
G031590
Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field,
white text/image on black message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
serious personal injury or fatality.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black or blue warning field and message field.
Used to indicate the presence of danger
which, if the warning is ignored, may result in
damage to property.
White ISO symbols and white text/image on
black message field.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual
are not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the
label in question in your car.
7
Introduction
Important information
Procedure lists
Bulleted lists
Procedures where action must be taken in a
certain sequence are numbered in the
owner's manual.
A bulleted list is used when there is a list of
points in the owner's manual.
When there is a series of illustrations for
step-by-step instructions each step is
numbered in the same way as the corresponding illustration.
There are numbered lists with letters
adjacent to the series of illustrations
where the order of the instructions is not
significant.
Arrows appear numbered and unnumbered and are used to illustrate a movement.
Arrows with letters are used to clarify a
movement when the reciprocal order is of
no relevance.
If there is no series of illustrations for step-bystep instructions then the different steps are
numbered with normal numbers.
Position lists
Red circles containing a number are used
in overview images where different components are pointed out. The number
recurs in the position list featured in connection with the illustration that describes
the item.
8
Example:
•
•
Coolant
Engine oil
Images
The manual's images are sometimes schematic and may deviate from the car's appearance depending on equipment level and market.
To be continued
}} This symbol is located furthest down to
the right when a section continues on the following page.
Recording data
Your vehicle contains a number of computers
whose function is to continuously check and
monitor the vehicle's operation and functionality. Some of the computers can record
information during normal driving if they
detect an error. In addition, information is
recorded in the event of a collision or incident. Parts of the recorded information are
required so that technicians can diagnose
and rectify faults in the vehicle during servicing and maintenance and so that Volvo can
fulfil legal requirements and other regulations.
In addition to this, the information is used for
research purposes by Volvo in order to continually develop quality and safety, as the
information can contribute to a better understanding of the factors that cause accidents
and injuries. The information includes details
of the status and functionality of various systems and modules in the vehicle with regard
to engine, throttle, steering and brake systems, amongst other things. This information
may include details regarding the way the
driver drives the vehicle, such as vehicle
speed, brake and accelerator pedal use,
steering wheel movement and whether or not
the driver and passengers have used their
seatbelts. For the reasons given this information may be stored in the vehicle's computers
for a certain length of time, but also as a
result of a collision or incident. This information may be stored by Volvo as long as it can
help to further develop and further enhance
safety and quality and as long as there are
legal requirements and other regulations that
Volvo needs to consider.
Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent.
However, due to national legislation and regulations Volvo may be required to disclose
such information to authorities such as police
Introduction
Important information
authorities, or others who may assert a legal
right to have access to it.
Change of ownership for cars with
Volvo On Call*
To be able to read and interpret the information recorded by the computers in the vehicle
requires special technical equipment that
Volvo, and workshops that have entered into
agreements with Volvo, have access to. Volvo
is responsible that the information, which is
transferred to Volvo during servicing and
maintenance, is stored and handled in a
secure manner and that the handling complies with applicable legal requirements. For
further information - contact a Volvo dealer.
Volvo On Call is a supplemental service that
consists of safety, security and comfort services. If the car has Volvo On Call and there is
a change of owner, it is very important that
these services are discontinued so that the
former owner cannot access the services in
the car. Contact an authorised Volvo dealer in
the event of a change of ownership.
Accessories and extra equipment
The incorrect connection and installation of
accessories can negatively affect the car's
electrical system. Certain accessories only
function when their associated software is
installed in the car's computer system. Volvo
therefore recommends that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before
installing accessories which are connected to
or affect the electrical system.
Information on the Internet
At www.volvocars.com there is further information concerning your car.
A QR code reader is required to read the QR
code, which is available as a supplemental
program for several mobile phones. The QR
code reader can be downloaded from App
Store or Google Play.
QR code
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
9
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
G000000
Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy
Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corporation's core values which influence all
operations. We also believe that our customers share our consideration for the environment.
Your Volvo complies with strict international
environmental standards and is also manufactured in one of the cleanest and most
resource-efficient plants in the world. Volvo
Car Corporation has global ISO certification,
which includes the environmental standard
ISO 14001 covering all factories and several
of our other units. We also set requirements
10
for our partners so that they work systematically with environmental issues.
Fuel consumption
Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower
fuel consumption generally results in lower
emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.
It is possible for the driver to influence fuel
consumption. For more information read
under the heading, Reducing environmental
impact.
Efficient emission control
Your Volvo is manufactured following the
concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept
that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In many cases the exhaust emissions are
well below the applicable standards.
Clean air in the passenger
compartment
A passenger compartment filter prevents dust
and pollen from entering the passenger compartment via the air intake.
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS*
(Interior Air Quality System) ensures that the
incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside.
discharges into the environment. Our workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools
required to guarantee good environmental
care.
The system consists of an electronic sensor
and a carbon filter. The incoming air is monitored continuously and if there is an increase
in the level of certain unhealthy gases such as
carbon monoxide then the air intake is
closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy
traffic, queues and tunnels for example.
Reducing environmental impact
The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level
ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the
carbon filter.
You can easily help reduce environmental
impact - here are a few tips:
•
•
•
Drive economically - think ahead.
•
If the car is equipped with an engine
block heater*, use it before starting from
cold - it improves starting capacity and
reduces wear in cold weather and the
engine reaches normal operating temperature more quickly, which lowers consumption and reduces emissions.
Interior
The interior of a Volvo is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with
contact allergies and for asthma sufferers.
Extreme attention has been given to choosing
environmentally-compatible materials.
Volvo workshops and the environment
Regular maintenance creates the conditions
for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you contribute to
a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and
maintenance of your car it becomes part of
our system. Volvo makes clear demands
regarding the way in which our workshops
are designed in order to prevent spills and
Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off
the engine when stationary for longer
periods. Pay attention to local regulations.
Perform service and maintenance in
accordance with the owner's manual's
instructions - follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's recommended intervals.
•
High speed increases consumption considerably due to increased wind resistance - a doubling of speed increases
wind resistance 4 times.
•
Always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oils, in
an environmentally safe manner. Consult
a workshop in the event of uncertainty
about how this type of waste should be
discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Following this advice can save money, the
planet's resources are saved, and the car's
durability is extended. For more information
and further advice, see the pages 208, 296
and 398.
Recycling
As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is
important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the
car can be recycled. The last owner of the car
is therefore requested to contact a dealer for
referral to a certified/approved recycling
facility.
The owner's manual and the
environment
The Forest Stewardship Council® symbol
shows that the paper pulp in this publication
comes from FSC® certified forests or other
controlled sources.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
11
Introduction
Volvo and the environment
12
Introduction
Plug-in hybrid - overview
Overview
Charging the hybrid battery.
Hybrid battery.
Electric motor with drive on the rear
wheels.
Drive modes.
13
Introduction
Plug-in hybrid - overview
Combined instrument panel with unique
information for the plug-in hybrid.
Important to know
WARNING
Remember that the car does not emit any
engine noise when it is only powered by
the electric motor and may therefore be
difficult to notice by children, pedestrians,
cyclists and animals. This applies in particular at low speeds, such as in car parks.
Hazard voltage
Several components in the car operate with
hazardous electrical voltage. Do not touch
anything that is not clearly described in this
owner's manual. Read more about the engine
compartment, see page 347.
14
WARNING
Orange cables marked with a high-voltage
decal must only be handled by qualified
personnel.
Driving the car
The car is driven as a completely normal car.
The electric motor drives the car mostly at
low speeds, the diesel engine at higher
speeds, as well as during more active driving.
Read more about recommendations during
driving, see page 296.
Drive modes
It is possible to set the car in different drive
modes while driving, e.g. electric operation
only or, when power is required, both electric
motor and diesel engine. The car calculates
an optimal combination of driveability, driving
experience, environmental impact and fuel
economy according to the drive mode
selected. Read more about drive modes,
page 123.
Combined instrument panel
Two fields in the combined instrument panel
show unique information for the V60 PLUG-IN
HYBRID; hybrid battery gauge (current energy
level), active drive mode, symbol that is illuminated when the diesel engine is operating,
Hybrid Guide as well as energy recovery.
Read more about the combined instrument
panel, see page 74.
Preconditioning
In order that the car should have optimal
function it is important that the hybrid battery
with associated electrical drive systems, as
well as the diesel engine and its drive systems, have the correct operating temperature.
Battery capacity is reduced considerably if
the battery is too cold or too hot. Preconditioning prepares the car's drive systems and
the passenger compartment before departure
so that both wear and energy needs during
the journey are reduced. Read more about
preconditioning, see page 225.
Charging the hybrid battery
The hybrid battery is the Lithium-ion type and
can be recharged in different ways. A charging cable with control unit can be connected
between the car and a 230V AC socket.
Charging time depends on charging current,
see page 304.
The electric motor is used as an engine brake
during light braking and the car's kinetic
energy is converted to electrical energy which
is used to charge the hybrid battery. Read
more about recovering the brake force
energy, see page 133.
Introduction
Plug-in hybrid - overview
In addition, the diesel engine can charge the
electric motor's hybrid battery with a special
hazard voltage generator when the need arises, see drive system and drive modes, page
123.
15
Seatbelts ................................................................................................
Airbags....................................................................................................
Activating/deactivating the airbag*.........................................................
Side airbags (SIPS bags) .......................................................................
Inflatable Curtain (IC) .............................................................................
WHIPS ....................................................................................................
When the systems deploy ......................................................................
Safety mode............................................................................................
Child safety.............................................................................................
16
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
18
21
24
26
27
28
30
31
32
SAFETY
01 Safety
Seatbelts
01
General information
Correctly fitted seatbelt.
Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that
all passengers use their seatbelts.
The buckles only fit the intended lock in the
rear seat1.
It is important that the seatbelt lies against
the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back.
The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.
Releasing the seatbelt
Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle
and then let the belt retract. If the seatbelt
does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so
that it does not hang loose.
Putting on a seatbelt
Pull the belt out slowly and secure it by
pressing its locking tab into the seatbelt
buckle. A loud "click" indicates that the belt
has locked.
1
18
Certain markets.
Seatbelt height adjustment. Press the button and
move the belt vertically. Position the belt as high
as possible without it chafing against your throat.
The seatbelt locks and cannot be withdrawn:
Incorrectly fitted seatbelt. The belt must rest on
the shoulder.
•
•
•
if it is pulled out too quickly
during braking and acceleration
if the car leans heavily.
01 Safety
Seatbelts
Make sure that you:
•
do not use clips or anything else that can
prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly
•
ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or
caught on anything
•
the hip strap must be positioned low
down (not over the abdomen)
•
tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards
the shoulder.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a
seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly,
this may diminish the protection provided
by the airbag in the event of a collision.
01
the correct way. The diagonal section should
wrap over the shoulder then be routed
between the breasts and to the side of the
abdomen.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact
an authorised Volvo workshop.
If a seatbelt has been subjected to a major
load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced.
Some of the protective characteristics of
the seatbelt may have been lost, even if it
appears to be undamaged. In addition,
replace the seatbelt if the belt is worn or
damaged. The new seatbelt must be typeapproved and intended for installation in
the same position as the replaced seatbelt.
Seatbelts and pregnancy
WARNING
As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering
wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means
that they must be able to easily operate the
foot pedals and steering wheel). The aim
should be to position the seat with as large a
distance as possible between abdomen and
steering wheel.
G020998
Each seatbelt is designed for only one person.
The lap section should lay flat over the thighs
and as low as possible under the abdomen. –
It must never be allowed to ride upward.
Remove the slack from the seatbelt and
ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no
twists in the seatbelt.
The seatbelt should always be worn during
pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in
19
01 Safety
01
Seatbelts
Seatbelt reminder
Rear seat
Certain markets
The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two
subfunctions:
An acoustic signal and indicator lamp remind
the driver and front seat passenger to use a
seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one.
At low speed, the audible reminder will sound
for the first 6 seconds.
G017726
•
Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their seatbelts by means of an audio and
visual reminder. The audible reminder is
speed dependent, and in some cases time
dependent. The visual reminder is located in
the roof console and in the combined instrument panel.
Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt
reminder system.
20
•
Provides information on which seatbelts
are being used in the rear seat. A message appears in the combined instrument
panel when the seatbelts are in use, or if
one of the rear doors has been opened.
The message is acknowledged automatically after approximately 30 seconds driving or after pressing the indicator stalk's
OK button. If anyone is unbelted then the
message can only be acknowledged
manually by pressing the indicator stalk's
OK button.
Provides a warning if one of the rear seatbelts is unfastened during travel. This
warning takes the form of a message in
the combined instrument panel along with
the audio/visual signal. The warning stops
when the seatbelt is re-fastened, or it can
also be acknowledged manually by
pressing the OK button.
The combined instrument panel's information
display, see page 75, shows which seatbelts are in use. This information is always
available.
Seatbelt tensioner
All the seatbelts are equipped with belt tensioners. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a
sufficiently violent collision. The seatbelt then
provides more effective restraint for the occupants.
WARNING
Never insert the tongue of the passenger's
seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's
side. Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. Do
not make any damages on seatbelts nor
insert any foreign objects into a buckle.
The seatbelts and buckles would then
possibly not function as intended in the
event of a collision. There is a risk of
serous injury.
01 Safety
Airbags
Warning symbol in combined
instrument panel
01
As well as the warning symbol, a message
may appear on the information display in
appropriate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and
SRS airbag Service required or SRS
airbag Service urgent appears in the display. Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop immediately.
G018666
Airbag system
Airbag system, right-hand drive car.
G018665
The warning symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates when the remote control key is in key position II. The symbol
clears after approx. 6 seconds provided the
airbag system is fault-free.
WARNING
If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates
while driving, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The
symbol indicates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner system, SIPS, the IC system or
some other fault in the system. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop immediately.
Airbag system, left-hand drive car.
The system consists of airbags and sensors.
A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors
and the airbag(s) are inflated and become
hot. To cushion the impact, the airbag
deflates when compressed. When this
occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is
completely normal. The entire process,
including inflation and deflation of the airbag,
occurs within tenths of a second.
WARNING
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop for repair.
Defective work in the airbag system could
cause malfunction and result in serious
personal injury.
21
01 Safety
01
Airbags
Passenger airbag
The detectors react differently depending
on the nature of the collision and whether
or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies
to all belt positions.
The car has an airbag to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the passenger side. It is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is
marked AIRBAG.
It is therefore possible that only one (or
none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the
collision on the vehicle and the action is
adapted accordingly so that one or more
airbags are deployed.
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the
belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this
may diminish the protection provided by
the airbag in the event of a collision.
NOTE
Airbag on the driver's side
The car has an airbag to supplement the protection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's side. It is folded up into the centre of the
steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked
AIRBAG.
WARNING
Location of the front passenger airbag in a lefthand drive car.
WARNING
Do not put objects in front of or above the
dashboard where the passenger airbag is
located.
WARNING
The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a
seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly,
this may diminish the protection provided
by the airbag in the event of a collision.
Location of the front passenger airbag in a righthand drive car.
22
To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag
deploys, passengers must sit as upright as
possible with their feet on the floor and
backs against the backrest. Seatbelts
must be secured.
01 Safety
Airbags
01
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated.
Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front
of the front passenger seat.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever
sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag
is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
23
01 Safety
01
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
Key switch off - PACOS*
General information
The airbag for the front passenger seat can
be deactivated if the car is equipped with a
switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off
Switch). For information on how to activate/
deactivate, see under the heading Activating/
deactivating.
Key switch off/switch
The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS)
is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open (see under the heading
below, Activating/deactivating).
Check that the switch is in the required position. The remote control key's key blade
should be used to change position.
For information on the key blade, see
page 50.
WARNING
Failure to follow the advice given above
could endanger the life of passengers in
the car.
24
WARNING
Activating/deactivating
If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag, but does not have a PACOS
switch (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch),
then the airbag will always be activated.
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated and the symbol
in
the roof console is illuminated. Failure to
follow this advice could endanger the life
of the child.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to sit in the front passenger seat if the message in the roof console (see page 25) indicates that the airbag is deactivated, and if the warning
symbol for the airbag system is also displayed in the combined instrument panel.
This indicates that there has been a severe
malfunction. Visit a workshop as soon as
possible. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Location of airbag label plus switch.
The airbag is activated. With the switch in
this position, persons taller than 140 cm
can sit in the front passenger seat, but
never children in a child seat or on a
booster cushion.
The airbag is deactivated. With the switch
in this position, children in a child seat or
on a booster cushion can sit in the front
passenger seat, but never persons taller
than 140 cm.
01 Safety
Activating/deactivating the airbag*
WARNING
Activated airbag
01
Deactivated airbag
Activated airbag (passenger seat):
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion on the front passenger
seat when the airbag is activated. This
applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.
2
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
NOTE
When the remote control key is in key
position II the warning symbol for the airbag is shown in the combined instrument
panel for approx. 6 seconds (see page 21).
G017800
No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit
in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.
2
G017724
Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
activated.
Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is
deactivated.
A warning symbol in the roof console indicates that the airbag for the front passenger
seat is activated (see preceding illustration).
A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated (see preceding
illustration).
Following which, the indicator in the roof
console is illuminated showing the correct
status for the front passenger seat airbag.
For more information about the different
key positions for the remote control key,
see page 84.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
25
01 Safety
01
Side airbags (SIPS bags)
Side airbag
Location
occupant and the door panel and thereby
cushions the initial impact. The airbag
deflates when compressed by the collision.
The side airbag is normally only deployed on
the side of the collision.
Child seats and side airbags
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the side airbag.
G032949
WARNING
In a side impact collision a large proportion of
the collision force is transferred by the SIPS
(Side Impact Protection System) to beams,
pillars, the floor, the roof and other structural
parts of the body. The side airbags at the
driver's and front passenger seats protect the
chest area and the hip and are an important
part of the SIPS.
Driver's seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of two main
components, side airbag and sensors. The
side airbags are located in the front seat
backrests.
Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.
The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags
and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision
trips the sensors and the side airbags are
inflated. The airbag inflates between the
26
•
Volvo recommends that repairs are
only carried out by an authorised Volvo
workshop. Defective work in the SIPSbag system could cause malfunction
and result in serious personal injury.
•
Do not put objects in the area between
the outside of the seat and the door
panel, since this area is required by
the side airbag.
•
Volvo recommends the use only of car
seat covers approved by Volvo. Other
seat covers may impede the operation
of the side airbags.
•
Side airbags are a supplement the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
01 Safety
Inflatable Curtain (IC)
Properties
01
WARNING
Never hang or attach heavy items onto the
handles in the roof. The hook is only
designed for light clothing (not for solid
objects such as umbrellas for example).
Do not screw or install anything onto the
car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended
protection. Volvo recommends that you
only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are
approved for placement in these areas.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is
a part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in
the headlining along both sides of the roof
and protects the car's occupants sitting in the
outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision
trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is
inflated. The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking
their heads on the inside of the car during a
collision.
Do not load the car higher than 50 mm
under the top edge of the door windows.
Otherwise, the intended protection of the
inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the
headlining, may be compromised.
WARNING
The inflatable curtain is a supplement to
the seatbelts.
Always use a seatbelt.
27
01 Safety
01
WHIPS
Protection against whiplash injury –
WHIPS
The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) consists of energy absorbing backrests and specially designed head restraints in the front
seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end
collision, where the angle and speed of the
collision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.
Correct seating position
For the best possible protection, the driver
and front seat passenger should sit in the
centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head
restraint.
Do not obstruct the WHIPS system
WARNING
The WHIPS system is a supplement to the
seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.
Properties of the seat
When the WHIPS system is deployed, the
front seat backrests are lowered backward to
alter the seating position of the driver and
front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of
whiplash injury.
WARNING
Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS
system yourself. Volvo recommends that
you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
WHIPS system and child seats/booster
cushions
The protection provided by the car to children
seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion
is not diminished by the WHIPS system.
28
Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the
driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the
WHIPS system from functioning.
WARNING
Do not squeeze rigid objects between the
rear seat cushion and the front seat backrest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the
function of the WHIPS system.
01 Safety
WHIPS
01
WARNING
If a seat has been subjected to extreme
forces, such as due to a rear-end collision,
the WHIPS system must be checked.
Volvo recommends that it is checked by
an authorised Volvo workshop.
Part of the WHIPS system's protective
capacity may have been lost even if the
seats appear to be undamaged.
Do not place objects on the rear seat that may
prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop to have the
system checked even after a minor rearend collision.
WARNING
If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the
corresponding front seat must be moved
forward so that it does not touch the
folded backrest.
29
01 Safety
When the systems deploy
01
When the systems deploy
System
Triggered
Seatbelt tensioner, front
seat
In the event of a frontal
collision, and/or sideimpact collision, and/or
rear-end collision
and/or overturning
Seatbelt tensioner, rear seat
In a frontal collision
and/or side-impact
accident and/or overturning
Airbags
In a frontal collisionA
A
30
If the airbags have deployed, the following is
recommended:
•
Recovering the car. Volvo recommends
that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with
deployed airbags.
•
Volvo recommends that you engage an
authorised Volvo workshop to handle the
replacement of components in the car's
safety systems.
•
Always contact a doctor.
NOTE
(Steering wheel
and passenger
airbag)
Side airbags
(SIPS)
of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the
different safety systems of the car are activated.
The airbags and belt tensioner system are
deployed only once during a collision.
In a side-impact accidentA
Inflatable Curtain IC
In the event of a side
impact and/or overturning and/or some frontal
collisionsA
Whiplash protection WHIPS
In a rear-end collision
The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a
collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors
such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed
WARNING
The airbag system's control module is
located in the centre console. If the centre
console is drenched with water or other
liquid, disconnect the cables to the starter
battery. Do not attempt to start the car
since the airbags may deploy. Recovering
the car. Volvo recommends that you have
it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Never drive with deployed airbags. They
can make steering difficult. Other safety
systems may also be damaged. The
smoke and dust created when the airbags
are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case
of irritation, wash with cold water. The
rapid deployment sequence and airbag
fabric may cause friction and skin burns.
01 Safety
Safety mode
Driving after a collision
If the car is involved in a collision, the text
Safety mode See manual may appear on
the information display. This means that the
car has reduced functionality. Safety mode is
a protective state that is enforced when the
collision may have damaged any of the car's
vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors
for one of the safety systems, or the brake
system.
Attempting to start the car
First, check that no fuel is leaking from the
car. There must be no smell of fuel either.
If everything seems normal and you have
checked for indications of fuel leakage, you
may attempt to start the car.
Remove the remote control key and open the
driver's door. If a message is now shown to
the effect that the ignition is on, press the
start button. Then close the door and reinsert
the remote control key. The car's electronics
will now try to reset themselves to normal
mode. Then try to start the car.
Never, under any circumstances, attempt
to restart the car if it smells of fuel when
the Safety mode See manual message
is displayed. Leave the car at once.
If the message Safety mode See manual is
still shown on the display then the car must
not be driven or towed, but a vehicle recovery
service used instead, see page 324. Hidden
damage can make the car impossible to
manoeuvre during the journey, even if the car
seems driveable.
If the car is in safety mode it must not be
towed. It must be transported from its
location. Volvo recommends that it is
transported to an authorised Volvo workshop.
01
WARNING
WARNING
Moving the car
If Normal mode is shown after Safety mode
See manual has been reset, the car can be
moved carefully out of a dangerous position.
Do not move the car further than necessary.
WARNING
Never attempt to repair your car or reset
the electronics yourself if the car has been
in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as
normal. Volvo recommends that you
engage an authorised Volvo workshop to
check and restore the car to normal status
after Safety mode See manual has been
displayed.
31
01 Safety
Child safety
01
Children should sit comfortably and
safely
Volvo recommends that children travel in
rear-facing child seats until as late an age as
possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and
then front-facing booster cushions/child seats
until up to 10 years of age.
NOTE
WARNING
In the event of questions when fitting child
safety products, contact the manufacturer
for clearer instructions.
Do not secure the straps of the child seat
to the seat's horizontal adjustment bar,
springs or the rails and beams under the
seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps.
Child seats
Look in the installation instructions for the
child seat for the correct fitting.
The position of a child in the car and the
choice of equipment are dictated by the
child's weight and size, for more information,
see page 33.
Location of child seats
You may place:
NOTE
Children of all ages and sizes must always sit
correctly secured in the car. Never allow a
child to sit on the knee of a passenger.
Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats,
booster cushions & attachment devices)
which is designed for your particular car.
Using Volvo's child safety equipment provides you with optimum conditions for your
child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore,
the child safety equipment fits and is easy to
use.
1
32
For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 24.
G020739
Regulations regarding the placement of
children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply.
Child seats and airbags are not compatible.
NOTE
When using child safety products it is
important to read the installation instructions included.
•
a child seat/booster cushion on the passenger seat, provided the passenger airbag is not activated1.
•
one or more child seats/booster cushions
in the rear seat.
Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the
rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated.
If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat
then he/she could suffer serious injury if the
airbag deploys.
01 Safety
Child safety
WARNING
Never place a child in a child seat or on a
booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag (SRS) is activated.
No one shorter than 140 cm should ever
sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag
(SRS) is activated.
Failure to follow the advice given above
can endanger life.
WARNING
01
Label Airbag
Booster cushions/child seats with steel
braces or some other design that could
rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause
the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.
Do not allow the upper section of the child
seat to rest against the windscreen.
The label becomes visible when the passenger
door is opened; see the illustration on page 24.
Recommended child seats2
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Group 0
Type approval: E1 04301146
Group 0+
(L)
max 13 kg
max 10 kg
2
Centre rear seat
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing
child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.
max 10 kg
Group 0
Outer rear seat
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rearfacing child seat, secured with the car's
seatbelt.
Group 0+
Type approval: E1 04301146
max 13 kg
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing
child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant
Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E1 04301146
(U)
With regard to other child seats your car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.
33
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Group 0
Child seats which are universally approved.
Child seats which are universally approved.
max 10 kg
(U)
(U)
Child seats which are universally approved.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and
straps.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
Group 0+
(U)
max 13 kg
Group 1
9-18 kg
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
(L)
Group 1
Child seats which are universally approved.
Child seats which are universally approved.
9-18 kg
(U)
(U)
Group 2
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and
straps.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - rear-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.
15-25 kg
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
34
Type approval: E5 04192
Type approval: E5 04192
(L)
Child seats which are universally approved.
(U)
01 Safety
Child safety
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Group 2
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child
seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo
Convertible Child Seat) - front-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
Type approval: E5 04191
Type approval: E5 04191
Volvo rear-facing/turnable child
seat (Volvo Convertible Child
Seat) - front-facing child seat,
secured with the car's seatbelt.
(U)
(U)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo
Booster Seat with backrest).
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster
Seat with backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without backrest
(Booster Cushion with and without
backrest).
Booster cushion with and without backrest
(Booster Cushion with and without backrest).
15-25 kg
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Group 2/3
15-36 kg
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
01
Type approval: E5 04191
(U)
Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with
backrest).
Type approval: E1 04301169
(UF)
Booster cushion with and without backrest (Booster Cushion
with and without backrest).
Type approval: E5 04216
(UF)
}}
35
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Weight
Front seat (with deactivated airbag)
Group 2/3
Outer rear seat
Centre rear seat
Integrated booster cushion (Integrated Booster
Cushion) - available as a factory fitted option.
15-36 kg
Type approval: E5 04189
(B)
L: Suitable for specific child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
U: Suitable for universally approved child seats in this weight class.
UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats in this weight class.
B: Built-in child seats approved for this weight class.
Integrated two-stage booster
cushions*
with the seatbelt they are approved for children who weigh between 15 and 36 kg and
who are at least 95 cm in height.
Check before driving that:
Correct position, the seatbelt should be positioned in on the shoulder.
36
Incorrect position, the head restraint must be
adjusted as high as the head and the seatbelt
must not be below the shoulder.
The booster cushions are specially designed
to provide optimum safety. In combination
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
the integrated 2-stage booster cushion is
correctly set (see table page 37) and in
locked position
•
the seatbelt is in contact with the child's
body and is not slack or twisted
•
the seatbelt does not lie across the
child's throat or below the shoulder (see
preceding illustrations)
•
the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned low over the pelvis to provide optimal protection.
01 Safety
Child safety
For instructions on adjusting the booster
cushion's two levels, see pages 37–38.
01
Start from the lower stage. Press the button.
Raising the two-stage booster cushion
The integrated booster cushion can be folded
up into two stages. How many stages the
cushion should be folded up depends on the
child's weight.
Weight
Stage 1
Stage 2
22-36 kg
15-25 kg
Stage 1
Press the booster cushion backwards to
lock.
Stage 2
Pull the handle forward and up in order to
release the booster cushion.
}}
37
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Lift the booster cushion up at the front
edge and press it back against the backrest
to lock.
adjust the booster cushion from the upper
stage to the lower stage.
WARNING
WARNING
Volvo recommends that repair or replacement is only carried out by an authorised
Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion. If an integrated booster cushion has
been subjected to a major load, such as in
conjunction with a collision, the entire
booster cushion must be replaced. Even if
the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of
protection. The booster cushion must also
be replaced if it is heavily worn.
NOTE
It is not possible to adjust the booster
cushion from stage 2 to stage 1. It must
first be reset by being fully folded into the
seat cushion. Refer to the heading below,
Lowering the two-stage booster cushion.
Lowering the two-stage booster
cushion
Lowering can take place from both the upper
and lower stage to fully lowered position in
the cushion. However, it is not possible to
38
Press down with your hand in the centre
of the cushion in order to lock it.
If the instructions regarding the two-stage
booster cushion are not followed then this
could cause serious injury to a child in the
event of an accident.
IMPORTANT
Check that there are no loose objects (e.g.
toys) left behind in the space under the
cushion before lowering.
Pull the handle forwards to release the
cushion.
NOTE
The booster cushion must be lowered first
when lowering the backrest.
Child safety locks, rear doors
The controls for operating the rear door
power windows and the rear door opening
handles can be blocked from opening from
the inside. For more information, see
page 65.
01 Safety
Child safety
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats
Size classes
Child seats are in different sizes – cars are in
different sizes. This means that not all child
seats are suitable for all seats in all car models.
Consequently, there is a size classification for
child seats using the ISOFIX fixture system in
order to assist users in choosing the correct
child seat (see the following table).
Size
class
Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system
are concealed behind the lower section of the
rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.
The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery
(see preceding illustration).
Press the seat cushion down to access the
mounting points.
Always follow the manufacturer's installation
instructions when connecting a child seat to
the ISOFIX mounting points.
Description
A
Full size, front-facing child
seat
B
Reduced size (alt. 1), frontfacing child seat
B1
Reduced size (alt.2), front-facing child seat
C
Full size, rear-facing child seat
D
Reduced size, rear-facing
child seat
E
Rear-facing infant seat
Size
class
01
Description
F
Transverse infant seat, lefthand
G
Transverse infant seat, righthand
WARNING
Never place a child in the passenger seat if
the car is equipped with an activated airbag.
NOTE
If an ISOFIX child seat has no size classification then the car model must be
included on the child seat's vehicle list.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo dealer for recommendations about which ISOFIX child seats Volvo
recommends.
39
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Types of ISOFIX child seat
Type of child seat
Infant seat transverse
Infant seat, rear-facing
Weight
max 10 kg
max 10 kg
Size class
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
F
X
X
G
X
X
E
X
OK
(IL)
Infant seat, rear-facing
max 13 kg
E
X
OK
(IL)
D
X
OK
(IL)
C
X
OK
(IL)
Child seat, rear-facing
9-18 kg
D
X
OK
(IL)
C
X
OK
(IL)
40
01 Safety
Child safety
Type of child seat
Front-facing child seat
Weight
9-18 kg
Size class
B
01
Passenger seats for ISOFIX installation of child seats
Front seat
Outer rear seat
X
OKA
(IUF)
B1
X
OKA
(IUF)
A
X
OKA
(IUF)
X: The ISOFIX position is not suitable for ISOFIX child seats in this weight class and/or size class.
IL: Suitable for specific ISOFIX child seats. These child seats may be intended for use in a special car model, limited or semi-universal categories.
IUF: Suitable for front-facing ISOFIX child seats that are universally approved in this weight class.
A
Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group.
}}
41
01 Safety
01
Child safety
Upper mounting points for child seats
NOTE
For cars equipped with a cargo area cover
over the cargo area, this must be removed
before a child seat can be fitted in the
mounting points.
For detailed information on how the child seat
should be tensioned in the upper mounting
points, see the seat manufacturer's instructions.
WARNING
The car is equipped with upper mounting
points for certain front-facing child seats.
These mounting points are located on the
rear of the seat.
The upper mounting points are primarily
intended for use with front-facing child seats.
Volvo recommends that small children should
sit in rear-facing child seats to as late an age
as possible.
NOTE
Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars
with folding head restraints on the outer
seats.
42
The child seat's straps must always be
drawn through the hole in the head
restraint leg before they are tensioned at
the attachment point.
01 Safety
01
43
Remote control key/key blade................................................................
Privacy locking*.......................................................................................
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*......................................
Keyless drive*..........................................................................................
Locking/unlocking...................................................................................
Child safety locks....................................................................................
Alarm*......................................................................................................
44
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
46
52
54
56
60
65
66
LOCKS AND ALARM
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
02
General
Loss of a remote control key
The car is supplied with 2 remote control
keys or PCCs (Personal Car Communicator).
They are used to start the car and for locking
and unlocking.
If you lose a remote control key then a new
one can be ordered at a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
The remaining remote control keys must then
be taken to the workshop. The code of the
missing remote control key must be erased
from the system as a theft prevention measure.
Additional remote control keys can be
ordered - up to 6 can be programmed and
used for the same car.
The remote control key contains a removable
key blade made of metal. The visible section
is available in two versions so that it is possible to distinguish between the remote control
keys.
The PCC has increased functionality compared with the remote control key. The continuation of this chapter describes the functions available in both the PCC and the
remote control key.
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to switch off the supply to the
power windows and sunroof by removing
the remote control key if the driver leaves
the car.
The current number of keys registered to the
car can be checked in the menu system MY
CAR under Information Number of keys.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 206.
Key memory1 – door mirrors and
driver's seat
The settings are automatically connected to
each respective remote control key, see
pages 87 and 108 . After locking with the
remote control key the setting of the combined instrument panel's theme is also saved
in the key, see page 75.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 206.
For cars with the Keyless drive system, see
page 56.
Indicator for locking/unlocking
When the car is locked or unlocked using the
remote control key, the direction indicators
confirm that locking/unlocking was correctly
performed.
•
Locking - one flash and the door mirrors
are folded2 in.
•
Unlocking - two flashes and the door mirrors are folded2 out.
After locking the indication is only given if all
locks have been activated once the doors
have been closed.
Selecting the function
Different options for indicating locking/
unlocking with light can be set in the car's
menu system, see page 206.
Search in the menu system MY CAR for
Settings Car settings Light settings
and select Door lock confirmation light
and/or Unlock confirmation light.
Lock indicator
1
2
46
Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
Same LED as alarm indicator, see page 66.
Message
Specification
Insert
car key
Error when reading the
remote control key during
starting - Remove the key
from the ignition switch, press
it in again and make a new
start attempt.
Car key
not
found
Error reading the remote control key during starting - Try to
start again.
NOTE
Cars that are not equipped with alarm also
have this indicator.
Immobiliser
Each remote control key has a unique code.
The car can only be started with the correct
remote control key with the correct code.
02
If the error persists: Insert the
remote control key into the
ignition switch and try to start
again.
A flashing LED by the windscreen verifies that
the car is locked.
Immobiliser Try
start
again
Functions
Error in immobiliser system
during starting. If the error
persists: Contact a workshop
- an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Remote control key, standard version.
Locking
Unlocking
Approach light duration
Tailgate
Panic function
For starting the car, see page 119.
The following error messages in the combined instrument panel's information display
are related to the electronic immobiliser:
47
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
Unlocking – Unlocks the doors and tailgate while the alarm is deactivated.
02
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to open
all windows simultaneously.
The function can be changed from unlocking
all doors simultaneously, to unlocking the
driver's door only with one press of the button and, after a further press of the button within 10 seconds - unlocking the remaining
doors.
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car
Communicator.
Information
Function buttons
Locking – Locks the doors and tailgate
while the alarm is activated.
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to close
all the windows and sunroof* simultaneously.
WARNING
If the sunroof and windows are closed
using the remote control key, check that
no one is in danger of getting hands
caught.
48
The function can be changed in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Lock settings Doors unlock
with both the alternatives All doors and
Driver door, then all. For a description of
the menu system, see page 206.
Approach light duration – Used to
switch on the car's lighting at a distance. For
more information, see page 102.
The button can also be used for activating
preconditioning, see page 225.
Tailgate - Unlocks and disarms the
alarm for the tailgate only. For more information, see page 63.
Panic function – Used to attract attention in an emergency.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to
activate the direction indicators and the horn.
The function can be turned off with the same
button once it has been active for at least
5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches
off automatically after 2 minutes and 45 seconds.
Range
The remote control key's functions have a
range of about 20 m from the car.
If the car does not verify a button being
pressed - move closer and try again.
NOTE
The remote control key functions can be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc.
The car can always be locked/unlocked
using the key blade, see page 50.
If the remote control key is removed from the
car when the engine is running or key position
I or II is active (see page 84) and if all doors
are closed, then the information display in the
combined instrument panel shows a warning
message and an audible reminder signal
sounds at the same time.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
The message clears and the audible reminder
signal stops when the remote control key is
brought back to the car after:
•
The remote control key has been inserted
in the ignition switch.
•
•
Speed exceeds 30 km/h.
the OK button has been pressed.
Unique PCC functions*
Using the information button
–
Press the information button
.
If any of the other buttons are pressed
during this time then the reading is
interrupted.
NOTE
If none of the indicator lamps illuminates with repeated use of the information
button and in different locations (as well as
after 7 seconds and after the light has
travelled around on the PCC), contact a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Remote control key with PCC* - Personal Car
Communicator.
Information button
Indicator lamps
Using the information button enables access
to certain information from the car via the
indicator lamps.
02
> All indicator lamps flash for approximately 7 seconds and the light travels
around on the PCC. This indicates that
information from the car has been
read.
Indicator lamps display information in accordance with the following illustration:
Green continuous light – the car is
locked.
Yellow continuous light – the car is
unlocked.
Red continuous light – the alarm has
been triggered since the car was locked.
Red light flashing alternately in both indicator lamps – The alarm was triggered
less than 5 minutes ago.
Range PCC
The PCC's range for locking, unlocking and
tailgate is approx. 20 m from the car - for
other functions up to approx. 100 m.
If the car does not verify a button being
pressed - move closer and try again.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
49
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
NOTE
02
The information button functions can be
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc.
Out of PCC range
If the PCC is too far away from the car for the
information to be read then the status the car
was last left in is shown, without the light
travelling around on the PCC.
If several PCCs are used for the car then it is
only the PCC last used for locking/unlocking
that shows correct status.
Detachable key blade
A remote control key contains a detachable
key blade of metal with which some functions
can be activated and some operations carried
out.
The key blade's unique code is provided by
authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades.
Key blade functions
Using the remote control key's detachable
key blade:
•
NOTE
If no indicator lamps illuminate when
the information button is used within range
then this may be because the last communication between the PCC and the car was
disrupted by surrounding radio waves,
buildings, topographical conditions etc.
50
Removing the key blade
•
the left-hand front door can be opened
manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, see
page 57.
the rear doors' mechanical child safety
locks can be activated/deactivated, see
page 65.
•
the right-hand front door and the rear
doors can be locked manually, e.g. in the
event of power failure, see page 60.
•
access to the glovebox and cargo area
(privacy locking*) can be blocked, see
page 52.
•
the airbag for front passenger seat
(PACOS)* can be activated/deactivated,
see page 24.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Attaching the key blade
Carefully refit the key blade into its location in
the remote control key.
1. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into
its slot.
2. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is
locked in.
02 Locks and alarm
Remote control key/key blade
Unlocking doors with the key blade
If central locking cannot be activated with the
remote control key - e.g. if the batteries are
discharged - then the left-hand front door can
be opened as follows:
02
1. Unlock the left-hand front door with the
key blade in the door handle's lock cylinder.
See also the illustration and further information see page 57.
NOTE
When the door has been unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered.
2. Deactivate the alarm by inserting the
remote control key in the ignition switch.
For a car with the Keyless system, see
page 57.
51
02 Locks and alarm
Privacy locking*
The privacy locking function is intended for
when the car is left for service, with a hotel
parking valet or similar. The glovebox is then
locked and the tailgate lock is disconnected
from the central locking - the tailgate cannot
be opened with either the central locking button in the front doors or the remote control
key.
G017869
02
General information on privacy
locking
Active locks for remote control key with key
blade.
This means that the remote control key without key blade can only be used to activate/
deactivate the alarm, to open the doors and
to drive the car.
The remote control key without key blade can
then be handed over to the service or hotel
staff - the loose key blade is retained by the
car owner.
NOTE
G017870
Do not forget to pull out the cargo cover
over the cargo area before closing the tailgate, see page 315.
Active locks for remote control key, without key
blade and privacy locking activated.
52
Activate/deactivate
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Activating privacy locking.
To activate privacy locking:
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
cylinder.
Turn the key blade 180 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is vertical in the locked
position for privacy locking.
Pull out the key blade. The combined
instrument panel's information display
shows a message at the same time.
The glovebox is then locked and the tailgate
can no longer be unlocked with the remote
control key or the central locking button.
02 Locks and alarm
Privacy locking*
NOTE
Do not reinsert the key blade into the
remote control key but keep it in a safe
place instead.
•
02
Deactivation takes place in reverse order.
For information on locking the glovebox only,
see page 62.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
53
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
Replacing the battery
02
Battery replacement
Closely study how the battery/batteries
are secured on the inside of the cover,
with regard to their (+) and (–) sides.
The batteries should be replaced if:
•
the information symbol in the combined
instrument panel illuminates and the display shows Low battery in remote
control. Please change batteries.
Remove control key (1 battery)
1. Carefully prize out the battery.
and/or
•
the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within
20 metres from the car.
2. Install a new one with the (+) side down.
PCC* (2 batteries)
Opening
Slide the spring-loaded catch to the
side.
At the same time pull the key blade
straight out backwards.
Insert a 3 mm slot screwdriver in the
hole behind the spring-loaded catch and
gently prize the remote control key up.
NOTE
Turn the remote control key over with the
buttons facing up, this is to avoid the batteries falling out when it is opened.
IMPORTANT
Avoid touching the battery and its terminals with your fingers, as this could damage their functionality.
54
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
1. Carefully prize out the batteries.
2. First install one new one with the (+) side
up.
3. Position the white plastic tab in between
and finally install a second new battery
with the (+) side down.
Battery type
Use batteries with the designation CR2430,
3V - one in the remote control key and two in
the PCC.
Assembly
1. Press the remote control key together.
2. Hold the remote control key with the slot
pointed up and lower the key blade into
its slot.
3. Lightly press the key blade. You should
hear a "click" when the key blade is
locked in.
02 Locks and alarm
Battery replacement, remote control key/PCC*
IMPORTANT
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries in an environmentally-friendly way.
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
55
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
02
Keyless lock and ignition system (only
PCC1)
General
from the car door handle or tailgate. This
means that the person who wishes to lock or
unlock a door must have the PCC with him or
her. It is not possible to lock or unlock a door
if the PCC is on the opposite side of the car.
The red rings in the preceding illustration indicate the range covered by the system's
antennas.
If all PCCs are removed from the car when
the engine is running or key position I or II is
active (see page 84) and if all doors are
closed, then a warning message is shown in
the combined instrument panel's display and
an audible reminder signal sounds at the
same time.
The keyless drive function in the PCC allows
the car to be unlocked, driven and locked
without the need for a key. You simply have
to have the PCC with you. The system makes
it easier and more convenient to open the car,
e.g. when your hands are full.
Both of the car's PCCs incorporate the Keyless function. Additional PCCs can be
ordered, see page 46.
PCC range
In order to open a door or the tailgate, a PCC
must be no more than approx. 1.5 metres
1
56
The warning message clears and the audible
reminder signal stops when the PCC is
brought back to the car after:
•
•
a door has been opened and closed
•
the OK button has been pressed.
the PCC is inserted into the ignition
switch
Handling the PCC safely
If a PCC with keyless drive function is left in
the car, it is deactivated temporarily when the
car is locked. This prevents unauthorised
entry.
Personal Car Communicator, see page 49.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
However, if someone breaks into the car,
opens the door and finds the PCC, it can be
reactivated. It is therefore important to handle
all PCCs with great care.
IMPORTANT
Never leave a PCC behind in the car.
Interference to PCC function
Electromagnetic fields and screening can
interfere with the keyless drive system.
NOTE
Do not place/store the PCC near a mobile
phone or metal object - no closer than
10-15 cm.
If interference is experienced nonetheless,
use the PCC and the key blade as a remote
control key, see page 47.
Locking
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
Unlocking with the key blade
NOTE
On cars with automatic transmission, the
gear selector must be set in the P position
– otherwise the car cannot be locked or
the alarm armed.
02
Unlocking
Unlocking takes place when a hand grasps a
door handle or the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate is actuated - open the door or tailgate as normal.
Cars with the Keyless system have a pressuresensitive area on the outer handle of the doors
and a rubberised button next to the tailgate's
rubberised pressure plate.
Lock the doors and the tailgate with one long
press on any of the door handles' pressuresensitive areas or press the smaller of the tailgate's two rubberised buttons - the lock indicator in the windscreen confirms that locking
has been completed by starting to flash, see
page 46.
All doors and the tailgate must be closed
before the car can be locked - otherwise the
car is not locked.
NOTE
Hole for key blade - to loosen the cover.
The door handles normally register a hand
that takes hold of the handle, but with
thick gloves on or after a very quick hand
movement a second attempt may be
required, or with the glove taken off.
If central locking cannot be activated with the
PCC, e.g. if the batteries are discharged, then
the left-hand front door can be opened with
the PCC's detachable key blade (see
page 50)
To access the lock cylinder, the door handle's
plastic cover must be removed - this is also
done with the key blade:
1. Press the key blade approx. 1 cm straight
up into the hole on the underside of the
door handle/cover - do not prize.
> The plastic cover loosens automatically by means of the torque when the
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
57
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
02
presses their PCC's unlock button, see
page 47.
blade is pushed straight up and into
the opening.
2. Then insert the key blade in the lock cylinder and unlock the door.
•
3. Refit the plastic cover after unlocking.
Select one of three possible memories for
seat adjustment with seat button 1-3, see
page 87.
•
Adjust seat and mirrors manually, see
page 87 and 108 .
NOTE
When the driver's door is unlocked using
the key blade and is opened, the alarm is
triggered. It is switched off by inserting the
PCC in the ignition switch, see page 67.
Key memory2 – driver's seat and door
mirrors
PCC memory function
If several people each with a PCC approach
the car, then the settings for seat and mirrors
are implemented for the person who opens
the driver's door.
Lock settings
The Keyless function can be adapted by indicating in the menu system MY CAR which
doors shall be unlocked, under Car settings
Lock settings Keyless entry - there
select between All doors unlock, Any door,
Doors on same side and Both front doors.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 206.
After the driver's door has been opened by
person A with PCC-A, but person B with
PCC-B shall drive, the settings can be
changed in three ways:
•
2
58
Antenna location
Standing by the driver's door, or sitting
behind the steering wheel, person B
Only in combination with power driver's seat and power mirrors.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car:
Rear bumper, centre
Door handle, left rear
Cargo area, central and furthest in under
the floor
Door handle, right rear
Centre console, under the rear section
Centre console, under the front section.
02 Locks and alarm
Keyless drive*
WARNING
People with pacemaker operations should
not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless
system's antennae with their pacemaker.
This is to prevent interference between the
pacemaker and the keyless system.
02
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
59
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
From the outside
02
The remote control key can lock/unlock all
doors and the tailgate simultaneously. Different sequences for unlocking can be selected,
see "Unlocking with the remote control key"
page 48.
In order that the lock sequence can be activated, the driver's door must be closed - if
any of the other doors or the tailgate is open,
then it/they is/are locked and the alarm is
activated only when it/they are closed. With
the Keyless* system all the doors and tailgate
must be closed.
NOTE
Be aware of the risk of locking the remote
control key in the car.
If it is not possible to lock/unlock with the
remote control key, the battery may be discharged - lock or unlock the left-hand front
door with the detachable key blade, see
page 50.
NOTE
Remember that the alarm is triggered
when the door is opened after being
unlocked with the key blade - the alarm is
switched off when the remote control key
is inserted into the ignition switch.
WARNING
Be aware of the risk of being locked in the
car when it is locked from the outside
using the remote control key - it is then not
possible to open any of the doors from the
inside with the door controls. Read more
about this in the section "Deadlocks" later
on.
Automatic relocking
If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened
within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked
again automatically. This function reduces the
risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see page 66.)
Manual locking
In certain situations the car must be lockable
manually, e.g. in the event of power failure.
The left-hand front door can be locked with
its lock cylinder and the remote control key's
detachable key blade, see page 57.
60
Other doors do not have lock cylinders and
instead have lock knobs on each door's end
face which must be re-turned - then they are
mechanically locked/blocked against opening
from the outside. The doors can still be
opened from the inside.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up
with child safety locks, see page 65.
–
Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob, see page 50.
The door is blocked against opening from
the outside.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
NOTE
•
A door's knob control only locks that
particular door - not all doors simultaneously.
•
A manually locked rear door with an
activated manual child safety lock cannot be opened from either the outside
or the inside, see page 65. A rear
door that is locked in this way can only
be unlocked with the remote control
key or central locking button.
From the inside
Central locking
•
locking button on the driver's door and the
passenger door*.
•
Press one side
the other side
of the button to lock to unlock.
Unlocking
A door can be unlocked from the inside in
two different ways:
•
Press the central locking button
02
Locking
•
Press the central locking button
closed doors are locked.
- all
Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also
close all the side windows and the sunroof*
simultaneously.
.
Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also
open all the side windows* simultaneously.
•
Illuminated lamp means that only that
particular door is locked. When all buttons are illuminated all doors are locked.
Lock button* rear doors
Pull the door handle and open the door the door is unlocked and opened in one
operation.
Lamp in lock button
Central locking is available in two variants the lamp in the central locking button for the
driver's door has different meanings dependent on the variant.
With central locking button only in the driver's
door, other doors have no button:
•
Central locking.
All of the doors and the tailgate can be locked
or unlocked simultaneously using the central
Illuminated lamp means that all doors are
locked.
With central locking button on both front
doors and electric lock button in each rear
door:
The button's lamp illuminates when the door is
locked.
The rear door lock buttons only lock their
respective rear door.
To unlock the door:
•
Pull the door handle - the door is
unlocked and opened.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
61
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
Global opening
02
Press and hold the central locking button
(at least 4 seconds) to also open all the windows simultaneously - for example, to quickly
ventilate the passenger compartment during
hot weather.
The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked
using the remote control key's detachable
key blade. For information on the key blade,
see page 50.
Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock
cylinder.
The doors and tailgate are locked automatically when the car starts to move.
Glovebox
Manual opening
Locking the glovebox:
Automatic locking
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Lock settings Automatic
door locking. For a description of the menu
system, see page 206.
Tailgate
Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise.
The keyhole is horizontal in the locked
position.
Pull out the key blade.
•
Unlock by carrying this out in reverse
order.
For information on privacy locking, see
page 52.
Rubber plate with electrical contact.
The tailgate is held closed by an electrical
lock. To open:
1. Push down gently on the wider of the two
rubberised pressure plates under the
outer handle - the lock is released.
2. Lift the outside handle in order to fully
open the tailgate.
62
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
IMPORTANT
•
Minimal force is required to release the
rear hatch lock - just gently press the
rubberised panel.
•
Do not place the lift force on the rubber panel when opening the rear hatch
- lift the handle. Using too much force
may damage the electrical contact for
the rubber panel.
Unlocking with the remote control key
The lock indicator on the instrument panel
stops flashing in order to show that not all of
the car is locked and the alarm's* level and
movement sensors and the sensors for opening the tailgate are disconnected.
The doors remain locked and armed.
•
The tailgate is unlocked, but remains
closed - press lightly on the rubberised
pressure plate under the outer handle and
lift the tailgate.
If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes
then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed.
Unlocking the car from inside
To unlock the tailgate:
–
Press the lighting panel button (1).
> The tailgate is unlocked and can be
opened within 2 minutes (if the car is
locked from the inside).
02
Locking with the remote control key
–
Press the remote control key's button for
locking,
, see page 47.
> The lock indicator on the instrument
panel starts flashing, which means that
the car is locked and the alarm* has
been activated.
Deadlocks *1
Deadlocks means that all door handles are
mechanically disengaged, which prevents
doors being opened from the inside.
The deadlocks are activated with the remote
control key and are set after an approximately
10 second delay after the doors have been
locked.
The alarm for the tailgate can be disarmed*
and the tailgate unlocked on its own by using
the remote control key's
button.
1
NOTE
Unlocking, tailgate
If a door is opened within the delay time
then the sequence is interrupted and the
alarm is deactivated.
Only in combination with alarm.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
63
02 Locks and alarm
Locking/unlocking
02
The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock state with the remote control key. The
front left door can also be unlocked with the
detachable key blade.
WARNING
Do not allow anyone to remain in the car
without first deactivating the deadlocks in
order to avoid the risk of anyone being
locked in.
Temporary deactivation
TUNE knob control
EXIT
If someone is going to stay in the car but the
doors must be locked from the outside, then
the deadlocks function can be temporarily
switched off. This is carried out as follows:
Press OK/MENU and lock the car. (Note
that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are switched off at the same time,
see page 67.)
> The next time the engine is started, the
system is reset to zero and the display
in the combined instrument panel
shows the message Full guard at
which the deadlocks function and the
alarm's movement and tilt detectors
are re-engaged.
–
1. Access the menu system MY CAR under
Settings Car settings Reduced
Guard (for a detailed description of the
menu system, see page 206).
2. Select Activate once.
> The combined instrument panel's
panel display shows the message
Reduced guard See manual and the
deadlocks function is switched off
when the car is locked.
or
–
Active menu options are indicated with a cross.
MY CAR
OK MENU
64
If the deadlocks function shall be switched
off
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Select Ask when exiting.
> Each time the engine is switched off
the centre console's screen shows the
message Activate Reduced Guard
until engine has started again? followed by the alternatives Confirm
with OK and Cancel with EXIT.
If the locking system shall not be changed
Press EXIT and lock the car.
–
NOTE
•
Remember that the alarm is activated
when the car is locked.
•
If any of the doors are opened from
the inside then the alarm is triggered.
02 Locks and alarm
Child safety locks
Manual blocking of the rear doors
The child safety locks prevent children from
opening a rear door from the inside.
WARNING
Each rear door has two knob controls - do
not mix up the child safety lock with the
mechanical door lock.
•
With child safety locks. Not to be mixed up with
manual door locks, see page 60.
A door's knob control only blocks that
particular door - not both rear doors
simultaneously.
Cars with an electric child safety lock
do not have a manual child lock.
Electrical locking of the rear doors*
and power windows
1. Start the engine or choose a key position
higher than 0.
2. Press the button in the driver's door control panel.
> The display in the combined instrument panel shows the message Rear
child locks Activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are
active.
When the electric child safety lock is active
then the rear:
The child safety locks are located on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only
accessible when the doors are open.
•
windows can only be opened with the
driver's door control panel
To activate/deactivate the child safety locks:
•
doors cannot be opened from inside.
–
The current setting is stored when the engine
is switched off - if the child safety locks are
activated at engine shutdown, the function
will remain activated the next time the engine
is started.
Use the remote control key's detachable
key blade to turn the knob - see page 50.
The door is blocked against opening from
the inside.
The door can be opened from both the
outside and the inside.
02
To activate the child safety locks:
NOTE
•
The child safety locks can be activated/deactivated in all key positions higher than 0 - see
page 84. Activation/deactivation can be
performed up to 2 minutes after switching off
the engine, provided that no door is opened.
Control panel driver's door.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
65
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
General
02
Activated alarm is triggered if:
•
a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is
opened
•
a movement is detected in the passenger
compartment (if fitted with a movement
detector*)
•
the car is raised or towed away (if fitted
with a tilt detector*)
•
•
the battery's cable is disconnected
the siren is disconnected.
If there is a fault in the alarm system then the
information display in the combined instrument panel shows a message. In which case,
contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
NOTE
Alarm indicator
The movement sensors trigger an alarm in
the event of movement in the passenger
compartment - air currents are also registered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window or the
sunroof open or if the passenger compartment heater is used.
To avoid this: Close the window/sunroof
when leaving the car. If the car's integrated passenger compartment heater (or
a portable electric heater) shall be used direct the airflow from the air vents so that
they are not pointing upwards in the passenger compartment. Alternatively,
reduced alarm level can be used, see
page 67.
NOTE
Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm
system components. All such attempts
could affect the terms of insurance.
Same LED as lock indicator, see page 46.
A red LED on the instrument panel indicates
the alarm system's status:
•
•
•
LED not lit – Alarm not armed
The LED flashes once every other second
– Alarm is armed
The LED flashes rapidly after disarming
the alarm (and until the remote control
key is inserted in the ignition switch and
key position I is selected) – Alarm has
been triggered.
Arming the alarm
–
Press the remote control key lock button.
Deactivate the alarm
–
66
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Press the remote control key unlock button.
02 Locks and alarm
Alarm*
Deactivating a triggered alarm
Reduced alarm level
–
To avoid accidental triggering of the alarm e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during
transport on a car train or car ferry - temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt detectors.
Press the remote control key unlock button or insert the remote control key in the
ignition switch.
Other alarm functions
The procedure is the same as with the temporary disengaging of deadlocks, see
page 63.
Automatic re-arming of the alarm
This function prevents the car being left with
the alarm disarmed unintentionally.
If the car is unlocked with the remote control
key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of
the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2
minutes, then the alarm is automatically rearmed. The car is relocked at the same time.
Remote control key not working
If the alarm cannot be deactivated with the
remote control key, e.g. if the key's battery is
discharged - the car can be unlocked, disarmed and the engine started as follows:
1. Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade - see page 57.
> The alarm is triggered, the alarm indicator flashes rapidly and the siren
sounds.
02
2. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.
> The alarm is deactivated and the alarm
indicator goes out.
3. Start the engine.
Alarm signals
When the alarm is triggered, the following
happens:
•
A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the
alarm is switched off. The siren has its
own battery and works independently of
the car battery.
•
The direction indicators flash for 5
minutes or until the alarm is switched off.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
67
Instruments and controls........................................................................ 70
Volvo Sensus ......................................................................................... 83
Key positions.......................................................................................... 84
Seats....................................................................................................... 86
Steering wheel........................................................................................ 91
Lighting................................................................................................... 93
Wipers and washing.............................................................................. 103
Windows, rearview and door mirrors.................................................... 106
Compass*.............................................................................................. 111
Power sunroof*..................................................................................... 113
Alcolock*............................................................................................... 115
Starting the engine................................................................................ 119
Starting the engine – external battery................................................... 121
Drive systems ....................................................................................... 123
Gearboxes............................................................................................. 128
All Wheel Drive - AWD.......................................................................... 132
Foot brake............................................................................................. 133
Parking brake........................................................................................ 136
HomeLink® *.......................................................................................... 140
68
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
YOUR DRIVING ENVIRONMENT
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Instrument overview
03
Left-hand drive.
70
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Function
Page
Function
Page
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam, trip
computer
204, 99,
95, 233
Control panel for infotainment system and
menu navigation
247, 249,
206
Cruise control*
153, 155
Control panel for climate control
218
Horn, airbags
91, 22
Gear selector
128
Combined instrument
panel
74
Controls for drive
modes
123
Menu navigation, audio
control, phone control*
206, 247,
249, 274
Wipers and washing
103, 104
START/STOP ENGINE
button
119
Steering wheel adjustment
91
Ignition switch
84
Bonnet opener
347
Screen for infotainment
system and display of
menus
246, 249,
206
Parking brake
136
Seat adjustment*
87
Door handle
–
93, 300,
62
Control panel
61, 65,
106, 108
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler flap
and tailgate
Hazard warning flashers
99
03
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
71
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
Right-hand drive.
72
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Function
Page
Function
Page
Screen for infotainment
system and display of
menus
246, 249,
206
Parking brake
136
91
Ignition switch
84
Steering wheel adjustment
START/STOP ENGINE
button
119
204, 99,
95, 233
Cruise control*
153, 155
Menus and messages,
direction indicators,
main/dipped beam, trip
computer
Combined instrument
panel
74
Gear selector
128
123
Horn, airbags
91, 22
Controls for drive
modes
Menu navigation, audio
control, phone control*
206, 247,
249, 274
Control panel for climate control
218
Wipers and washing
103, 104
247, 249,
206
Door handle
–
Control panel for infotainment system and
menu navigation
Control panel
61, 65,
106, 108
Hazard warning flashers
99
Bonnet opener
347
Headlamp control,
opener for fuel filler flap
and tailgate
93, 300,
62
Seat adjustment*
87
03
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
73
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Combined instrument panel
03
The instrument shows information according to the selections made, see section "Menus and messages" page 204.
Hybrid battery gauge
Current energy level
Active drive mode
The symbol illuminates when the diesel
engine is operating.
Hybrid guide (Driver Support Power
Meter). Shows the current driver-requested propulsion power and available electric motor power, i.e. the limit when the
diesel engine starts/stops. For more information, see page 78.
74
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Energy recovery
The combined instrument panel's
information display
Gauges and indicators
Alternative themes can be selected for the
combined instrument panel. Possible themes
are "Hybrid", "Elegance", "Eco" and
"Performance". The setting for the theme can
be stored in the remote control key's memory
when locking the car, see pages 46 and 208.
03
A theme can only be selected when the
engine is running.
When the electric motor generates power
for the hybrid battery, bubbles are shown
in the hybrid battery gauge - see more
about this on page 133 - "engine braking
with the electric motor".
Information display.
The combined instrument panel's information
display shows information on some of the
car's functions, e.g. cruise control and trip
computer, as well as messages. The information is shown with symbols and text.
To change the theme, press the left-hand
stalk switch's OK button and then select the
Themes menu option by turning the thumbwheel on the lever. Confirm selection by
pressing the OK button. For more information
on menus, see page 204.
There are further descriptions under the functions that use the display.
}}
75
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
03
Gauges and indicators, theme "Hybrid".
1
76
Gauges and indicators, theme "Elegance".
Gauges and indicators, theme "Eco".
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer
page 233, and Refuelling page 300.
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer
page 233, and Refuelling page 300.
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer
page 233, and Refuelling page 300.
Hybrid battery gauge
No function
Eco guide, see page 77
Speedometer
Speedometer
Speedometer
Hybrid guide, see page 78
No function
Hybrid guide, see page 78
Gear position indicator. See also gearboxes page 128.
Gear position indicator. See also gearboxes page 128.
Gear position indicator. See also gearboxes page 128.
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
Hybrid guide, see page 78
Gear position indicator. See also gearboxes page 128.
Eco guide & Hybrid guide
03
General
The Eco guide and Hybrid guide instruments
help the driver to drive the car while maintaining the best possible economy.
Gauges and indicators, theme "Performance".
The car also stores statistics of journeys
made, which can be viewed in the form of a
block diagram, see page 237.
Fuel gauge. When the indicator lowers to
only one white marking1, the yellow indicator symbol for low level in the fuel tank
is illuminated. See also Trip computer
page 233, and Refuelling page 300.
Eco guide
E-boost gauge. Illustrates electric motor
use, its support to the diesel engine and
engine braking2 with the electric motor.
To view this function, select the theme "Eco",
see page 76.
This meter provides an indication of how economically the car is being driven.
Speedometer
Tachometer. Indicates engine speed in
thousands of revolutions per minute
(rpm).
1
2
When the display's message "Distance to empty fuel tank:" starts to show "----", the marking becomes red.
Engine braking with the electric motor charges the hybrid battery, see page 133.
Instantaneous value
Average value
Instantaneous value
The instantaneous value is shown here - the
higher the reading on the scale, the better.
The instantaneous value is calculated based
on speed, engine speed, engine power utilised plus use of the foot brake.
Optimum speed (50-80 km/h) and low engine
speeds are encouraged. The pointers fall during acceleration and braking.
Very low instantaneous values illuminate the
red zone on the meter (with a short delay),
}}
77
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
which means poor economy and hence
should be avoided.
Average value
03
The average value slowly follows the instantaneous value and describes how the car has
been driven most recently. The higher the
pointers on the scale, the better the economy
achieved by the driver.
Hybrid guide
This instrument shows the relationship
between how much power is being taken
from the electric motor and how much power
is available.
To view this function, select the theme
"Hybrid" (see page 76) or "Performance" (see
page 77).
Driver-requested power
Indicator and warning symbols
Available electric motor power
Where the two pointers meet is the threshold
for when the diesel engine starts/stops.
Driver-requested power
The large pointer indicates the amount of
engine power requested by the driver by regulating the accelerator pedal. The higher the
reading on the scale, the more power is
requested by the driver in the current gear.
Available electric motor power
The small pointer indicates the amount of
power currently available for the electric
motor.
A large gap between the two pointers indicates a large power reserve.
Indicator and warning symbols.
Indicator symbols
Indicator and warning symbols
Warning symbols
Functionality check
All indicator and warning symbols illuminate
in key position II or when the engine is
started. When the engine has started, all the
symbols should go out except the parking
brake symbol, which only goes out when the
brake is disengaged.
If the engine does not start or if the functionality check is carried out in key position II
then all symbols extinguish within 5 seconds
78
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
except the symbol for faults in the car's emissions system.
Symbol
Left-hand direction indicator
Indicator symbols
Symbol
Specification
Specification
Right-hand direction indicator
ABL fault
Emissions system
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp on
Stability system
Stability system, sport mode
Engine preheater
Low level in fuel tank
Information, read display text
Main beam On
ABL fault
The symbol illuminates if a fault has arisen in
the ABL function (Active Bending Lights).
Emissions system
If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to
a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to
a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends
that you seek assistance from an authorised
Volvo workshop.
ABS fault
Rear fog lamp on
This symbol illuminates when the rear fog
lamp is switched on.
Stability system
A flashing symbol indicates that the stability
system is operating. If the symbol illuminates
with constant glow then there is a fault in the
system.
Stability system, sport mode
Sport mode allows for a more active driving
experience. The system then detects whether
the accelerator pedal, steering wheel movements and cornering are more active than in
normal driving and then allows controlled
skidding of the rear section up to a certain
level before it intervenes and stabilises the
car.
If this symbol illuminates then the system is
not working. The car's regular brake system
continues to work, but without the ABS function.
Engine preheater
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off
the engine.
Low level in fuel tank
2. Restart the engine.
3. If the symbol remains illuminated, drive to
a workshop to have the ABS system
checked. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
03
This symbol illuminates during engine preheating. Preheating takes place mostly due to
low temperature.
When the symbol illuminates the level in the
fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.
Information, read display text
When one of the car's systems does not
behave as intended, this information symbol
illuminates and a text appears on the information display. The message text is cleared with
}}
79
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
the OK button, see page 204, or it disappears automatically after a time (time
depending on which function is indicated).
The information symbol can also illuminate in
conjunction with other symbols.
03
NOTE
When a service message is shown, the
symbol and message are cleared using the
OK button, or disappear automatically
after a time.
Main beam On
The symbol illuminates when main beam is on
and with main beam flash.
Left/right-hand direction indicator
Both direction indicator symbols flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
Warning symbols
Symbol
Specification
Parking brake applied
Airbags – SRS
Seatbelt reminder
Symbol
Specification
Starter battery not charging
Fault in brake system
Warning
Parking brake applied
This symbol illuminates with a constant glow
when the parking brake is applied. The symbol flashes during application, and then
changes over to a constant glow.
A flashing symbol in any other situation
means that a fault has arisen. Read the message on the information display.
For more information, see page 136.
Airbags – SRS
If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means a fault has been
detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS, or
IC systems. Drive immediately to a workshop
to have the system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Seatbelt reminder
This symbol illuminates if someone in a front
seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.
80
Starter battery not charging
This symbol illuminates during driving if a
fault has occurred in the electrical system.
Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you
seek assistance from an authorised Volvo
workshop.
Fault in brake system
If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level
may be too low. Stop the car in a safe place
and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 351.
If the brake and ABS symbols illuminate at
the same time, there may be a fault in the
brake force distribution system.
1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off
the engine.
2. Restart the engine.
•
If both symbols extinguish, continue
driving.
•
If the symbols remain illuminated,
check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 351. If the brake fluid
level is normal but the symbols are still
illuminated, the car can be driven, with
great care, to a workshop to have the
brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from
an authorised Volvo workshop.
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The loss of brake fluid must be investigated by a workshop. Volvo recommends
that you contact an authorised Volvo
workshop.
WARNING
If the brake and ABS symbols are illuminated at the same time, there is a risk that
the rear end will skid during heavy braking.
Warning
The red warning symbol illuminates when a
fault has been indicated which could affect
the safety and/or driveability of the car. An
explanatory text is shown on the information
display at the same time. The symbol remains
visible until the fault has been rectified but the
text message can be cleared with the OK
button, see page 204. The warning symbol
can also illuminate in conjunction with other
symbols.
Action:
1. Stop in a safe place. Do not drive the car
further.
2. Read the information on the information
display. Implement the action in accordance with the message in the display.
Clear the message using the OK button.
Trip meter
03
Reminder – doors not closed
If one of the doors is not closed properly then
the information or warning symbol illuminates
together with an explanatory image in the
information display. Stop the car in a safe
place as soon as possible and close the door
that is open.
If the car is driven at a speed lower
than approx. 7 km/h then the information symbol illuminates.
If the car is driven at a speed higher
than approx. 7 km/h then the warning
symbol illuminates.
If the bonnet3 is not closed properly then the
warning symbol illuminates together with an
explanatory image in the information display.
Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the bonnet.
If the tailgate is not closed properly then the
information symbol illuminates together with
3
an explanatory image in the information display. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as
possible and close the tailgate.
Trip meter.
Display for trip meter
Both trip meters T1 and T2 are used to measure short distances. The distance is shown in
the display.
Turn the left-hand stalk switch's thumbwheel
to show the required meter.
One long press (more than 1 second) on the
left-hand stalk switch's RESET button resets
the trip meter currently displayed. A longer
Only cars with alarm*.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
81
03 Your driving environment
Instruments and controls
press (4 seconds) resets the trip computer.
For more information, see page 233.
The menu option Settings System
options Time format selects the 24h or
12h system (AM/PM).
Clock
03
1. Locate Settings
Time.
Clock.
Display for showing the time
Setting the clock
The clock can be adjusted in the menu group
MY CAR, for more information see page 206.
System options
2. The cursor is located in the first box for
Hour: Press OK/MENU - the box is activated.
3. Turn TUNE to set the correct hour and
press OK/MENU - the box is deactivated.
4. Turn TUNE to select the box for Minute
(A) and press OK/MENU - the box is activated (B).
5. Turn TUNE to set the correct minute and
press OK/MENU - the box is deactivated.
6. Turn TUNE to select the box for OK and
press OK/MENU - the setting is complete.
82
03 Your driving environment
Volvo Sensus
General
personalised by means of an intuitive user
interface. Settings can be made in Car settings, Infotainment, Climate, etc.
With the centre console buttons and controls
or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad*
functions can be activated or deactivated and
many different settings can be made.
03
With a press on MY CAR all settings related
to the driving and control of the car are presented, such as City Safety, Locks and alarm,
setting the clock, etc.
Control panel in centre console
Navigation* - NAV, see separate owner's
manual (Road and Traffic Information
System - RTI).
Infotainment (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*), see
page 246.
Car settings - MY CAR, see page 206.
With a press on the respective function:
RADIO, MEDIA, TEL*, NAV* and CAM* other
sources, systems and functions can be activated, e.g. AM, FM1, CD, DVD*, TV*, Bluetooth*, navigation* and park assist camera*.
For more information on all functions/
systems, see the respective section in the
owner's manual.
Park assist camera - CAM*, see
page 194.
Climate control, see page 214.
Volvo Sensus is the car's operating system,
the heart of your personal Volvo experience.
Volvo Sensus combines and presents many
functions in several of the car's systems in
the screen. With Volvo Sensus the car can be
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
83
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
Insert and remove the remote control
key
IMPORTANT
Foreign objects in the ignition switch may
jeopardise the function or destroy the lock.
Level
•
Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminated.
•
Electrically operated seats
can be adjusted.
•
The audio system can be
used for a limited time - see
page 246.
I
•
Sunroof, power windows, 12
V socket in the passenger
compartment, RTI, phone,
ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used.
II
•
•
The headlamps come on.
•
Several other systems are
activated. However, electric
heating in seat cushions and
the rear window can only be
activated after starting the
engine.
0
Do not press the remote control key incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the
detachable key blade, see page 50.
03
Withdraw the key
•
Push in the remote control key, allow it to
eject, then pull it out from the ignition
switch.
Functions
Functions at different levels
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/inserted.
NOTE
For cars with the Keyless* function the key
does not need to be inserted into the ignition switch but can be stored in e.g. a
pocket. For more information on Keyless
functions - see page 56.
To enable the use of a limited number of
functions with the engine switched off, the
car's electrical system can be set in 3 different levels (key positions) - 0, I and II - with
the remote control key. This owner's manual
describes these levels throughout using the
denomination "key positions".
The following table shows the functions available in each key position/level.
Insert the key
1. Hold the end of the remote control key
with the detachable key blade and insert
the key in the ignition switch.
2. Then press the key in the lock up to its
end position.
84
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds.
This key position consumes a
lot of current from the battery
and should therefore be avoided!
03 Your driving environment
Key positions
Selecting key position/level
Starting and stopping the engine
Key position 0
For information about starting/switching off
the engine - see page 119.
•
Unlock the car - at which point the car's
electrical system is at level 0.
Key position I
•
With the remote control key fully inserted
into the ignition switch1 - Briefly press
START/STOP ENGINE.
03
NOTE
To reach level I or II without starting the
engine - do not depress the brake/clutch
pedal when these key positions are due to
be selected.
Key position II
•
With the remote control key fully inserted
into the ignition switch1 - Give one long2
press on START/STOP ENGINE.
Back to key position 0
•
To return to key position 0 from position II
and I - Briefly press on START/STOP
ENGINE.
Audio system
For information on the audio system's functions with remote control key removed - see
page 246.
1
2
Not required for cars with the Keyless* function.
Approx. 2 seconds.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
85
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Front seats
WARNING
Adjust the position of the driver's seat
before setting off, never while driving.
Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the
event of sudden braking or an accident.
03
Lowering the front seat backrest*2
Lumbar support adjustment, turn the
wheel1.
Forward/backward: lift the handle to
adjust the distance to the steering wheel
and pedals. Check that the seat is locked
after changing position.
Raise/lower* front edge of seat cushion,
pump up/down.
Adjust backrest rake, turn the wheel.
1
2
86
The passenger seat backrest can be folded
forward to make room for long loads.
Raise/lower the seat, pump up/down.
Move the seat as far back/down as possible.
Control panel for power seat*.
Adjust the backrest to an upright position.
Also applies to power seat.
The sport seat backrest cannot be folded.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Lift the catches on the rear of the backrest and fold it forward.
4. Push the seat forward so that the head
restraint "locks" in under the glovebox.
Raising takes place in reverse order.
WARNING
Grasp the backrest and make sure that it
is properly locked after being folded up in
order to avoid personal injury in the event
of sudden braking or an accident.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Power seat*
trol key without the key in the ignition switch.
Seat adjustment is normally made in key
position I and can always be made when the
engine is running.
2. Hold the button depressed to store settings while depressing one of the memory
buttons.
Seat with memory function*
Hold one of the memory buttons depressed
until the seat and the door mirrors stop. If you
release the button then the movement of the
seat will stop.
Using a stored setting
03
Key memory* in remote control key3
Front edge of seat cushion up/down
Seat forward/backward and up/down
Backrest rake
The power front seats have overload protection which is tripped if a seat is blocked by an
object. If this happens, go to key position I or
0 and wait a short time before adjusting the
seat again.
Only one movement (forward/back/up/down)
can be made at a time.
Preparations
Store setting
Memory button
Memory button
Memory button
Button for storing settings
1. Adjust the seat and the door mirrors.
All remote control keys can be used by different drivers to store the settings for the driver's seat and door mirrors4. Proceed as follows:
The seats can be adjusted for a certain time
after unlocking the door with the remote con3
4
For key memory for Keyless function, see page 58.
Only if the car is equipped with power seat with memory and retractable power door mirrors.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
87
03 Your driving environment
Seats
•
•
03
•
Adjust the seat as you want it.
Lock the car by pressing the lock button
on the remote control key that you normally use. This stores the positions of the
seat and door mirrors in the remote control key's memory5.
Unlock the car (by pressing the unlock
button on the same remote control key)
and open the driver's door. The driver's
seat and door mirrors will automatically
adopt the positions that are stored in the
remote control key's memory (if the seat
has been moved since you locked the
car).
The key memory can be activated/deactivated in the menu system MY CAR under
Settings Car settings Car key
memory. For a description of the menu system, see page 206.
WARNING
Risk of crushing! Make sure that children
do not play with the controls. Check that
there are no objects in front of, behind or
under the seat during adjustment. Ensure
that none of the backseat passengers will
be trapped.
Heated seats
For heated seats, see page 218.
the head is covered if possible. Slide it up as
required.
To lower the head restraint again, the button
(located in the centre between the backrest
and head restraint, see illustration) must be
pressed in while the head restraint is pressed
down carefully.
Manual lowering of the outer head
restraints, rear seat
Rear seats
Head restraint, centre seat, rear
Emergency stop
If the seat accidentally begins to move, press
one of the setting buttons for the seat or
memory buttons in order to stop the seat.
Restarting to reach the seat position stored in
the key memory is performed by pressing the
unlock button on the remote control key. The
driver's door must then be open.
5
88
Pull the locking handle closest to the head
restraint to fold the head restraint forward.
Adjust the head restraint according to passenger height so that the whole of the back of
This setting does not affect settings that have been stored in the power seat's memory function.
The head restraint is moved back manually
until a "click" can be heard.
03 Your driving environment
Seats
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked
position after being raised.
•
If the entire backrest is to be folded then
the different sections should be folded
separately.
NOTE
When the backrests have been lowered
the head restraints must be moved forward slightly so as not to make contact
with the seat cushion.
Lowering the rear seat backrest
IMPORTANT
There must be no objects on the rear seat
when the backrest is to be folded down.
The seat belts must not be connected
either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.
NOTE
When the backrest has been raised, the
red indicator should no longer be showing.
If it is still showing then the backrest is not
locked in place.
NOTE
•
The left-hand section can be folded separately.
•
The centre section can be folded separately.
•
The right-hand section can only be folded
together with the centre section.
03
Raising takes place in reverse order.
The triple-section backrest can be folded in
different ways.
The front seats may need to be pushed
forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted
upwards, in order that the rear backrests
can be folded forward fully.
shows that the
on the lock catch
backrest is no longer locked in place.
WARNING
If the centre backrest is being lowered fold and adjust the centre backrest's
head restraint downwards, see page 88.
Check that the backrests and head
restraints in the rear seats are firmly locked
after raising.
The outer head restraints are lowered
automatically when the outer backrests
are lowered. Pull up the backrest's locking handle
while folding the backrest
forward at the same time. A red indicator
89
03 Your driving environment
Seats
Electrical lowering of the rear seat's
outer head restraints*
WARNING
The head restraints must be in locked
position after being raised.
03
1. The remote control key must be in position II.
2. Press the button to lower the rear outer
head restraints to improve rearward visibility.
WARNING
Do not lower the outer head restraints if
there are any passengers using of the
outer seats.
Move the head restraint back manually until a
click is heard.
90
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Steering wheel
Adjusting
Horn
WARNING
Adjust and secure the steering wheel
before driving.
With speed related power steering* the level
of steering force can be adjusted, see
page 238.
03
G021138
Keypads*
Adjusting the steering wheel.
Horn.
Lever - releasing the steering wheel
Press the centre of the steering wheel to signal.
Possible steering wheel positions
The steering wheel can be adjusted for both
height and depth:
1. Pull the lever towards you to release the
steering wheel.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position
that suits you.
3. Push back the lever to fix the steering
wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press
the steering wheel lightly at the same time
as you push the lever back.
Keypads in the steering wheel.
Cruise control, see page 153
Adaptive cruise control, see page 155
Audio and phone control, see page 247.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
91
03 Your driving environment
Steering wheel
Heating* of the steering wheel
Activate/deactivate the function in the menu
system MY CAR, see page 206.
03
Button position may vary depending on equipment selected and market.
Repeatedly press the button to switch
between the following functions:
Function
Indicator
Switched off
Button lamp extinguished
Heating
Button lamp illuminated
Automatic steering wheel heating
With activated automatic start of steering
wheel heating, the heating of the steering
wheel starts when the engine is started. Automatic start takes place when the car is cold
and the ambient temperature is below 7 °C.
92
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Light switches
Knob positions
Position
NOTE
The same lamps are used for daytime running lights and position/parking lamps
front. The brightness is higher when the
lamps are used as daytime running lights.
Position
Specification
lightsA
Overview, light switches.
Thumbwheel for adjusting display and
instrument lighting as well as ambient
lighting*
Button for rear fog lamp
Knob for daytime running lights and parking lamps
Thumbwheel1 for headlamp levelling
Daytime running
when
the car's electrical system is in
key position II or the engine is
running.
Main beam flash can be used.
Daytime running lights, side
marker lamps front and position/parking lamps/side marker
lamps rear when the car's electrical system is in key position II
or the engine is running.
Automatic switching to position/parking lamps/side marker
lamps when the car is parked.
Specification
Daytime running lights, side
marker lamps front and position/parking lamps/side marker
lamps rear during the day when
the car's electrical system is in
key position II or the engine is
running.
03
Automatic switching to dipped
beam and position/parking
lamps/side marker lamps in
poor light conditions or when
the windscreen wipers or rear
fog lamps are activated.
The "Tunnel detection*" function is activated, see page 95.
The "Active high beam*" function can be used, see
page 96.
Main beam can be activated
when dipped beam is switched
on.
Main beam flash can be used.
Main beam flash can be used.
1
Not available for cars equipped with active Xenon headlamps*.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
93
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Position
Specification
Dipped beam and position/
parking lamps/side marker
lamps.
03
Main beam can be activated.
adjusting the height of the beam. Lower the
beam if the car is heavily laden.
1. Leave the engine running, or have the
car's electrical system in key position I.
2. Roll the thumbwheel up/down to raise/
lower beam alignment.
Cars with active Xenon headlamps* have
automatic headlamp levelling and are therefore not equipped with the thumbwheel.
Position/parking lamps
Main beam flash can be used.
A
Fitted in or under the front bumper.
mode is used
Volvo recommends that
when the car is being driven, as long as traffic
situations or weather conditions are unfavourable for the "Active high beam*" function.
Instrument lighting
Different display and instrument lighting is
switched on depending on key position, see
page 84.
Thumbwheel positions for different load cases.
The display lighting is automatically subdued
in darkness - the sensitivity is set with the
thumbwheel.
The intensity of the instrument lighting is
adjusted with the thumbwheel.
Headlamp levelling
The load in the car changes the vertical alignment of the headlamp beam, which could
dazzle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by
94
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Only driver
Driver and passenger in the front passenger seat
Occupants in all seats
Occupants in all seats and maximum load
in the cargo area
Driver and maximum load in the cargo
area
Knob for headlamp control in the position for
position/parking lamps.
Turn the knob to the position for position/
parking lamps (number plate lighting is
switched on at the same time).
If the car's electrical system is in key position
II or the engine is running then the daytime
running lights are switched on instead of the
front position/parking lamps.
When it is dark outside and the tailgate is
opened the rear position/parking lamps are
switched on in order to alert traffic behind.
This takes place irrespective of what position
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
the knob is in or what key position the car's
electrical system is in.
Daytime running lights during the day.
DRL
Main/dipped beam
WARNING
This system help to save energy - it cannot
determine in all situations when daylight is
too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist
and rain.
The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with its lights in a
correct state and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations.
03
Tunnel detection*
Knob for headlamp control in AUTO position.
With the knob for headlamp control in
position the daytime running lights (Daytime
Running Lights - DRL) are activated automatically when the car is driven during the day. A
light sensor on the top of the instrument
panel changes from daytime running lights to
dipped beam at twilight or when daylight
becomes too weak. Switching to dipped
beam also takes place if the windscreen wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.
The function is available in cars with rain sensor*. The sensor detects the entrance to a
tunnel and resets the lighting from daytime
running lights to dipped beam. Approx. 20
seconds after the car has left the tunnel, the
lighting returns to daytime running lights. If
the car is driven into another tunnel within this
time period then dipped beam is kept
switched on. This avoids repeated changes to
the car's light settings.
Note that the headlamp control's knob must
position for tunnel detection
remain in
to work.
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control.
Position for main beam flash
Position for main beam
Dipped beam
With the knob in
position, dipped beam
is activated automatically at twilight or when
daylight becomes too weak. Dipped beam is
also activated automatically if the windscreen
wipers or rear fog lamps are activated.
dipped beam
With the knob in position
is always switched on when the engine is running or when key position II is active.
Main beam flash
Move the stalk switch gently towards the
steering wheel to the position for main beam
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
95
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
03
flash. Main beam comes on until the stalk
switch is released.
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
Main beam
Car with Xenon headlamps
Main beam can be activated when the knob
2 or
is in position
. Activate/deactivate main beam by moving the stalk switch
towards the steering wheel to the end position and then releasing. Alternatively, the
main beam can be deactivated by a light
press of the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel.
Unlike what happens during conventional
dimming, the light beam continues with main
beam on both sides of oncoming traffic or
vehicles ahead - only the part of the light
beam that points directly to the vehicle is
dimmed.
Activating/deactivating
AHB can be activated when the headlamp
control's knob is in position
.
When main beam has been activated the
symbol illuminates in the combined
instrument panel.
Stalk switch and knob for headlamp control in
AUTO position.
Active high beam - AHB*
Active high beam (Active High Beam - AHB) is
a function which uses a camera sensor at the
top edge of the windscreen to detect the
headlamp beams of oncoming traffic or the
rear lights of vehicles in front, and then
switches from main beam to dipped beam.
The function can also take streetlights into
account.
Car with halogen headlamps
The lighting returns to main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
2
96
The function can start while driving in the
dark when the car's speed is 20 km/h or
higher.
Dipped beam directly toward oncoming vehicles,
but continued main beam on both sides of the
vehicle.
The lighting returns to full main beam about a
second after the camera sensor no longer
detects the headlamp beams from oncoming
traffic or the rear lights from vehicles in front.
When dipped beam is switched on.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Activate/deactivate AHB by moving the lefthand stalk switch towards the steering wheel
to the end position and then releasing. Deactivation when main beam is on means that the
lights are reset directly to dipped beam.
symbol
When AHB is activated the
turns white in the instrument's information
display.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
When main beam is activated, the symbol
turns blue. This also applies for Xenon headlamps if the main beam is partially dimmed,
i.e. as soon as the light beam shines with
slightly more than dipped beam.
Manual operation
NOTE
AHB may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in
situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When
AHB becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked, the
symbol
message extinguishes and the
illuminates.
WARNING
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
AHB is an aid for using optimum light
composition when conditions are favourable.
Do not attach or fit anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor, as
this could reduce or prevent the function
of one or more camera-dependent systems.
The driver always bears responsibility for
manually switching between main and
dipped beam when traffic situations or
weather conditions so require.
If the message Active main beam
Temporary unavailable Switch manually is
shown in the combined instrument panel's
information display then you have to switch
manually between main and dipped beam.
However, the knob for headlamp control can
still remain in position
. The same
applies if the message Windscreen sensors
blocked See manual and the
symbol
symbol goes out when
are shown. The
these messages are shown.
IMPORTANT
Examples of when manual switching
between main and dipped beam may be
required:
•
•
•
•
•
In heavy rain or dense fog
•
When the traffic ahead has weak lighting
•
If there are pedestrians on or beside
the road
•
If there are highly reflective objects
such as signs in the vicinity of the road
•
When the lighting from oncoming traffic is obscured by e.g. a crash barrier
•
When there is traffic on connecting
roads
•
•
On the brow of a hill or in a hollow
In freezing rain
03
In snow flurries or slush
In moonlight
When driving in poorly lit built-up
areas
In sharp bends.
For more information on the limitations of the
camera sensor, see page 180.
97
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL*
the information display shows an explanatory
text and a further illuminated symbol.
Symbol
03
Display
Specification
Headlamp
system
malfunction Service
required
The system is
disengaged. Visit
a workshop if
the message
remains. Volvo
recommends
that you contact
an authorised
Volvo workshop.
Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left)
and activated (right) respectively.
If the car is equipped with active Xenon headlamps (Active Bending Lights – ABL) the light
from the headlamps follows the steering
wheel movement in order to provide maximum lighting in bends and junctions and so
provide increased safety.
The function is activated automatically when
the car is started (provided that it has not
been deactivated in the menu system
MY CAR). In the event of a fault in the funcsymbol illuminates in the comtion the
bined instrument panel at the same time as
3
4
98
The function is only active in twilight or darkness and only when the car is moving.
bend, or in the direction for which the direction indicators are used.
The function is activated when main beam or
dipped beam is used and the car's speed is
lower than approx. 30 km/h.
In addition, both cornering lights are switched
on as a supplement to the reversing lamp
during reversing.
Auxiliary lamps*
If the car has auxiliary lamps, the driver can
use the MY CAR menu system to choose
whether they should be deactivated or
switched on/off simultaneously with the main
beam4, see page 208.
The function3 can be deactivated/activated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Light settings Active
Bending Lights. For a description of the
menu system, see page 207.
Cornering lights
Active Xenon headlamps are equipped with
cornering lights that temporarily illuminate the
area diagonally in front of the car in the direction the steering wheel is turned in a sharp
Activated on delivery from the factory.
Auxiliary lamps must be connected to the electrical system by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Rear fog lamp
The brake light automatically comes on during braking. For information on the emergency brake lights and automatic hazard
warning flashers, see page 133.
The hazard warning flashers are activated
automatically when the car has been braked
so suddenly that the emergency brake lights
have been activated at a speed below
10 km/h. The hazard warning flashers remain
on when the car has stopped and are deactivated automatically when the car is driven off
again or the button is depressed. For more
information on Emergency brake lights and
automatic hazard warning flashers, see
page 133.
Hazard warning flashers
Direction indicators/flashers
Button for hazard warning flashers.
Direction indicators/flashers.
NOTE
Regulations for using rear fog lamps vary
between different countries.
Brake lights
03
Button for rear fog lamp.
The rear fog lamp can only be switched on
when key position II is active or the engine is
running and the headlamp control's knob is in
position
or
.
Press the button for On/Off. The rear fog
lamp's indicator symbol
in the combined instrument panel and the light in the
button both illuminate when the rear fog lamp
is switched on.
The rear fog lamp is switched off automatically when the engine is switched off or when
the headlamp control's knob is turned to
or
.
position
Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers. Both direction indicator symbols
in the combined instrument panel flash when
the hazard warning flashers are used.
99
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Short flash sequence
03
Interior lighting
Front roof lighting
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
first position and release. The direction
indicators flash three times. The function
can be activated/deactivated in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Triple
indicator. For a description of the menu
system, see page 207.
The front reading lamps are switched on or
off by pressing the relevant button in the roof
console.
Rear roof lighting
G021149
Continuous flash sequence
Move the stalk switch up or down to the
outer position.
Controls in roof console for the front reading
lamps and passenger compartment lighting.
Reading lamp, left-hand side
Reading lamp, right-hand side
Direction indicator symbols
For direction indicator symbols, see page 78.
Interior lighting
All lighting in the passenger compartment can
be switched on and off manually within
30 minutes from when:
100
•
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position 0
•
the car has been unlocked but the engine
has not been started.
G021150
The stalk switch remains in its position and is
moved back manually, or automatically by the
steering wheel movement.
Rear roof lighting.
The lamps are switched on or off by pressing
each respective button.
Courtesy lighting
Courtesy lighting (and passenger compartment lighting) is switched on and off respectively when a side door is opened or closed.
Glovebox lighting
Glovebox lighting is switched on and off
respectively when the lid is opened or closed.
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Vanity mirror lighting
The lighting for the vanity mirror, see
page 241, is switched on and off respectively
when the cover is opened or closed.
Lighting, cargo area
The lighting in the cargo area is switched on
and off respectively when the tailgate is
opened or closed.
Automatic lighting
•
the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade, see page 47 or 51
•
the engine has been switched off and the
car's electrical system is in key position
0.
Passenger compartment lighting is switched
off when:
•
•
the engine is started
the car is locked.
The switch for passenger compartment lighting has three positions for the lighting in the
passenger compartment:
The passenger compartment lighting comes
on and remains on for two minutes if one of
the doors is open.
•
Off – right-hand side pressed in, automatic lighting deactivated.
•
Neutral position – automatic lighting
activated.
If any lighting is switched on manually and
the car is locked then it will be switched off
automatically after two minutes.
•
On – left-hand side pressed in, passenger
compartment lighting switched on.
Neutral position
When the button is in neutral position the
passenger compartment lighting is switched
on and off automatically in accordance with
the following.
The passenger compartment lighting is
switched on and remains on for 30 seconds
if:
Mood lights
When the normal passenger compartment
lighting is switched off and the engine is running, a number of LEDs illuminate, including
one in the roof lighting, in order to provide a
low-light and enhance the mood while driving. This lighting goes out for a little while
after the normal passenger compartment
lighting when the car is locked. The brightness is controlled using the thumbwheel on
the headlamp control, see page 93.
Home safe light duration
Some of the exterior lighting can be kept
switched on to work as home safe lighting
after the car has been locked.
1. Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch.
2. Move the left-hand stalk switch toward
the steering wheel to the end position and
release it. The function can be activated
in the same way as with main beam flash,
see page 95.
03
3. Get out of the car and lock the door.
When the function is activated, dipped beam,
parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number
plate lighting, interior roof lamps and courtesy
lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the home safe
lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Home safe
light duration. For a description of the menu
system, see page 207.
}}
101
03 Your driving environment
Lighting
Approach light duration
Approach lighting is switched on with the
remote control key, see page 47, and is used
to switch on the car's lighting at a distance.
03
When the function is activated with the
remote control, the parking lamps, door mirror lamps, number plate lighting, interior roof
lamps and courtesy lighting are switched on.
The length of time for which the approach
lighting should be kept on can be set in the
menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Light settings Approach light
duration. For a description of the menu system, see page 207.
Adjusting headlamp pattern
The headlamp pattern does not need to be
adjusted for right or left-hand traffic. The
headlamp pattern is designed in such a way
that oncoming traffic is not dazzled.
102
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
Windscreen wipers1
Continuous wiping
The wipers sweep at normal speed.
the rain sensor can be adjusted using the
thumbwheel.
The wipers sweep at high speed.
When the rain sensor is activated a lamp in
the button is illuminated and the rain sensor
is shown in the combined
symbol
instrument panel.
IMPORTANT
Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen
in and that any snow or ice on the windscreen (and rear window) is scraped away.
Windscreen wipers and windscreen washers.
Rain sensor, on/off
Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency
Windscreen wipers off
Move the stalk switch to position 0
to switch off the windscreen wipers.
Single sweep
Raise the stalk switch and release to
make one sweep.
Intermittent wiping
Set the number of sweeps per time
unit with the thumbwheel when
intermittent wiping is selected.
1
03
Activating and setting the sensitivity
IMPORTANT
When activating the rain sensor, the car must
be running or the remote control key in position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk
switch must be in position 0 or in the position
for a single sweep.
Activate the rain sensor by pressing the but-
Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers
are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen
wipers are operating.
Service position wiper blade
ton
sweep.
. The windscreen wipers make one
Press the stalk switch up for the wipers to
make an extra sweep.
Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity.
(An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward.)
For cleaning the windscreen/wiper blades
and replacement of wiper blades see see
page 359 and 379.
Deactivate
Rain sensor*
The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it
detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of
Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the
button
or move the stalk switch down
to another wiper program.
Replacing the wiper blades see page 359, service position, wiper blade see page 359 and filling washer fluid see page 360.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
103
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
The rain sensor is automatically deactivated
when the remote control key is removed from
the ignition switch or five minutes after the
engine has been switched off.
IMPORTANT
03
The windscreen wipers could start and be
damaged in an automatic car wash.
Switch off the rain sensor while the car is
in motion or when the remote control key
is in position I or II. The symbol in the
combined instrument panel and the lamp
in the button go out.
Washing the windscreen
The windscreen wipers will make several
more sweeps and the headlamps are washed
once the stalk switch has been released.
Heated washer nozzles*
The washer nozzles are heated automatically
in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid
freezing solid.
High-pressure headlamp washing*
Washing the headlamps and windows
High-pressure headlamp washing consumes
a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid,
the headlamps are washed automatically at
every fifth windscreen wash cycle.
Reduced washing
If only approx. 1 litre of washer fluid remains
in the reservoir and the message that you
should fill the washer fluid is shown in the
combined instrument panel, then the supply
of washer fluid for the headlamps is switched
off. This is in order to prioritise cleaning the
windscreen and the visibility through it.
Washing function.
104
Wiping and washing the rear window
Move the stalk switch toward the steering
wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp
washers.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Rear window wiper – intermittent wiping
Rear window wiper – continuous speed
Press the stalk switch forward (see the arrow
in the illustration above) to initiate rear window washing and wiping.
NOTE
The rear window wiper is equipped with
overheating protection which means that
the motor is switched off if it overheats.
The rear window wiper works again after a
cooling period (30 seconds or longer,
depending on the heat in the motor and
the outside temperature).
03 Your driving environment
Wipers and washing
Wiper – reversing
Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen
wipers are on initiates intermittent rear window wiping2. The function stops when
reverse gear is disengaged.
If the rear window wiper is already on at continuous speed, no change is made.
03
NOTE
On cars with rain sensor, the rear window
wiper is activated with reversing, if the
sensor is activated and it is raining.
2
This function (intermittent wiping when reversing) can be deactivated. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.
105
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
General
Heat-reflecting windscreen*
Laminated glass
03
The glass is reinforced which provides better protection against
break-ins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. The windscreen and other windows*
have laminated glass.
(see the highlighted area in the above illustration).
Power windows
Water and dirt-repellent coating*
Windows are treated with a coating
that improves the view in difficult
weather conditions. Maintenance,
see page 380.
Areas where IR film is not applied.
Dimensions
IMPORTANT
Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove
ice from the windows. Use the defroster to
remove ice from the mirrors, see
page 109.
A
40 mm
B
80 mm
The windscreen is equipped with a heatreflecting film (IR) that reduces the solar heat
radiation into the passenger compartment.
The positioning of electronic equipment, such
as a transponder, behind a glass surface with
heat-reflecting film may affect its function and
performance.
For the optimal function of electronic equipment, it should be positioned on the part of
the windscreen with no heat-reflecting film
106
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Driver's door control panel.
Switch for electric child safety locks* and
disengaging rear power window buttons,
see page 65.
Rear window controls
Front window controls
WARNING
Check that none of the rear seat passengers is in danger of becoming trapped in
any way when closing the windows from
the driver's door.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
WARNING
Operating
Make sure that children or other passengers are not in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the windows,
in particular when the remote control key
is used.
WARNING
If there are children in the car - remember
to always switch off the power supply to
the power windows by selecting key position 0 and then take the remote control key
with you when leaving the car. For information on key positions - see page 85.
Closing of the windows is stopped and the
window is opened if anything prevents its
movement. It is possible to override the pinch
protection when closing has been interrupted,
e.g. if there is ice forming. After two successive closing interruptions the pinch protection
will be forced and the automatic function
deactivated for a short while, now it is possible to close by continually holding the button
pulled up.
03
NOTE
Operating the power windows.
Operating without auto
Operating with auto
All power windows can be operated using the
control panel for the driver's door - the control panels for the other doors can only each
operate their respective power window. Only
one control panel can be operated at a time.
In order for the power windows to be used
the key position must be at least I - see
page 84. The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the engine has
been switched off and after the remote control key has been removed - although not
after a door has been opened.
One way to reduce the pulsating wind
noise when the rear windows are open is
to also open the front windows slightly.
Operating without auto
Move one of the controls up/down gently.
The power windows move up/down as long
as the control is held in position.
Operating with auto
Move one of the controls up/down to the end
position and release it. The window runs
automatically to its end position.
Operating with the remote control key
and central locking
To remotely operate the power windows from
the outside with the remote control key or
from inside with central locking, see pages 48
and 61.
107
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
Resetting
Door mirrors
WARNING
If the battery is disconnected then the function for automatic opening must be reset so
that it can work correctly.
03
The mirror on the driver's side is the wideangle type to provide optimal vision.
Objects may appear further away than
they actually are.
1. Gently raise the front section of the button to raise the window to its end position
and hold it there for one second.
Storing the position1
2. Release the button briefly.
3. Raise the front section of the button again
for one second.
WARNING
Resetting must be carried out to ensure
that pinch protection works.
Door mirror controls.
Adjusting
1. Press the L button for the left-hand door
mirror or the R button for the right-hand
door mirror. The light in the button illuminates.
2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the
centre.
3. Press the L or R button again. The light
should no longer be illuminated.
The mirror positions are stored in the key
memory when the car has been locked with
the remote control key. When the car is
unlocked with the same remote control key
the mirrors and the driver's seat adopt the
stored positions when the driver's door is
opened.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Car key memory
Personal settings in key memory. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 207.
Angling the door mirror when parking1
The door mirror can be angled down for the
driver to view the side of the road when parking for example.
–
1
108
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 87.
Engage reverse gear and press the L or R
button.
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
When reverse gear is disengaged the mirror
automatically returns to its original position
after approx. 10 seconds, or sooner by pressing the L and R button.
Automatic angling of the door mirror
when parking1
When reverse gear is engaged the door mirror
is automatically angled down so that the
driver can see the side of the road when
parking for example. When reverse gear is
disengaged the mirror automatically returns
to its original position after a short time.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Side mirror settings Tilt
left mirror or Tilt right mirror. For a description of the menu system, see page 207.
Automatic retraction when locking1
When the car is locked/unlocked with the
remote control key the door mirrors are automatically retracted/extended.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Car settings Side mirror settings Fold
mirrors. For a description of the menu system, see page 207.
1
Resetting to neutral
Mirrors that have been moved out of position
by an external force must be reset electrically
to the neutral position for electric retracting/
extending to work correctly:
1. Retract the mirrors with the L and R buttons.
2. Fold them out again with the L and R buttons.
Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L
and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully extended position.
Home safe and approach lighting
The light on the door mirrors illuminates when
approach lighting or home safe lighting is
selected, see page 101.
03
Heated windscreen*, rear window and
door mirrors
3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
The mirrors are now reset in neutral position.
Automatic dimming*
For the door mirrors to be fitted with this
function requires that the interior rearview
mirror also has automatic dimming, see
page 110.
Retractable power door mirrors*
The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces:
1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously (key position must be at least I).
2. Release them after
approximately 1 second. The mirrors
automatically stop in the fully retracted
position.
Heating, windscreen
Heating, rear window and door mirrors
Only in combination with power seat with memory, see page 87.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
109
03 Your driving environment
Windows, rearview and door mirrors
The function is used to remove ice and misting from the windscreen, rear window and
door mirrors.
03
Interior rearview mirror
One press of the respective button starts the
heating. The light in the button indicates that
the function is active. Switch off the heating
as soon as the ice/misting is cleared in order
not to load the battery unnecessarily. However, the function is switched off automatically after a certain time.
NOTE
See also the section "Heated windscreen and
max. defroster" on page 221.
The door mirrors and rear window are demisted/defrosted automatically if the car is
started in an outside temperature lower than
+7 °C. Automatic defrosting can be selected
in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Climate settings Auto start rear
defrost. Select between On or Off. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 207.
Control for dimming
Manual dimming
Bright light from behind could be reflected in
the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use
dimming with the dimming control when
lights from behind are distracting:
1. Use dimming by moving the control in
towards the passenger compartment.
2. Return to normal position by moving the
control towards the windscreen.
Automatic dimming*
Bright light from behind is automatically
dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control
for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming.
110
The rearview mirror contains two sensors one forward facing and one rearward facing that work together to identify and eliminate
dazzling light. The forward facing sensor
detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle
headlights behind.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking
permits, transponders, sun visors or
objects in the seats or in the cargo area in
such a way that light is prevented from
reaching the sensors, then the dimming
function of the interior rearview and door
mirrors is reduced.
The compass* can only be specified for interior rearview mirror with automatic dimming,
see page 111.
03 Your driving environment
Compass*
Operation
Calibration
The compass may need calibrating to show
the correct compass direction.
The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones.
The compass should be calibrated if the car
is moved across several magnetic zones.
03
Proceed as follows to perform calibration:
Rearview mirror with compass.
The upper right-hand corner of the rearview
mirror has an integrated display that shows
the compass direction in which the front of
the car is pointing. Eight different directions
are shown with English abbreviations: N
(north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south
east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west)
and NW (north west).
The compass is activated automatically when
the car is started or in key position II, see
page 84. To deactivate/activate the compass
- press in the button on the underside of the
mirror using a paper clip for example.
G030295
1. Stop the car in a large open area free
from steel structures and high-voltage
power lines.
2. Start the car and switch off all electrical
equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.)
and ensure that all doors are closed.
NOTE
Calibration may fail or not start at all if
electrical equipment is not switched off.
3. Hold the button on the underside of the
rearview mirror depressed
approx. 3 seconds. The number of the
current magnetic zone is shown.
Magnetic zones.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown.
See the map of magnetic zones for the
compass.
5. Wait until the display returns to showing
the character C, or hold the button on the
bottom of the rearview mirror depressed
for approx. 6 seconds (use e.g. a paper
clip) until the character C is shown.
6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no
more than 10 km/h until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating
that calibration is complete. Then drive a
further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration.
7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the
character C is shown in the display when
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
111
03 Your driving environment
Compass*
the heated windscreen is activated, perform the calibration in accordance with
point 6 above with the heated windscreen
activated, see page 221.
03
112
8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Power sunroof*
General
Opening
The sunroof controls are located in the roof
panel. The sunroof can be opened vertically
at the rear edge and horizontally. Key position
I or II is required for the sunroof to be
opened.
For maximum sunroof opening, move the
control back to the position for automatic
opening and release.
Horizontal opening
WARNING
If there are children in the car:
Remember to always switch off the power
supply to the sunroof by selecting key
position 0 and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. For
information on key positions - see
page 85.
Open manually by pulling the control backwards to the point of resistance for manual
opening. The sunroof moves to maximum
open position as long as the button is kept
depressed.
03
Vertical opening
Closing
Close manually by pushing the control forwards to the point of resistance for manual
closing. The sunroof moves to closed position as long as the button is kept depressed.
Horizontal opening, backward/forward.
G028900
G017823
WARNING
Risk of crushing when sunroof is closed.
The sunroof's pinch-protection function
only operates during automatic closing,
not manual.
Opening, automatic
Opening, manual
Closing, manual
Closing, automatic
Close automatically by pressing the control to
the position for automatic closing and then
release it.
The power supply to the sunroof is switched
off by selecting key position 0 and removing
the remote control key from the ignition
switch.
Vertical opening, raised at the rear edge.
Open by pressing the rear edge of the
control upward.
Close by pulling the rear edge of the control down.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
113
03 Your driving environment
Power sunroof*
Closing using the remote control key or
central locking button
the handle and slide the screen forward to
close it.
Pinch protection
The sunroof's pinch protection function is
triggered if it is blocked by an object during
automatic closing. If blocked, the sunroof will
stop and automatically open to the previous
position.
03
G021345
Wind deflector
One long press on the lock button closes the
sunroof and all the windows, see pages 47
and 61. The doors and the tailgate are
locked. To interrupt closing, press the lock
button again.
WARNING
If the sunroof is closed using the remote
control key, check that no one is in danger
of becoming trapped in any way.
Sunscreen
The sunroof has a wind deflector that is
folded up when the sunroof is in the open
position.
The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior
sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back automatically when the sunroof is opened. Grip
114
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
General information on the alcolock
Functions
The alcolock's1 function is to prevent the car
from being driven by individuals under the
influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be
started the driver must take a breath test that
verifies that he/she is not under the influence
of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in
accordance with each market's limit value in
force for driving legally.
Battery
Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery status:
WARNING
The Alcolock is an aid and does not
exempt the driver from responsibility. It is
always the responsibility of the driver to be
sober and to drive the car safely.
Operation
1. Nozzle for breath test.
2. Switch.
Indicator
lamp (4)
Battery status
Green flashing
Charging in progress
Green
Fully charged
Yellow
Semi-charged
Red
Discharged - fit the charger
in the holder or connect the
power supply cable from
the glovebox.
3. Transmission button.
4. Lamp for battery status.
03
5. Lamp for result of breath test.
6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.
NOTE
Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will
keep the built-in battery fully charged and
the Alcolock is activated automatically
when the car is opened.
1
Also called Alcoguard.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
115
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
unlocked then it must first be activated
with the switch (2).
Storage
Result after breath test
3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath
and blow with an even pressure until a
"click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds.
The result will be one of the alternatives in
the following table Result after breath
test.
03
4. If no message is shown then the transmission to the car may have failed - in
which case, press the button (3) to transmit the result to the car manually.
Handheld unit storage and charging station.
•
The handheld alcolock unit is released by
depressing it slightly in its holder and
releasing it - it then springs out and can
be removed from the holder.
•
Replace the handheld unit in the holder
by pushing it in until it engages.
•
Store the handheld unit in the holder this provides it with the best protection
and keeps its batteries fully charged.
Specification
Green lamp +
Alcoguard
Approved test
Start the engine - no
alcohol content measured.
Yellow lamp +
Alcoguard
Approved test
Engine starting possible - measured alcohol
content is above
0.1 promille but below
the limit value in
forceA.
Red lamp + Disapproved test
Wait 1 minute
Engine starting not
possible - measured
alcohol content is
above the limit value in
forceA.
5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock in its holder.
6. Start the engine following an approved
breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it
must be repeated.
Before starting the engine
The Alcolock is activated automatically and is
then ready for use when the car is opened.
1. When the indicator lamp (6) is green the
Alcolock is ready for use.
2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If
the Alcolock is outside the car when it is
116
Indicator
lamp (5) +
Display text
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
A
Limits vary between countries, so find out what limits
apply. See also the section entitled General information on
the Alcolock on page 115
NOTE
After a completed period of driving, the
engine can be restarted within 30 minutes
without a new breath test.
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
To bear in mind
Before the breath test
In order to obtain correct function and as
accurate a measurement result as possible:
•
Avoid eating or drinking approx.
5 minutes before the breath test.
•
Avoid excess windscreen washing - the
alcohol in the washer fluid may result in
an incorrect measurement result.
Change of driver
In order to ensure that a new breath test is
carried out in the event of a change of driver depress the switch (2) and the send button (3)
simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At
which point the car returns to start inhibition
mode and a new approved breath test is
required before starting the engine.
Calibration and service
The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated
at a workshop2 every 12 months.
30 days before recalibration is necessary the
combined instrument panel shows the message Alcoguard Calibr. required. If calibration is not carried out within these 30 days
then normal engine starting will be blocked only starting with the Bypass function will
2
then be possible, see page 117 section
Emergency situation.
The message can be cleared by pressing the
send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out
on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then
reappears each time the engine is started only recalibration at a workshop2 can clear
the message permanently.
In extremely cold weather the heating time
can be reduced by taking the Alcolock
indoors.
Emergency situation
In the event of an emergency situation or the
Alcolock is out of order, it is possible to
bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car.
03
NOTE
Cold or hot weather
The colder the weather the longer it takes
before the Alcolock is ready for use:
All Bypass activation is logged and saved
in memory, see page 8 in the section,
Recording data.
Temperature (ºC)
Maximum heating time (seconds)
+10 to +85
10
-5 to +10
60
-40 to -5
180
At temperatures below -20 ºC or above
+60 ºC the Alcolock requires additional power
supply. The combined instrument panel
shows Alcoguard insert power cable. In
which case, connect the power supply cable
from the glovebox and wait until indicator
lamp (6) is green.
After Bypass function activation the combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard
Bypass enabled the whole time while driving
and can only be reset by a workshop2.
The Bypass function can be tested without
the error message being logged - in which
case, carry out all the steps without starting
the car. The error message is cleared when
the car is locked.
When the Alcolock is installed, either the
Bypass or Emergency function is selected as
the bypassing option. This setting can be
changed afterwards at a workshop2.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
117
03 Your driving environment
Alcolock*
Activating the Bypass function
•
03
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the combined instrument panel first shows Bypass activated
Wait 1 minute and then Alcoguard
Bypass enabled - after which the engine
can be started.
This function can be activated several times.
The error message shown during driving can
only be cleared at a workshop2.
Activating the Emergency function
•
Depress and hold the left-hand stalk
switch OK button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for
approx. 5 seconds - the combined instrument panel shows Alcoguard Bypass
enabled and the engine can be started.
This function can be used once, after which a
reset must be made at a workshop2.
2
118
Symbols and display messages
In addition to the previously described messages, the combined instrument panel's display can also show the following:
Display text
Meaning/Action
Alcoguard
Restart possible
The engine has been
switched off for less than
30 minutes - engine starting possible without
new test.
Alcoguard
Service
required
Contact a workshop2.
Alcoguard No
signal
Transmission failed send manually with button (3) or take a new
breath test.
Alcoguard
Invalid test
Test failed - take a new
breath test.
Alcoguard
Blow longer
Blowing too short - blow
for longer.
Alcoguard
Blow softer
Blowing too hard - blow
more gently.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Display text
Meaning/Action
Alcoguard
Blow harder
Blowing too weak - blow
harder.
Alcoguard
wait Preheating
Heating not finished wait for text Alcoguard
Blow 5 seconds.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
Diesel engine
2. Fully depress the brake pedal1.
WARNING
3. Press the START/STOP ENGINE button
and then release it.
Never remove the remote control key from
the ignition switch after starting the engine
or when the car is being towed.
When the engine is started the starter motor
works until the engine is started or until its
overheating protection triggers.
Ignition switch with remote control key extracted/inserted. and START/STOP ENGINE button.
IMPORTANT
Do not press in the remote control key
incorrectly turned - Hold the end with the
detachable key blade, see page 50.
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and press it in to its end position. Note that if the car is equipped with
an alcolock then a breath test must first
be approved before the engine can be
started - see page 115.
1
WARNING
When starting the engine in normal conditions
the car's electric drive motor is prioritised the diesel engine remains switched off. This
means that after pressing the START/STOP
ENGINE button the electric motor has
"started" and the car is ready to drive. A
started motor is indicated by the combined
instrument panel's indicator lamps extinguishing and its preset theme illuminating
(see page 74).
NOTE
The idling speed can be noticeably higher
than normal for certain engine types during
cold starting. This is so that the emissions
system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which
minimises exhaust emissions and protects
the environment.
However, there are situations where the diesel engine is started instead, e.g. in the event
of the temperature being too low or if the
hybrid battery needs charging.
IMPORTANT
If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further
attempt. Starting capacity increases if the
battery is allowed to recover.
03
Always remove the remote control key
from the ignition switch when leaving the
car, and make sure that the key position is
0 - in particular if there are children in the
car. For information on how this works see page 85.
Keyless drive*
•
Carry out steps 2-3 for starting the
engine.
For more information on Keyless drive - see
page 56.
If the car is moving then it is enough to press the START/STOP ENGINE button to start the engine.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
119
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine
switch2 and the START/STOP ENGINE
button is depressed.
NOTE
A prerequisite for the engine to start is that
one of the car's remote control keys with
the Keyless drive function is in the passenger compartment or cargo area.
03
WARNING
Never remove the remote control key from
the car while driving or during towing.
•
The steering lock locks when the driver's
door is opened after the engine has been
switched off.
Key positions
For information on the remote control key's
different key positions - see page 84
Stop the engine
To switch off the engine:
•
Press START/STOP ENGINE - the
engine stops.
If the gear selector is not in P position or if
the car is moving:
•
Press twice on START/STOP ENGINE or
hold the button depressed until the
engine stops.
Steering lock
A mechanical noise can be perceived when
the steering lock unlocks or locks.
•
2
120
The steering lock unlocks when the
remote control key is in the ignition
Cars with Keyless drive must have a remote control key inside the passenger compartment.
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine – external battery
Jump starting
4. Connect one of the red jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's positive
terminal (1).
IMPORTANT
Connect the start cable carefully to avoid
short circuits with other components in the
engine compartment.
3. If the donor battery is installed in another
car - switch off the donor car's engine
and make sure that the two cars do not
touch each other.
10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and
allow it to run a few minutes at a speed
slightly higher than idle
approx. 1500 rpm.
03
NOTE
When jump starting the car, the following
steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage:
2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V.
9. Check that the jump lead clamps are
affixed securely so that there are no
sparks during the starting procedure.
11. Start the engine in the car with the discharged battery with the remote control
key inserted and a press the START/
STOP ENGINE button, see page 119.
If the battery is flat then the car can be
started with current from another battery.
1. Insert the remote control key in key position 0, see page 84.
8. Connect the other clamp to a grounding
point, e.g. right-hand engine mounting at
the top, the outer screw head (4).
5. Open the clips on the front cover of the
battery in your car
and remove the
cover.
6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp
onto the car's positive terminal (2).
7. Connect one of the black jump lead's
clamps to the donor battery's negative
terminal (3).
When starting the engine in normal conditions the car's electric drive motor is prioritised - the diesel engine remains switched
off. This means that after pressing the
START/STOP ENGINE button the electric
motor has "started" and the car is ready to
drive. A started motor is indicated by the
combined instrument panel's indicator
lamps extinguishing and its preset theme
illuminating.
121
03 Your driving environment
Starting the engine – external battery
IMPORTANT
Do not touch the crocodile clips during the
start procedure. There is a risk of sparks
forming.
03
12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red.
> Make sure that none of the black jump
lead's clamps comes into contact with
the battery's positive terminal or the
clamp connected to the red jump lead!
13. Refit the front cover for the battery in your
car.
WARNING
122
•
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
For more information on the car's battery see page 362.
03 Your driving environment
Drive systems
General
This V60 Plug-in Hybrid is a so-called parallel
hybrid, which means that it has two separate
drive systems: an electric motor and a diesel
engine. Depending on the driver-selected
drive mode and available electric energy, the
two drive systems can be used either individually or in parallel.
Two drive systems
An advanced control system combines the
properties of both drive systems in order to
provide optimum driving economy.
Diesel engine
Electric motor
The electric motor primarily drives the car at
low speeds, the diesel engine at higher
speeds and during more active driving.
NOTE
The drive cannot set the "wrong" drive
mode - if any parameter is not met in a
specific situation, the system will automatically choose another, more appropriate
drive mode.
Both the diesel engine and electric motor can
generate motive force directly to the wheels.
The diesel engine can also charge the electric
motor's hybrid battery with a special hazard
voltage generator.
03
Drive modes
The driver can select the different drive
modes while driving. Regardless of selected
drive mode, the control system checks that
the combination of drivability, driving experience, environmental impact and fuel economy is always optimal in relation to the drive
mode selected.
Controls for drive modes.
If a drive mode cannot be activated then the
reason is explained with a text message in
the combined instrument panel.
Hybrid battery
Hazard voltage generator1
1
Combined hazard voltage generator and starter motor - ISG (Integrated Starter Generator).
123
03 Your driving environment
Drive systems
WARNING
•
03
Do not leave the car in an unventilated
area with drive mode activated and the
diesel engine switched off - the engine
will start automatically when the
energy level in the hybrid battery is
low, and the exhaust fumes may cause
serious harm to humans and animals.
– PURE
This option focuses on electric drive as well as low
energy consumption, and
helps the driver to maximise
driving on the hybrid battery.
Since the mileage in electric
operation is connected to the car's total
energy consumption, deductions are made
for functions that limit mileage, e.g. climate
and dynamic performance. To obtain the
maximum possible mileage the air conditioning is therefore switched off - however, it can
be activated with the AC button if necessary,
see page 221.
NOTE
In the event of misting, press AC, AUTO or
the defroster button.
124
Please note
This drive mode can only be selected when
the hybrid battery has a sufficiently high
energy level.
The diesel engine can start automatically in
certain cases, despite the PURE drive mode
being selected, for example:
•
•
if the speed exceeds 125 km/h
if the driver requests more motive force
than electric drive can provide
•
if the hybrid battery's energy level is too
low and it must be charged
•
in the event if system/component limitations, e.g. low outside temperature, see
page 126.
– HYBRID
This option is the car's preset start mode. The control
system uses both the electric
motor and the diesel engine individually or in parallel and calculates the optimal
use with regard to performance, fuel consumption and comfort.
The capacity to run solely with the electric
motor in the HYBRID drive mode depends on
the hybrid battery's energy level and, for
example, the requirement for heating/cooling
in the passenger compartment. At high level
the capacity for solely driving with electric
operation is same as in PURE mode, i.e. the
car is easy to drive as an electric car (high
electrical power output available).
At low energy level (hybrid battery is almost
empty) the battery's energy level must also
be maintained at the same time, leading to
the diesel engine starting more often.
To restore the function to drive solely on electricity in HYBRID mode:
•
Charge the hybrid battery from a 230
VAC socket with the charging cable (see
page 304) or use the SAVE function.
Please note
•
The diesel engine may even start with a
high energy level in the hybrid battery,
such as to raise/lower the temperature in
the passenger compartment.
– POWER
This option sets the car in
the best response and performance mode, by means of
both the electric motor and
diesel engine being activated
the whole time. The car has
sportier characteristics and
faster response to accelerating.
The use of lower gears is prioritised during
active driving, leading to a delayed upshift.
03 Your driving environment
Drive systems
Please note
•
•
The diesel engine runs continuously.
•
This drive mode results involves
increased fuel consumption.
The car is driven by both the front and
rear wheels.
– AWD
The mode activates all-wheel
drive, which improves the
car's grip and traction. The
mode is primarily intended
for low speed in slippery
driving conditions.
Please note
•
•
The diesel engine runs continuously.
This drive mode results involves
increased fuel consumption.
– SAVE
This function starts charging
the hybrid battery and
ensures that its energy level
does not fall below a
capacity equivalent to
approx. 20 km driving with
electric operation. The idea
is to be able to save this energy for later
when electric operation is more suitable, e.g.
for urban driving.
If the hybrid battery's energy level is low
when pressing the SAVE button then the diesel engine will first charge it to a capacity
equivalent to approx. 20 km driving with electric operation.
Driving with the electric motor saves more
fuel at low speeds than at higher speeds. For
this reason, select SAVE primarily when the
hybrid battery's energy level is high and a
planned journey shall start with a longer distance at higher speeds (e.g. on motorways)
and end with a distance at low speeds, e.g.
urban driving.
Pressing the SAVE button when the hybrid
battery's energy level is equivalent to more
than approx. 20 km driving with electric operation will maintain the hybrid battery's current
energy level.
Regardless of selected drive mode, charging
of the hybrid battery is activated temporarily
in the background - similar to the SAVE function - then an automatic DPF regeneration is
performed, see page 303.
Please note
•
This drive mode results involves
increased fuel consumption.
•
After the diesel engine has charged the
hybrid battery to the SAVE level the control system will stop/start the diesel
engine in the same way as for low energy
level in HYBRID mode.
Drive modes in MY CAR
The car's menu system contains brief
descriptions about the car's different drive
modes, see page 206:
1. Go to MY CAR
modes.
HYBRID
03
Driving
2. There, select between PURE, HYBRID,
POWER, AWD and SAVE and confirm
with OK.
Start/Stop function
The control system determines when the diesel engine can be stopped and be switched
off, as well as for how long. This is equivalent
to the Start/Stop function in conventional
cars with fuel-driven engines.
The "Start/Stop" function in a
V60 Plug-in Hybrid will vary depending on the
selected drive mode, but it is mainly controlled by how the driver uses the accelerator
pedal and brake pedal, as well as the hybrid
battery's charging requirement. Exceptions
are the AWD and POWER drive modes when the diesel engine runs continuously.
}}
125
03 Your driving environment
Drive systems
Trip statistics
The car stores the statistics of consumed
electricity/diesel related to mileage travelled,
see page 237.
03
In addition to via the trip computer, the trip
statistics can also be accessed via the MY
CAR menu system:
•
Go to MY CAR Trip statistics and
confirm with OK.
Energy flow
The centre console's screen can graphically
display whether the engine or motor is driving
the car and how the electrical energy is flowing - whether the hybrid battery is charging or
providing energy to the electric motor.
The function is activated in the menu system:
•
Go to MY CAR HYBRID
flow and confirm with OK.
Power
Limitation due to low outside
temperature
To avoid the risk of paraffin precipitate (see
page 301) in the diesel fuel due to low thermal resistance, the car has a market-dependent function which automatically limits the
option of using electric operation with the
PURE or HYBRID drive mode in low temperatures. If such a situation occurs then the diesel engine will be running the whole time.
Diesel fuel thermal resistance is a measure of
the usefulness of the fuel at low temperatures. Normally, the diesel fuel's thermal
properties are adapted to the climate zone
and season in which it is distributed and sold.
See also information about diesel fuel on
page 301.
The automatic limitation in low temperatures
increases gradually depending on the age of
the fuel in the tank. When the car has recently
been refuelled there is no limitation, but it
increases the older the fuel in the tank
becomes, counted in months.
The purpose of the function is, in low outside
temperatures, to allow the car to consume
fuel at such a rate that fresh fuel - with the
correct thermal resistance - can/must be
added before the critical temperature for the
current fuel is reached.
126
Fuel age
Old diesel fuel (from approx. 5 months and
older) in combination with condensation can,
in some circumstances, lead to algal and
bacterial growth in the fuel system and/or oxidation of the fuel with the risk of operational
disruption as a result.
To avoid such problems, the car has a built-in
function which checks the age of the fuel. In
connection with this, a self-explanatory text
message may appear, for example:
• Aged fuel Start diesel engine to
consume fuel
• Aged fuel Engine will run to consume
fuel
• Aged fuel Fill up fuel tank
Follow the recommended action where
appropriate.
Symbols and messages
This symbol illuminates in combination with a text message and an
acoustic warning signal if an unbelted driver opens the driver's door
with the diesel engine or electric motor running.
The same thing happens if an unbelted driver
starts the engine with the driver's door open.
03 Your driving environment
Drive systems
Here are some examples of messages, their
meaning and suggestions for action:
Message
Specification
Action
PURE not available due to low hybrid
system temperature
One or more components in the drive system have
not reached the correct operating temperature.
Drive in HYBRID mode until the message
changes to PURE available - then press
the PURE button.
PURE not available due to temporary
hybrid system limitations
Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating temperature not correct.
Drive in HYBRID mode until the message
changes to PURE available - then press
the PURE button.
PURE not available due to low battery
charge
The hybrid battery's energy level is too low.
Drive in SAVE mode until the message
changes to PURE available or charge
the battery with 230 VAC - then press the
PURE button.
PURE not available when gear lever in
manual position
The gear selector is in manual "+/-" position.
Move the gear selector to the side, to
automatic mode and then press the
PURE button.
PURE available
The PURE mode is available again after the previous
limitation.
–
POWER not available due to temporary
hybrid system limitations
Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating temperature not correct.
–
SAVE not available due to temporary
hybrid system limitations
Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating temperature not correct.
–
AWD not available due to temporary
hybrid system limitations
Temporary system limitation, e.g. operating temperature not correct.
–
03
127
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
General
A V60 Plug-in Hybrid is driven and operated
in the same way as a car with a conventional
internal combustion engine and automatic
gearbox.
03
The exception is that with the gear selector in
manual gear position (+/-) the diesel engine
will always be running. The driver must then
change manually and the car engine brakes
when the accelerator pedal is released - see
the heading "Geartronic - Manual gear positions (+/-)" page 129.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to any drive system
components, the working temperature of
the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of
overheating, a warning symbol in the combined instrument lights up and a text message is shown. Follow the recommendation given in the text message.
while the driver's foot is moved from brake
pedal to accelerator pedal.
Automatic gearbox
The temporary braking effect releases after
several seconds or when the driver accelerates.
Gear shift indicator*
An essential detail in connection with environmental driving is to drive in the right gear and
to change gear in good time.
An indicator is available as an aid on certain
variants - GSI (Gear Shift Indicator) - which
notifies the driver when it is appropriate to
engage the next higher or lower gear in order
to obtain the lowest possible fuel consumption. However, taking into consideration characteristics such as performance and vibration-free running, it may be advantageous to
change gear at a higher engine speed. The
framed number indicates the current gear.
Combined instrument panel "Digital" with gear
shift indicator.
Automatic gearbox Geartronic
Start assistance on a hill - HSA*
The foot brake can be released before setting
off or reversing uphill - the HSA (Hill Start
Assist) function means that the car does not
roll backwards.
The function means that the pedal pressure in
the brake system remains for several seconds
128
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
D: Automatic gear positions. +/–: Manual gear
positions. S: Sport mode*.
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
The combined instrument panel shows the
position of the gear selector using the following indications: P, R, N, D, S*, 1, 2, 3 etc.
Gear positions
Automatic gear positions are
indicated on the right of the
combined instrument panel.
(Only one marker is illuminated at a time - the one
showing the current gear
selector position.)
Symbol "S" for Sport mode is ORANGE when
the mode is active.
Parking position - P
Select P position when starting the engine or
when the car is parked.
•
In order to be able to move the gear
selector from P position, the brake pedal
must first be depressed firmly.
NOTE
When starting the engine there is an automatic function check of the brake system
when the driver depresses the brake pedal
to take the gear selector from the P-position. During the function check the pedal
travel is slightly longer than during normal
braking.
The gearbox is mechanically blocked when
the P position is engaged. Apply the parking
brake as well, as a precaution - see
page 136.
NOTE
the level of acceleration and speed. The car
must be stationary when the gear selector is
moved to D position from R position.
Geartronic – Manual gear positions
(+S-)
With the gear selector in manual gear position
"+S-" the diesel engine is permanently in
operation. The driver must then change manually and the car engine brakes when the
accelerator pedal is released.
The gear selector must be in P position to
allow the car to be locked and alarmed.
IMPORTANT
03
The manual gear position is reached
by moving the lever to the side from
position D to the end position at
"+S-". The combined instrument
panel's symbol "+S-" changes colour from
WHITE to ORANGE and the digits 1, 2, 3 etc.
are displayed in a box, corresponding to the
gear that has just been selected.
The car must be stationary when position
P is selected.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when
parking on a slope - the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to
hold the car in all situation.
•
Reverse position - R
The car must be stationary when R position is
selected.
Neutral position - N
No gear is engaged and the engine can be
started. Apply the parking brake if the car is
stationary with the gear selector in N position.
Drive position - D
Move the lever forward towards "+" (plus)
to change up a gear and release it - the
lever returns to its neutral position
between "+" and "–".
or
•
Pull the lever back towards "–" (minus) to
change down a gear and release it.
The manual gearshift mode "+S–" can be
selected at any time while driving.
D is the normal driving position. Shifting up
and down takes place automatically based on
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
129
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
To return to automatic driving mode:
03
•
Move the lever to the side to the end
position at D.
Geartronic - Winter mode
It can be easier to pull away on slippery roads
if 3rd gear is engaged manually.
Kick-down is used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking.
1. Depress the brake pedal and move the
gear selector from D position to the end
position at "+S–" - the combined instrument panel changes indication from D to
the figure 11.
Safety function
3. Release the brake and accelerate carefully.
The gearbox "winter mode" means that the
car moves off with a lower engine speed and
reduced engine power on the drive wheels.
1
Mechanical gear selector inhibitor
When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the
way to the floor (beyond the position normally
regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is
immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown.
If the accelerator is released from the kickdown position, the gearbox automatically
changes up.
2. Scroll up to gear 3 by pushing the lever
forward towards "+" (plus) twice - the
combined instrument panel changes indication from 1 to 3.
130
Kick-down
G021351
Geartronic automatically shifts down if the
driver allows the speed to decrease lower
than a level suitable for the selected gear, in
order to avoid jerking and stalling.
To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down
function.
The gear selector can be moved forward and
back freely between N and D. Other positions
are locked with a latch that is released with
the inhibitor button on the gear selector.
Geartronic does not permit downshifting/
kick-down which would result in an engine
speed high enough to damage the engine.
Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift
down in this way at high engine speed – the
original gear remains engaged.
With the inhibitor button depressed the lever
can be moved forwards or backwards
between P, R, N and D.
When kick-down is activated the car can
change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed. The car changes up
when the engine reaches its maximum speed
in order to prevent damage to the engine.
If the car has Sport mode* then "S" is shown first.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Automatic gear selector inhibitor
The automatic gearbox has special safety
systems:
Parking position (P)
Stationary car with engine running:
03 Your driving environment
Gearboxes
•
Keep your foot on the brake pedal when
moving the gear selector to another position.
Deactivate automatic gear selector
inhibitor
4. Set the rubber mat back in place.
Electric gear inhibitor – Shiftlock
Parking position (P)
To be able to move the gear selector from P
to other gear positions, the brake pedal must
be depressed and the remote control key
must be in position II, see page 84.
03
Shiftlock – Neutral (N)
If the gear selector is in N position and the
car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds
(irrespective of whether the engine is running)
then the gear selector is locked.
To be able to move the gear selector from N
to other gear positions, the brake pedal must
be depressed and the remote control key
must be in position II, see page 84.
If the car cannot be driven, e.g. due to a flat
battery, the gear selector must be moved
from the P position so that the car can be
moved.
Lift the rubber mat in the compartment
behind the centre console and locate a
hole2 for the key blade3 in the bottom of
the compartment.
Search for a spring-loaded button down
in the hole with the key blade; depress
the button with the blade and hold.
Move the gear selector from the P position and pull up the key blade.
2
3
There may be 2 holes - one for the key blade and one that fixes the rubber mat.
For information on the key blade, see page 50.
131
03 Your driving environment
All Wheel Drive - AWD
03
Use this button on the centre
console to activate all-wheel
drive AWD (All Wheel Drive),
see page 124. The mode is
primarily intended for use at
low speed in slippery driving
conditions.
To achieve the best possible traction and prevent wheel spin the motive force is distributed
automatically to the wheels with the best grip.
Under normal driving conditions, the majority
of power is transmitted to the front wheels.
132
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
General
The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If
one brake circuit is damaged then this will
mean that the brakes engage at a deeper
level and higher pedal pressure is needed to
produce the normal braking effect.
The driver's brake pedal pressure is assisted
by a brake servo.
WARNING
The brake servo only works when the
engine is running.
If the brake is used when the engine is
switched off then the pedal travel is slightly
longer and a higher pedal pressure must be
used to brake the car.
In very hilly terrain or when driving with a
heavy load the brakes can be relieved by
using engine braking. Engine braking is most
efficiently used if the same gear is used
downhill as up.
For more general information on heavy loads
on the car, see page 394.
Function check when the engine is
started
A V60 Plug-in Hybrid is equipped with a socalled "brake by wire" brake system. After
each time the engine is started there is an
automatic function check of the brake system
when the driver depresses the brake pedal to
take the gear selector from the P position,
see page 129. In connection with the function
check, in some cases, the information display
may show a message and a symbol, see
examples in the table at the end of this section.
NOTE
During the function check the pedal travel
is slightly longer than during normal braking.
Light braking - hybrid battery charging
The electric motor's engine brake is used
during light braking. The car's kinetic energy
is then converted to electrical energy instead,
which is used to charge the hybrid battery.
Battery charging with engine braking is indicated on the instrument panel display with
animation, see page 75.
This function is active in the speed range
150-5 km/h - for harder braking, as well as
outside the speed range, the braking is complemented by the hydraulic brake system.
Anti-lock braking system
The car is equipped with ABS (Anti-lock
Braking System) which prevents the wheels
from locking during braking. This means the
ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to
swerve to avoid a hazard for example. Vibration may be felt in the brake pedal when this
is engaged and this is normal.
A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the engine has been started
when the driver releases the brake pedal. A
further automatic test of the ABS system may
be made when the car reaches 10 km/h. The
test may be experienced as pulses in the
brake pedal.
03
Emergency brake lights and automatic
hazard warning flashers
Emergency brake lights are activated to alert
vehicles behind about sudden braking. The
function means that the brake light flashes
instead of - as in normal braking - shining
with a constant glow.
Emergency brake lights are activated at
speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is
working and/or in the event of sudden braking. After the car's speed has been slowed
below 10 km/h the brake light returns from
flashing to the normal constant glow - while
at the same time the hazard warning flashers
are activated, and they flash until the driver
changes engine speed with the accelerator
pedal or they are deactivated with their button, see page 99.
133
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
Cleaning the brake discs
Coatings of dirt and water on the brake discs
may result in delayed brake function. This
delay is minimised by cleaning the brake linings.
03
Manual cleaning is advisable with wet road
surfaces, prior to long-stay parking and after
the car has been washed. Carry this out by
braking gently during a short period while en
route.
Emergency Brake Assistance
Emergency Brake Assistance EBA
(Emergency Brake Assist) helps to increase
brake force and so reduce braking distance.
EBA detects the driver's braking style and
increases brake force as necessary. The
brake force can be reinforced up to the level
when the ABS system is engaged. The EBA
function is interrupted when the pressure on
the brake pedal is reduced.
NOTE
When EBA is activated the brake pedal
lowers slightly more than usual, depress
(hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all
braking ceases.
Maintenance
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet, see page 346.
IMPORTANT
WARNING
If
and
illuminate at the same
time, there may be a fault in the brake system.
If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is
normal at this stage, drive carefully to the
nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
The reason for the loss of brake fluid must
be investigated.
The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly.
Contact a workshop for information about
the procedure or engage a workshop to
carry out the inspection - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols and messages
Symbol
Message
Meaning/Action
Constant glow – Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the
cause of the brake fluid loss.
Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started - automatic function check.
134
03 Your driving environment
Foot brake
Symbol
Message
Meaning/Action
Fully depress the brake
pedal in order to leave
the P-position
Foot pressure on the brake pedal is too low.
Brake pedal characteristics changed Service
required
•
Depress the pedal further.
May be shown in very cold weather or if the gear selector has been moved from the P position with the
brake pedal insufficiently depressed.
•
03
Switch off the engine by pressing the START/STOP ENGINE button - start the engine again and
depress the brake pedal.
If the error message remains: Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
135
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
General
Applying the parking brake
In an emergency the parking brake can be
applied when the vehicle is in motion by
pressing and holding the control for PUSH
LOCK/PULL RELEASE. The braking procedure is stopped when the control is released.
Function
03
A faint electric motor noise can be heard
when the electrical parking brake is being
applied. The noise can also be heard during
the automatic function checking of the parking brake.
If the car is stationary when the parking brake
is applied then it only acts on the rear wheels.
If it is applied when the car is moving then the
normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts
on all four wheels. Brake function changes
over to the rear wheels when the car is almost
stationary.
Low battery voltage
If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can neither be released nor applied.
Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage
is too low, see page 121.
NOTE
In the event of emergency braking at
speeds above 10 km/h a signal sounds
during the braking procedure.
Parking brake control - apply.
1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
2. Press the control PUSH LOCK/PULL
RELEASE.
>
The combined instrument panel's symbol starts flashing - once there
is a constant glow the parking brake is
applied.
3. Release the foot brake pedal and make
sure that the car is at a standstill position.
•
136
Emergency brake
When parking the vehicle, always engage
1st gear (for manual gearbox) or put the
gear selector in position P (for automatic
gearbox).
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked facing uphill:
•
Turn the wheels away from the kerb.
If the car is parked facing downhill:
•
Turn the wheels towards the kerb.
WARNING
Always apply the parking brake when
parking on a slope - leaving the car in
gear, or in P if it has automatic transmission, is not sufficient to hold the car in all
situation.
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Disengaging the parking brake
NOTE
The parking brake can also be released
manually by depressing the clutch pedal
instead of the brake pedal. Volvo recommends the use of the brake pedal.
Releasing automatically
1. Start the engine.
2. Engage 1st gear or reverse gear.
Parking brake control - release.
Cars with manual gearbox
Releasing manually
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.1
2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
3. Pull the control PUSH LOCK/PULL
RELEASE.
>
The parking brake releases and
the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.
3. Ease up the clutch and depress the
accelerator.
>
The parking brake releases and
the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.
Cars with automatic gearbox
Releasing manually
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch.1
2. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
3. Pull the control PUSH LOCK/PULL
RELEASE.
>
The parking brake releases and
the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.
1
Releasing automatically
1. Put the seatbelt on.
2. Start the engine.
3. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.
4. Move the gear selector to position D or R
and depress the accelerator.
>
The parking brake releases and
03
the combined instrument panel's symbol extinguishes.
NOTE
For safety reasons, the parking brake is
only released automatically if the engine is
running and the driver is wearing a seatbelt. The parking brake is released immediately on cars with automatic gearbox
when the accelerator pedal is depressed
and the gear selector is in position D or R.
Heavy load uphill
A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the
car to roll backward when the parking brake
is released automatically on a steep incline.
Avoid this by depressing the control while
driving off. Release the control when the
engine achieves traction.
For a car with the Keyless system: Press START/STOP ENGINE.
137
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
03
Replacing the brake linings
Symbols and messages
The rear brake linings must be replaced at a
workshop due to the design of the electric
parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
For information on how the combined instrument panel's text messages can be shown
and deleted, see page 204.
Symbol
Message
Meaning/Action
"Message"
•
Read the combined instrument panel's message.
A flashing symbol indicates that the parking brake is applied.
If the symbol flashes in any other situation then this means that a fault has arisen:
•
Park brake not
fully released
Read the combined instrument panel's message.
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being released:
•
Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
•
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Note: A warning signal sounds if the journey is continued with this error message.
138
03 Your driving environment
Parking brake
Symbol
Message
Meaning/Action
Parking brake
not applied
A fault is preventing the parking brake from being applied:
•
Try to release and apply the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
•
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
03
The message is also illuminated on cars with manual gearbox when the car is driven at low speed with the door
open in order to alert the driver that the parking brake may have been unintentionally disengaged.
Parking brake
Service
required
A fault has arisen:
•
•
•
Try to apply and release the brake.
If the fault persists after a few attempts:
Visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
If the car has to be parked before a possible fault has been rectified, then the
wheels must be turned as if parking on a
hill and 1st gear engaged (manual gearbox) or the gear selector must be in position P (automatic gearbox).
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
139
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® *
General
WARNING
•
03
HomeLink®1 is a programmable remote control which can remotely control up to three
different devices (e.g. garage door opener,
alarm system, outdoor lighting and indoor
lighting etc.) and in doing so replace their
remote controls. For more information on
HomeLink®, visit: www.homelink.com or ring
00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone
number, +49 6838 907 277).
1
140
If HomeLink® is used to operate a
garage door or gate, make sure that
there is no-one in the vicinity of the
door or gate while it is moving.
•
The car should remain outside the
garage while a garage door opener is
being programmed.
•
Do not use HomeLink® for any garage
door that does not have safety stop
and safety reverse.
Save the original remote controls for future
programming (e.g. when changing to another
car or for use in another vehicle). It is also
recommended that the programming for the
buttons is deleted when the car is sold. See
the section "Resetting the HomeLink® buttons" on page 141.
HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Johnson Controls, Inc.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Programming HomeLink®
NOTE
In certain vehicles the ignition must be
switched on or in "accessory position"
before HomeLink® can be programmed or
used. If possible, fit new batteries in the
remote control that shall be replaced by
HomeLink® for faster programming and
improved transmission of the radio signal.
The HomeLink® buttons should be reset
before programming. When this has been
done HomeLink® is set in "learn mode"
and ready for programming.
1. Aim the original remote control towards
the HomeLink® button to be programmed
and hold it 5-14 cm from the button. Do
not obstruct the indicator lamp on
HomeLink®.
2. Depress the button on the original remote
control and the button to be programmed
on HomeLink® simultaneously. Do not
release the buttons until the indicator
lamp has changed over from slow to
rapid flashing. Both the buttons must be
released when the indicator lamp flashes
quickly.
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® *
3. Depress the HomeLink® button being
programmed, hold it depressed for
5 seconds and then release it. Repeat if
necessary until the garage door is activated. If the door is not activated, press
the programmed HomeLink® button and
hold it depressed and check the indicator
lamp.
> Constant glow: The indicator lamp
illuminates with a constant glow when
the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar
should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink® button is
depressed.
Glow not constant: The indicator
lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow. In which case, continue
with the programming steps 4-6 in
order to complete the programming of
a device with rolling code (usually a
garage door opener).
4. Locate the "programming button2" on the
receiver for the garage door for example,
normally located close to the antenna's
bracket on the receiver.
2
5. Depress and release the receiver's "programming button". The button flashes for
approx. 30 seconds and the next step
must be carried out within this period.
6. While the receiver's "programming button" is still flashing, press the button on
HomeLink® being programmed and hold
it depressed for approx. 2 seconds and
then release it. Repeat the press/hold/
release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the programming.
Operation
When HomeLink® is fully programmed it can
be used in place of the separate original
remote controls.
Press the programmed button and hold it
depressed until the garage door, alarm system, etc. is activated (may take several seconds). Naturally the original remote controls
can still be used in parallel with HomeLink® if
required.
If programming problems persist, contact
HomeLink® on: www.homelink.com or ring
00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate phone
number +49 6838 907 277).
Resetting the HomeLink® buttons
It is only possible to reset all of the
HomeLink® buttons at the same time, not
each button individually. However, individual
buttons can be reprogrammed, see the following section "Programming individual buttons".
03
1. Depress the two outer buttons on
HomeLink® and do not release until the
indicator lamp starts to flash.
2. Release the buttons.
> HomeLink® is now set in so-called
"learn mode" and is ready to be
reprogrammed, see section "Programming HomeLink®" on page 140.
NOTE
If the ignition is switched off, HomeLink®
will work for 30 minutes after the driver's
door has been opened.
Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
141
03 Your driving environment
HomeLink® *
Programming individual buttons
To reprogram an individual HomeLink® button, proceed as follows:
1. Depress the required button and do not
release.
03
2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink®
starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds,
start with step 1 in section "Programming
HomeLink®" on page 140.
For more information or to leave comments
about HomeLink®, visit: www.homelink.com
or ring 00 8000 466 354 65 (or premium rate
phone number +49 6838 907 277).
142
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
03 Your driving environment
03
143
144
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
146
148
151
153
155
166
169
175
183
184
188
191
194
197
G000000
DSTC – Stability and traction control system.......................................
Road sign information - RSI*................................................................
Speed limiter.........................................................................................
Cruise control*......................................................................................
Adaptive cruise control*........................................................................
Distance Warning*.................................................................................
City Safety™.........................................................................................
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*...............
Driver Alert System*..............................................................................
Driver Alert System - DAC*...................................................................
Driver Alert System - LDW*...................................................................
Park assist syst*....................................................................................
Park assist camera*..............................................................................
BLIS*.....................................................................................................
DRIVER SUPPORT
04 Driver support
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
General information on DSTC
The stability and traction control system,
DSTC (Dynamic Stability & Traction Control)
helps the driver to avoid skidding and
improves the car's traction.
The activation of the system during braking
may be noticed as a throbbing sound. The
car may accelerate slower than expected
when the accelerator pedal is depressed.
04
Active Yaw Control
The function limits the driving and brake force
of the wheels individually in order to stabilise
the car.
Spin Control
The function prevents the driving wheels from
spinning against the road surface during
acceleration.
Traction control system
The function is active at low speed and transfers power from the driving wheel that is spinning to the one that is not.
Corner Traction Control – CTC
CTC compensates for understeer and allows
higher than normal acceleration in a bend
without wheelspin on the inner wheel, e.g. on
an arcing motorway entrance road to quickly
reach the prevailing traffic speed.
Trailer stabiliser - TSA1
The function serves to stabilise the car and
trailer combination if it begins to snake, see
page 321.
NOTE
The function is deactivated if the driver
selects Sport mode.
Operation
Selection of level - Sport mode
Engine drag control - EDC
The DSTC system is always activated - it
cannot be deactivated.
EDC (Engine Drag Control) prevents involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or
engine braking when driving in low gears on
slippery road surfaces.
However, the driver can select the Sport
mode, which allows for a more active driving
experience. In Sport mode the system
detects whether the accelerator pedal, steer-
1
146
Involuntary wheel locking while driving can,
amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car.
Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.
ing wheel movements and cornering are more
active than in normal driving and then allows
controlled skidding with the rear section up to
a certain level before it intervenes and stabilises the car.
If the driver stops a controlled skid by releasing the accelerator pedal then the DSTC system intervenes and stabilises the car.
With Sport mode, maximum traction is
obtained if the car has become stuck, or
when driving on a loose surface - e.g. sand or
deep snow.
Proceed as follows to select Sport mode:
1. Press the centre console button MY CAR
and search in the screen's menu system
and locate My V60 DSTC. (For information on the menu system, see
page 206).
2. Uncheck the box and back out of the
menu system with EXIT.
> The system then allows a more sporty
driving style.
The Sport mode is active until the driver
deselects it or until the engine is switched off
- after the engine is started the next time the
DSTC system is back in its normal mode
again.
04 Driver support
DSTC – Stability and traction control system
Symbols and text messages
Symbol
Message
Specification
DSTC Temporarily OFF
DSTC system temporarily reduced due to excessive brake disc temperature. - The function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.
DSTC Service required
DSTC system disengaged.
•
•
Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
"Message"
There is a text message in the combined instrument panel - Read it!
Constant glow for
2 seconds.
System check when the engine is started.
Flashing light.
DSTC system is being activated.
04
and
Sport mode is activated.
147
04 Driver support
Road sign information - RSI*
General information on RSI
Together with the symbol for
the current speed limit, a
sign showing that overtaking
is prohibited may also be
displayed where appropriate.
WARNING
RSI does not work in all situations but is
designed merely as a supplementary aid.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely and that applicable road traffic rules
and regulations are followed.
Operation
04
Examples of readable speed-related1 signs.
1
148
A corresponding road sign is shown in the
combined instrument panel for
approx. 10 seconds in situations where RSI
detects a sign that involves the end of a
speed limit - or other speed-related information, e.g. end of a motorway.
Examples of such signs are:
The Road sign information function (RSI –
Road Sign Information) helps the driver to
remember which road signs the car has
passed through information on - among other
things - the current speed, the start/end of a
motorway or road, and when overtaking is
prohibited.
If both a sign for motorway/road for motorised traffic and a sign showing the maximum
permitted speed are passed, RSI decides to
show the sign symbol for maximum permitted
speed.
End of restriction or motorway
End of all restrictions.
Recorded speed information1.
When RSI has recorded a road sign with an
imposed speed, the combined instrument
panel displays the sign as a symbol.
Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in the manual only show a few examples.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
End of motorway.
04 Driver support
Road sign information - RSI*
Following which, the sign information is hidden until the next speed-related sign is
detected.
Additional signs
The speed applicable on an
exit is indicated in certain
markets by means of an
additional sign containing an
arrow.
Setting in MY CAR
There are options for RSI in the MY CAR
menu system, see page 207.
Road sign information On/Off
Speed signs linked to this
type of additional sign are displayed only if
the driver is using the direction indicator.
Some speeds are applicable
only after e.g. a specific distance or at a certain time of
day. The driver's attention is
drawn to the situation by
means of a symbol for an
additional sign under the
symbol showing speed.
Examples of additional signs1.
Display of additional information
Sometimes different speed limits are signposted for the same road - an additional sign
then indicates the circumstances under which
the different speeds apply. The road section
may be particularly susceptible to accidents
in rain and/or fog, for example.
A symbol for additional sign
in the form of an empty
frame under the combined
instrument panel's speed
symbol means that the RSI
has detected an additional
sign with supplementary
information for the current speed limit.
An additional sign relating to rain is displayed
only if the windscreen wipers are in use.
1
04
The combined instrument panel's speed symbol display can be disabled. To deactivate the
RSI function:
•
Uncheck the option Road Sign
Information(Road Sign Information On)
at Settings Car settings Road Sign
Information and go back out using EXIT.
Road signs shown in the combined instrument panel are market-dependent - the illustrations in the manual only show a few examples.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
}}
149
04 Driver support
Road sign information - RSI*
Speed warning
Limitations
The RSI function's camera sensor is limited just like the human eye. Find out more about
this on page 180.
Signs which indirectly provide information on
a prevailing speed limit, e.g. name signs for
towns/districts, are not recorded by the RSI
function.
Here are several examples of what can disrupt the function:
04
The driver can opt to receive a warning when
the applicable speed limit is exceeded by
5 km/h or more. This warning is given by the
symbol showing the applicable maximum
speed temporarily flashing when this speed is
exceeded.
•
•
•
•
•
To activate speed warning:
•
150
Check the option Speed alert (Speed
Alert) at Settings Car settings
Speed alert and go back out using EXIT.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Faded signs
Signs positioned on bends
Rotated or damaged signs
Concealed or poorly positioned signs
Signs completely or partly covered with
frost, snow and/or dirt.
04 Driver support
Speed limiter
General information on the speed
limiter
A speed limiter (Speed Limiter) can be regarded as a reverse cruise control - the driver
regulates the speed using the accelerator
pedal but is prevented from accidentally
exceeding a pre-selected/set speed by the
speed limiter.
Operation
Activate and adjust the maximum speed.
When stationary
Selected speed
1. Press the steering wheel button
switch on the speed limiter.
Speed limiter active
Switch on and activate
When the speed limiter is active, its symbol
(6) is shown in combination with a mark (5) by
the set maximum speed in the combined
instrument panel.
Selection and storage of the highest possible
speed in the memory can be made both during a journey and while stationary.
While driving
1. Press the steering wheel button
to
switch on the speed limiter.
> The symbol (6) for speed limiter illuminates in the combined instrument
panel.
Steering wheel keypad and combined instrument
panel.
Speed limiter - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Standby mode
2. When the car is moving at the desired
highest possible speed: Press one of the
steering wheel buttons
or
until the
combined instrument panel shows a
mark (5) by the desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
to
2. Scroll with the
button until the combined instrument panel shows a mark (5)
by the desired maximum speed.
> The speed limiter is then active and the
selected max. speed is stored in the
memory.
Changing the speed
04
To change the stored speed:
•
Adjust with short presses on
or
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
•
Hold the button depressed and release
when the combined instrument panel
shows a mark (5) by the desired maximum speed.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily deactivate the speed limiter
and set it in standby mode:
–
Press
.
> The mark (5) in the combined instrument panel changes colour from
GREEN to WHITE and the driver can
}}
151
04 Driver support
Speed limiter
temporarily exceed the set maximum
speed.
The speed limiter is reactivated with
one press on
. The mark (5) then
changes colour from WHITE to GREEN
and the car's maximum speed is limited once again.
Temporary deactivation with the
accelerator pedal
04
On steep downhill gradients the engine braking effect may be inadequate and the
selected maximum speed exceeded. The
driver is alerted about this with an acoustic
signal.
The signal is active until the driver has slowed
to below the selected maximum speed.
NOTE
The speed limiter can also be set in standby
mode with the accelerator pedal, e.g. for rapidly accelerating the car out of a situation:
–
Depress the accelerator pedal fully.
> The combined instrument panel shows
the stored maximum speed with a coloured mark (5) and the driver can temporarily exceed the set maximum
speed - the mark (5) changes colour
during this time from GREEN to
WHITE.
The speed limiter is automatically reactivated after the release of the accelerator pedal and the car's speed is
slowed down to below the selected/
stored maximum speed - the mark (5)
changes colour from WHITE to GREEN
and the car's maximum speed is limited once again.
152
Alarm for speed exceeded
The alarm is only activated after 5 seconds
if the speed has been exceeded by at least
3 km/h provided that none of the buttons
or
has been depressed during the
last half minute.
Deactivate
To deactivate the speed limiter:
–
Press the steering wheel button
.
> The combined instrument panel's symbol for the speed limiter (6) and the
mark for the set speed (5) are extinguished. The selected and stored
speed are thus deleted from the memory and cannot be resumed with the
button.
The driver can then use the accelerator
pedal to choose a speed without limitation.
04 Driver support
Cruise control*
General information on CC
Operation
The cruise control (CC – Cruise Control) helps
the driver maintain an even speed, resulting in
a more relaxed driving on motorways and
long, straight roads in regular traffic flows.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the cruise control is not maintaining a suitable speed and/or suitable
distance.
The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven
safely.
04
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars
without speed limiter1.
The steering wheel buttons and display in cars
with speed limiter1.
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Activate and adjust the speed.
Selected speed (GREY = Standby mode).
Cruise control active - WHITE symbol
(GREY = Standby mode).
Activating and setting the speed
To enable cruise control:
•
1
Press the steering wheel button
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
153
04 Driver support
Cruise control*
>
The cruise control symbol (6) in the combined instrument panel changes from
GREY to WHITE and shows that the
cruise control is in standby mode.
returns to the set speed when the accelerator
pedal is released.
NOTE
To activate cruise control:
•
At the required speed - press the steering
or
.
wheel button
>
The current speed is stored in the memory and the combined instrument panel's
marking (5) is illuminated at the selected
speed.
04
NOTE
Cruise control cannot be engaged at
speeds below 30 km/h.
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are
held depressed for several minutes then it
is blocked and deactivated. To be able to
reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be
stopped and the engine restarted.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily disengage cruise control and
set it in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
>
The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from
WHITE to GREY.
Changing the speed
To change the stored speed:
Automatic standby mode
•
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
Adjust with short presses on
or
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
•
Hold the button depressed and release it
at the desired speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car
154
.
•
•
•
•
•
wheels lose traction
•
the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
the foot brake is used
speed falls below approx. 30 km/h
the clutch pedal is depressed
the gear selector is moved to neutral
position (automatic gearbox)
The driver must then regulate the speed.
Resume set speed
To reactivate the cruise control from standby
mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
>
The combined instrument panel's marking (5) and symbol (6) change colour from
GREY to WHITE and the speed is then
set to the last speed stored.
.
NOTE
A significant increase in speed may arise
after the speed has been resumed with
.
Deactivate
The cruise control is switched off with the
steering wheel button (1) or by switching off
the engine - the set speed is deleted from the
memory and cannot be resumed with the
button.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
General information on ACC
The adaptive cruise control (ACC – Adaptive
Cruise Control) helps the driver maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle ahead. Adaptive cruise control provides a more relaxing
driving experience on long journeys on
motorways and long straight main roads in
smooth traffic flows.
The driver sets the desired speed and time
interval to the car in front. When the radar
detector detects a slower vehicle in front of
the car, the speed is automatically adapted to
that. When the road is clear again the car
returns to the selected speed.
If the adaptive cruise control is switched off
or set to the standby mode and the car
comes too close to a vehicle in front, then the
driver is warned instead by Distance Warning
(see page 166) about the short distance.
Function
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is
not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read the whole of this section for information on the limitations of the adaptive
cruise control. The driver must be familiar
with this information before using the
adaptive cruise control.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and
speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.
04
Function overview1.
Warning lamp - braking by driver required
Steering wheel keypad
Radar sensor
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of adaptive cruise control
components must only be performed at a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Adaptive cruise control consists of a cruise
control system and a coordinated spacing
system.
Automatic gearbox
Cars with automatic gearbox have enhanced
functionality with the adaptive cruise control's
Queue Assistant, see page 160.
1
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may differ depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
155
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary
vehicles and objects.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on slip roads.
04
The distance to the vehicle ahead is mainly
measured by a radar sensor. Cruise control
regulates the speed with acceleration and
braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a
low sound when they are being used by the
adaptive cruise control.
The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the
vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar sensor cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will
instead maintain the cruise control's set
speed. This also happens if the speed of the
2
156
vehicle in front exceeds the cruise control's
set speed.
The adaptive cruise control aims to control
the speed in a smooth way. In situations that
demand sudden braking the driver must
brake himself/herself. This applies with large
differences in speed, or if the vehicle in front
brakes heavily. Due to limitations in the radar
sensor, braking may come unexpectedly or
not at all, see page 161.
The adaptive cruise control can be activated
to follow another vehicle at speeds from
30 km/h2 up to 200 km/h. If the speed falls
below 30 km/h or if the engine speed
becomes too low, the cruise control is set in
standby mode at which automatic braking
ceases - the driver must then take over himself/herself to maintain a safe distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Warning lamp - braking by driver
required
Adaptive cruise control has a braking
capacity that is equivalent to more than 40%
of the car's braking capacity.
If the car needs to be braked more heavily
than cruise control capacity and the driver
does not brake, then the cruise control uses
Queue Assistant (in cars with automatic gearbox) can operate in the range of 0-200 km/h, see page 160.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
the collision warning system's warning lamp
and warning sound (see the illustration on
page 175) to alert the driver that immediate
intervention is required.
NOTE
The warning lamp may be difficult to
notice in strong sunlight or when sunglasses are being worn.
WARNING
Cruise control only warns of vehicles
detected by the radar sensor. Consequently there may be no warning or it may
be subject to a delay. Do not wait for a
warning but brake when it is necessary.
Steep roads and/or heavy load
Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control
is primarily intended for use when driving on
level road surfaces. It may have difficulty in
keeping the correct distance from the vehicle
ahead when driving on steep downhill gradients, with a heavy load or with a trailer - in
which case, be extra attentive and ready to
slow down.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Operation
Time interval
Time interval
The steering wheel keypad is different
depending on whether or not the car is equipped with Speed limiter3.
ACC is active with GREEN symbol
(WHITE = standby mode).
ACC is active with GREEN symbol
(WHITE = standby mode).
WITH Speed limiter
WITHOUT Speed limiter
Activating and setting the speed
To enable cruise control:
•
-a
Press the steering wheel button
similar WHITE symbol illuminates in the
combined instrument panel (8) which
shows that cruise control is in standby
mode.
04
To activate cruise control:
Cruise control - On/Off.
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Standby mode
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
Green marking by the stored speed
(WHITE = standby mode).
3
Standby mode ceases and the stored
speed is resumed.
Cruise control - On/Off or Standby mode.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
Activate and adjust the speed.
(Not used)
•
At the required speed - press the steering
wheel button
or
.
>
The current speed is stored in memory,
the combined instrument panel shows a
"magnifying glass" around the selected
speed for a few seconds and its marking
(6) changes from WHITE to GREEN.
When this symbol changes colour
from WHITE to GREEN the cruise
control is active and the car maintains the stored speed.
Green marking by the stored speed
(WHITE = standby mode).
A Volvo dealer has updated information about what applies in each respective market.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
157
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Only when the symbol shows
the image of another vehicle
is the distance to the vehicle
ahead regulated by the
cruise control.
NOTE
If any of the Cruise Control buttons are
held depressed for several minutes then it
is blocked and deactivated. To be able to
reactivate Cruise Control, the car must be
stopped and the engine restarted.
In certain situations, cruise control cannot
be activated. In this case, the combined
instrument panel shows Cruise control
Unavailable, see page 164.
At the same time a speed
interval is marked:
• the higher speed with the
GREEN marking (6) is the
pre-programmed speed
04
• the lower speed is the
speed of the car in front.
Changing the speed
To change the stored speed:
•
or
Adjust with short presses on
every press gives +/- 5 km/h. The last
presses made are stored in the memory.
If speed is increased using the accelerator pedal prior to pressing the
/
button, then it is the car's current speed
when the button is pressed that is stored
in the cruise control.
158
Hold the button depressed and release it
at the desired speed.
Note that a short time interval only allows the
driver a short time to react and take action if
any unforeseen traffic problem should arise.
The same symbol is also shown when Distance Warning is activated, see page 166.
NOTE
Set time interval
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
combined instrument panel
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the
time interval. One line corresponds to approximately 1 second to the
vehicle in front, 5 lines
approximately 3 seconds.
To set/change the time interval:
•
To adjust +/- 1 km/h:
•
The adaptive cruise control allows the time
interval to vary noticeably in certain situations
in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle
in front smoothly and comfortably.
Turn the steering wheel keypad's thumbwheel (or use the
/
buttons for a car
without speed limiter).
At low speed, when the distances are short,
the adaptive cruise control increases the time
interval slightly.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
If Cruise Control does not appear to react
when activated, this may be because the
time distance to the car in front is preventing an increase in speed.
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
Temporary deactivation - standby mode
To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise
control and set it in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
.
This symbol and the stored speed's
marking then change colour from
GREEN to WHITE.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Keypad without Speed limiter*
To temporarily disengage the adaptive cruise
control and set it in standby mode:
•
Press the steering wheel button
.
Standby mode due to driver intervention
Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and
set in standby mode if:
•
•
•
the foot brake is used
the gear selector is moved to N position
(automatic gearbox)
the driver maintains a speed higher than
the set speed for longer than 1 minute.
The driver must then regulate the speed.
A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not
affect the cruise control setting - the car
returns to the last stored speed when the
accelerator pedal is released.
Automatic standby mode
The adaptive cruise control is dependent on
other systems, such as DSTC (see page 146).
If any of these systems stop working then
cruise control is automatically deactivated.
Cancelled is shown in the combined instrument panel. The driver must then intervene
and adapt the speed and distance to the
vehicle ahead.
An automatic deactivation can be due to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
the driver opens the door
engine speed is too low/high
speed has fallen below 30 km/h4
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is covered e.g. by wet
snow or heavy rain (radar waves blocked).
Resume set speed
Adaptive cruise control in standby mode is
reactivated with one press on the steering
wheel button
- the speed is then set to the
last stored speed.
In the event of automatic deactivation a signal
will sound and the message Cruise control
4
5
WARNING
wheels lose traction
A significant increase in speed may arise
after the speed has been resumed with
.
When the car is following another vehicle and
the driver indicates an impending overtaking
manoeuvre with the direction indicator5, the
adaptive cruise control helps to briefly accelerate the car towards the vehicle in front.
This function is active at speeds
above 70 km/h.
the driver takes off the seatbelt
NOTE
Overtaking another vehicle
04
Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations other than during
overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator
is used to indicate a change of lane or exit
to another road - the car will then accelerate briefly.
Deactivate
Keypad with Speed limiter
The adaptive cruise control is switched off
with the steering wheel button
. The set
speed is cleared and cannot be resumed with
the
button.
Keypad without Speed limiter
With a short press on the steering wheel butthe adaptive cruise control is set in
ton
standby mode. With a further short press it is
Does not apply to a car with Queue Assistant - it manages right down to stationary.
On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
159
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
deactivated. The set speed is cleared and
button.
cannot be resumed with the
Changing from ACC to CC
With one press of the button the adaptive
part (spacing system) in the cruise control is
deactivated, at which point the car just follows the set speed.
•
Give a long press on the steering wheel
button
- the combined instrument
to
.
panel's symbol changes from
>
By these means the standard cruise control CC (Cruise
Control) is activated, see page 153.
04
WARNING
The car no longer brakes automatically
after switching from ACC to CC - it merely
follows the set speed.
Changing back from CC to ACC
Deactivate CC with 1-2 presses on
in
accordance with the previous heading "Deactivate". The next time the system is switched
on, it is the ACC that is activated.
160
Queue Assistant
NOTE
The adaptive cruise control is supplemented
by the Queue Assist function (also called
"Queue Assist").
Activation of the cruise control below
30 km/h requires a vehicle in front within a
reasonable distance.
Queue Assistant has the following functions:
•
Extended speed range - also below 30
km/h and at standstill
•
•
Change of target
Automatic braking ceases when stationary
•
Automatic activation parking brake.
Note that the lowest programmable speed for
the adaptive cruise control is 30 km/h - even
though it is capable of following another vehicle down to a standstill, a lower speed cannot be selected.
Extended speed range
For shorter stops in connection with inching
in slow traffic or at traffic lights driving is
automatically resumed if the stops do not
exceed approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer
before the car in front starts moving again
then the cruise control is set in standby mode
with automatic braking. The driver must then
reactivate it in one of the following ways:
•
Press the steering wheel button
•
Depress the accelerator pedal.
>
The cruise control will then resume following the vehicle in front.
NOTE
In order to activate the cruise control the
driver's door must be closed and the driver
must be wearing the seatbelt.
The adaptive cruise control can follow
another vehicle within the range 0-200 km/h.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
.
or
NOTE
Queue Assist can hold the car stationary
for a maximum of 4 minutes - then the
parking brake is applied and Cruise Control is disengaged.
•
The driver has to release the parking
brake before the cruise control can be
reactivated.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Change of target
Automatic standby mode with change
of target
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged
and set in standby mode:
•
•
If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then
there may be stationary traffic in front.
When the adaptive cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h and
changes target from a moving to a stationary
vehicle, the cruise control will slow down for
the stationary vehicle.
WARNING
When the cruise control is following
another vehicle at speeds in excess of
30 km/h and the target is changed from a
moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the
cruise control will ignore the stationary
vehicle and instead select the stored
speed.
•
The driver must intervene him/herself
and brake.
when the speed is below 5 km/h and
cruise control is not sure whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or some
other object, e.g. a speed bump.
when the speed is below 5 km/h and the
vehicle in front turns off so the cruise
control no longer has a vehicle to follow.
Termination of automatic braking at a
standstill
In certain situations, Queue Assist stops
automatic braking at a standstill. This means
that the brakes are released and the car may
start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car himself/herself in
order to maintain its position.
Queue Assist releases the foot brake and sets
the adaptive cruise control in standby mode
in the following situations:
•
the driver puts his/her foot on the brake
pedal
•
•
the parking brake is applied
•
the driver sets the cruise control in
standby mode.
Automatic activation parking brake
In certain situations Queue Assist applies the
parking brake in order to keep the car remaining stationary.
This takes place if:
•
the driver opens the door or takes off
his/her seatbelt
•
DSTC is changed from Normal to Sport
mode
•
Queue Assist has held the car stationary
for more than 4 minutes
•
•
the engine is switched off
04
the brakes have overheated.
The radar sensor and its limitations
The radar sensor is used - apart from by
Adaptive cruise control - by the following
functions as well:
•
Collision Warning with Auto Brake, see
page 175
•
Distance Warning, see page 166.
The function of the radar sensor is to detect
cars or larger vehicles in the same direction,
in the same lane.
the gear selector is moved to P, N or R
position
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
161
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
IMPORTANT
WARNING
In the event of visible damage to the car's
grille, or if you suspect that the radar sensor may be damaged:
•
04
Contact a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
The function may completely or partially
disappear - or malfunction - if the grille,
the radar sensor or its bracket is damaged
or has loosened.
WARNING
Adaptive cruise control is not a collision
avoidance system. The driver must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle in front.
The adaptive cruise control does not brake
for humans or animals, and not for small
vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for oncoming, slow or stationary
vehicles and objects.
WARNING
The driver must always be observant with
regard to the traffic conditions and intervene when the adaptive cruise control is
not maintaining a suitable speed or suitable distance.
Do not use the adaptive cruise control, for
example, in city traffic, in dense traffic, at
junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot
of water or slush on the road, in heavy
rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding
roads or on slip roads.
The adaptive cruise control cannot handle
all traffic, weather and road conditions.
Read the whole of this section for information on the limitations of the adaptive
cruise control. The driver must be familiar
with this information before using the
adaptive cruise control.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the correct distance and
speed, even when the adaptive cruise control is being used.
162
NOTE
Accessories or other objects such as auxiliary lamps must not be installed in front of
the grille.
The capacity of the radar sensor to detect
vehicles in front is reduced significantly:
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
if the radar sensor becomes blocked and
cannot detect other vehicles e.g. in heavy
rain or slush, or if other objects have collected in front of the radar sensor.
Keep the surface in front of the radar sensor clean - see page 178, "Maintenance".
•
if the speed of vehicles in front is significantly different from your own speed.
Examples where the adaptive cruise
control does not work optimally
The radar sensor has a limited field of vision.
In some situations another vehicle is not
detected, or the detection is made later than
expected.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Sometimes the radar sensor is late at
detecting vehicles at close distances, e.g.
a vehicle that drives in between the car
and vehicles in front.
The following table presents examples of
possible causes for a message being shown
along with the appropriate action.
Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or
vehicles not driving in the centre of the
lane can remain undetected.
In bends the radar sensor may detect the
wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle
from view.
04
Fault tracing and action
If the combined instrument panel shows the
message Radar blocked See manual this
means that the radar signals from the radar
sensor are blocked and that vehicles in front
of the car cannot be detected.
ACC field of vision.
In turn this means that - apart from Adaptive
Cruise Control - Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake functions are
not operating either.
Cause
Action
The radar surface in the grille is dirty or covered with ice or snow.
Clean the radar surface in the grille from dirt, ice and snow.
Heavy rain or snow blocking the radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work during heavy rain or snowfall.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
163
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Cause
Action
Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the
radar signals.
No action. Sometimes the radar does not work on a very wet or snowy road
surface.
The radar surface has been cleaned but the message remains.
Wait. It could take several minutes for the radar to sense that it is no longer
blocked.
Symbols and messages
04
Symbol
Message
Specification
The symbol is GREEN
The car maintains the stored speed.
The symbol is WHITE
The Adaptive cruise control is set in standby mode.
Standard cruise control is selected manually.
DSTC Normal to enable
Cruise
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated until the Stability and Traction Control system (DSTC)
has been set in Normal mode - see page 146.
Cruise control Cancelled
The adaptive cruise control has been deactivated - the driver has to regulate the speed himself.
Cruise control Unavailable
The adaptive cruise control cannot be activated.
This could be due to:
•
•
164
brake temperature is high
the radar sensor is blocked by e.g. wet snow or rain.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Adaptive cruise control*
Symbol
Message
Specification
Radar blocked See
manual
The adaptive cruise control is temporarily disengaged.
•
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event that heavy
rain or if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
The driver can then choose to change to normal Cruise control (CC), see page 160 - a text message
informs about appropriate options.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 161.
Cruise control Service
required
The adaptive cruise control is disengaged.
Press Brake To hold +
acoustic alarm
The car is stationary and the cruise control will release the foot brake to allow the parking brake to take
over and hold the car, but a fault in the parking brake means the car will shortly begin to roll.
(Only with Queue Assistant)
•
Below 30 km/h Only following
Shown with attempts to activate the cruise control at speeds below 30 km/h without a vehicle in front
within the activation distance (approx. 30 metres).
•
Contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04
The driver must brake himself/herself. The message remains and the alarm sounds until the driver
depresses the brake pedal or uses the accelerator pedal.
(Only with Queue Assistant)
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
165
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
General
Distance Warning (Distance Alert) is a function that informs the driver about the time
interval to vehicles in front.
Distance Warning is active at speeds above
30 km/h and only reacts to vehicles driving in
front of the car, in the same direction. No distance information is provided for oncoming,
slow or stationary vehicles.
NOTE
Distance warning is deactivated during the
time the adaptive cruise control is active.
WARNING
Distance warning only reacts if the distance to the vehicle ahead is shorter than
the preset value - the speed of the driver's
vehicle is not affected.
Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in
the centre console - in which case the function is handled by the car's menu system MY
CAR under Settings Car settings
Distance Alert. For a description of the menu
system - see page 206.
Set time interval
04
Operation
Controls and symbol for time interval.
Orange warning lamp1.
Time interval - Increase/decrease.
An orange warning lamp in the windscreen
illuminates with a constant glow if the distance to the vehicle in front is shorter than the
set time interval.
Time interval - On.
1
166
Press the button in the centre console to
switch the function on or off. The function is
switched on if one lamp is illuminated in the
button.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
Different time intervals to the
vehicle in front can be
selected and shown in the
combined instrument panel
as 1-5 horizontal lines - the
more lines the longer the
time interval. One line corresponds to approximately 1 second to the
vehicle in front, 5 lines
approximately 3 seconds.
The same symbol is also shown when adaptive cruise control is activated.
NOTE
The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time
interval.
NOTE
Limitations
The function uses the same radar sensor as
adaptive cruise control and the collision
warning system with auto brake. For more
information on the radar sensor and its limitations, see page 161.
Strong sunlight, reflections or strong variations in light intensity, as well as wearing
sunglasses, could mean that the warning
light in the windscreen cannot be seen.
Poor weather or winding roads could
affect the radar sensor's capacity to detect
vehicles in front.
The size of other vehicles could also affect
detection capacity, e.g. motorcycles. This
could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter distance than the setting
or that the warning is temporarily absent.
04
Extremely high speeds can also cause the
lamp to illuminate at a shorter distance
than that set due to limitations in sensor
range.
The set time interval is also used by the
Adaptive Cruise Control function, see
page 158.
Only use the time intervals permitted by
local traffic regulations.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
167
04 Driver support
Distance Warning*
Symbols and text messages
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Radar blocked See
manual
Distance Warning temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles, e.g. in the event of heavy rain or if slush has
collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 161.
Collision warn.
Service required
04
A
168
Distance Warning and Collision Warning with Auto Brake fully or partially disengaged.
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
General
City Safety™ is a function for helping the
driver to avoid a collision when driving in
queues, amongst other things, when changes
in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in
attention, could lead to an incident.
The function is active at speeds under
50 km/h and it helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of imminent
risk of collision with vehicles in front, should
the driver not react in time by braking and/or
steering away.
City Safety™ is activated in situations where
the driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
City Safety™ is designed to be activated as
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary
intervention.
If the car is also equipped with a Collision
Warning function with Auto Brake*, these two
systems complement each other. For more
information on Collision Warning function with
Auto Brake, see page 175.
IMPORTANT
Maintenance and replacement of City
Safety™ components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
WARNING
City Safety™ does not engage in all driving situations or traffic, weather or road
conditions.
City Safety™ does not react to vehicles
driving in a different direction from the car,
to small vehicles and motorcycles or to
humans and animals.
City Safety™ can prevent collision at a
speed difference of less than 15 km/h - at
a higher speed difference, it is only possible to reduce collision speed. In order to
obtain full brake function, the driver must
depress the brake pedal.
04
Never wait for City Safety™ to engage.
The driver always bears responsibility for
maintaining the proper distance and
speed.
City Safety™ must not be used as an excuse
for the driver to change his/her driving style. If
the driver solely relies on City Safety™ to do
the braking, there will be a collision sooner or
later.
The driver or passengers normally only notice
City Safety™ if a situation arises where the
car is extremely close to being in a collision.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
169
04 Driver support
City Safety™
Function
and may be experienced as being uncomfortable.
If the difference in speed between the vehicles is greater than 15 km/h then City
Safety™ may not prevent the collision on its
own. To obtain full brake force, the driver
must depress the brake pedal. This could
then make it possible to prevent a collision,
even at speed differences above 15 km/h.
04
Laser sensor transmitter and receiver window1.
City Safety™ detects the traffic in front of the
car with a laser sensor fitted in the top edge
of the windscreen. If there is an imminent risk
of collision, City Safety™ will automatically
brake the car, which may be experienced as
sudden braking.
If the speed difference is 4-15 km/h in relation
to the vehicle in front then City Safety™ can
completely prevent a collision.
City Safety™ activates a short, sharp braking
and stops the car in normal circumstances,
just behind the vehicle in front. For most drivers this is well outside normal driving style
1
170
On and Off
In certain situations, it may advisable to disable City Safety™, e.g. where leafy branches
could sweep over the bonnet and/or windscreen.
After starting the engine City Safety™ can be
deactivated as follows:
•
When the function is activated and brakes,
the combined instrument panel shows a text
message to the effect that the function is/has
been active.
NOTE
However, the function will be enabled the
next time the engine is started, regardless
of whether the system was enabled or
disabled when the engine was switched
off.
The brake lights come on when City
Safety™ brakes the car.
Operation
WARNING
NOTE
The City Safety™ function is always enabled after the engine has been started via
key position I and II (see page 84 on key
positions).
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
Using MY CAR in the centre console's
screen with its menu system, search and
locate Settings Car settings Driver
support systems City Safety. Select
the Off option. For more information on
the menu system MY CAR, see
page 206.
The laser sensor also transmits laser light
when City Safety™ is disabled manually.
To enable City Safety™ again:
•
Follow the same procedure as for disabling, but select the On option.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
Limitations
The sensor in City Safety™ is designed to
detect cars and other large vehicles in front of
the car irrespective of whether it is day or
night.
However, the sensor has limitations and has
poorer functionality - or none at all - in e.g.
heavy snowfall or rain, dense fog, dust
storms or white-out situations. Mist, dirt, ice
or snow on the windscreen may disrupt the
function.
Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for
projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than
the bonnet limit the function.
The laser light from the sensor in City
Safety™ measures how the light is reflected.
The sensor cannot detect objects with low
reflection capacity. The rear sections of the
vehicle generally reflect the light sufficiently
thanks to the number plate and rear light
reflectors.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the
capacity of City Safety™ to avoid a collision.
In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide best possible braking force
with maintained stability.
When your own car is reversing, City Safety™
is temporarily deactivated.
City Safety™ is not activated at low speeds under 4 km/h, which is why the system does
not intervene in situations where a vehicle in
front is being approached very slowly, e.g.
when parking.
Driver commands are always prioritised,
which is why City Safety™ does not intervene
in situations where the driver is steering or
accelerating in a clear manner, even if a collision is unavoidable.
When City Safety™ has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine
stops when City Safety™ has stopped the
car, unless the driver manages to depress the
clutch pedal beforehand.
NOTE
•
Keep the windscreen surface in front
of the laser sensor free from ice, snow
and dirt (see the illustration for sensor
location on page 170).
•
Do not affix or mount anything on the
windscreen in front of the laser sensor
•
Remove ice and snow from the bonnet
- snow and ice must not exceed a
height of 5 cm.
04
Fault tracing and action
If the message Windscreen Sensors
blocked is shown in the combined instru-
ment panel it indicates that the laser sensor is
blocked and cannot detect vehicles in front of
the car. This means that City Safety™ is not
operational.
The Windscreen Sensors blocked message
is not shown for all situations in which the
laser sensor is blocked. The driver must
therefore be diligent about keeping the windscreen and area in front of the laser sensor
clean.
The following table presents possible causes
for the message being shown, along with
suggestions for appropriate action.
171
04 Driver support
City Safety™
04
Cause
Action
The windscreen surface in front of the
laser sensor is dirty or
covered with ice or
snow.
Clean the windscreen surface in
front of the sensor
from dirt, ice and
snow.
The laser sensor field
of vision is blocked.
Remove the
blocking object.
IMPORTANT
If there are cracks, scratches or stone
chips in the windscreen in front of either of
the laser sensor's "windows" and they
cover a surface of approx. 0.5 x 3.0 mm
(or larger), then a workshop must be contacted for replacement of the windscreen
(see the illustration for sensor location,
page 170) - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Failure to take action may result in
reduced performance for City Safety™.
To avoid the risk of failed, deficient or
reduced operation for City Safety™, the
following also applies:
•
Volvo recommends that you do not
repair cracks, scratches or stone chips
in the area in front of the laser sensor instead, the whole windscreen should
be replaced.
•
Before replacing a windscreen, contact an authorised Volvo workshop to
verify that the correct windscreen is
ordered and fitted.
•
The same type or Volvo-approved
windscreen wipers must be fitted during replacement.
Laser sensor
The City Safety™ function includes a sensor
which transmits laser light. The illustration on
page 170 shows sensor location.
Contact a qualified workshop in the event of a
fault or if the laser sensor needs servicing an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. It is absolutely essential to follow
the prescribed instructions when handling the
laser sensor.
The following two labels with English text are
fitted directly on the laser sensor unit:
The upper label in the illustration describes
the classification of the laser light:
•
172
Laser radiation - Do not look into the
laser beam with optical instruments Class 1M laser product.
04 Driver support
City Safety™
The lower label in the illustration describes
the physical data for the laser light:
•
IEC 60825-1:1993 + A2:2001. Complies
with FDA (U.S. Food Administration)
standards for laser product design with
the exception of deviations in accordance
with "Laser Notice No. 50" from
26 July 2001.
Radiation data for the laser sensor
The following table specifies the laser sensor's physical data.
Maximum pulse energy
2.64 µJ
Maximum average output
45 mW
Pulse duration
Divergence (horizontal x vertical)
33 ns
laser class 3B as per standard IEC
60825-1. Laser class 3B is not eyesafe and therefore entails a risk of
injury.
WARNING
If any of these instructions are not followed
then there is a risk of eye injury!
•
Never look into the laser sensor (which
emits spreading invisible laser radiation) at a distance of 100 mm or closer
with magnifying optics such as a magnifying glass, microscope, lens or similar optical instruments.
•
Testing, repair, removal, adjustment
and/or replacement of the laser sensor's spare parts must only be carried
out by a qualified workshop - we recommend an authorised Volvo workshop.
•
To avoid exposure to harmful radiation, do not carry out any readjustments or maintenance other than
those specified here.
28° × 12°
•
The repairer must follow specially
drawn up workshop information for the
laser sensor.
•
Do not remove the laser sensor (this
includes removing the lenses). A
removed laser sensor does not fulfil
•
The laser sensor's connector must be
unplugged before removal from the
windscreen.
•
The laser sensor must be fitted onto
the windscreen before the sensor's
connector is plugged in.
•
The laser sensor transmits laser light
when the remote control key is in position II and also with the engine
switched off (see page 84 on key positions).
04
Symbols and text messages
In conjunction with automatic braking by the
City Safety™ system, one or more symbols
may illuminate in the combined instrument
panel and a text message may be shown.
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
173
04 Driver support
City Safety™
Symbol
Message
Meaning/Action
Auto braking by City Safety
City Safety™ is braking or has automatically braked.
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The laser sensor is temporarily non-operational because something is blocking it.
•
Remove the object blocking the sensor and/or clean the windscreen in front of the sensor.
Read about the limitations of the laser sensor, see page 171.
04
174
City Safety Service required
City Safety™ is not operational.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
General
Two system levels
"Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection" is an aid to assist the driver
when there is a risk of colliding with a pedestrian or vehicle in front that is stationary or
moving in the same direction.
Depending on how the car equipped, the Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian
Detection function may appear in two variants: Level 1 and Level 2.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is activated in situations where
the driver should have started braking earlier,
which is why it cannot help the driver in every
situation.
The driver is merely warned of occurring
obstacles by means of visual and acoustic
signals - no automatic braking intervenes, the
driver must himself brake.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection is designed to be activated as
late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary
intervention.
The driver is warned of occurring obstacles
by means of visual and acoustic signals - the
car is braked automatically if the driver himself does not act within a reasonable time.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection may prevent a collision or
reduce the collision speed.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Detection must not be used as an
excuse for the driver to change his/her driving
style. If the driver solely relies on Collision
Warning with Auto Brake to do the braking,
there will be a collision sooner or later.
1
2
Function
Level 1
04
Level 2
IMPORTANT
Maintenance of components included in
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Pedestrian Detection must only be carried
out in a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended.
Function overview1.
Audio-visual warning signal in the event
of a collision risk.
Radar sensor2
Camera sensor
Collision Warning with Auto Brake executes
three steps in the following order:
1. Collision warning
2. Brake support2
3. Auto Brake2
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
With system Level 2 only.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
175
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
The collision warning system and City
Safety™ complement each other. For more
information on City Safety™, see page 169.
Brake support also reinforces the driver's
braking if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision.
1 - Collision warning
3 - Auto Brake2
The driver is first warned of a potentially
imminent collision.
04
The collision warning system detects pedestrians, stationary vehicles as well as vehicles
driving in the same direction in front of the
car.
If there is a risk of collision with a pedestrian
or a vehicle, the driver's attention is attracted
with a flashing red warning signal (no. [1] in
the illustration on page 175) and an acoustic
signal.
The automatic brake function is activated
last.
If in this situation the driver has not yet
started to take evasive action and the risk of
collision is imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place
irrespective of whether or not the driver
brakes. Braking then takes place with full
brake force in order to reduce collision speed,
or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to
avoid a collision.
2 - Brake support2
If the risk of collision has increased further
after the collision warning then the brake support is activated.
This means that the brake system is prepared
for rapid braking by applying the brakes
lightly, which may feel like a slight jolt.
If the brake pedal is depressed sufficiently
quickly then full brake function is implemented.
2
176
With system Level 2 only.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
WARNING
The collision warning system does not
engage in all driving situations or traffic,
weather or road conditions. The collision
warning system does not react to vehicles
driving in another direction to the car or to
animals.
Warning only activated in the event of a
high risk for collision. This section "Function" and the section "Limitations" inform
about limitations that the driver must be
aware of before using the Collision Warning system with Auto Brake.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians are switched off at vehicle
speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians do not work in darkness and
tunnels - not even when streetlights are lit.
The auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed. To ensure
full brake performance, the driver should
always depress the brake pedal - even
when the car auto-brakes.
Never wait for a collision warning. The
driver is always responsible that the correct distance and speed are maintained even when the collision warning system
with auto-brake is used.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
Detection of pedestrians
•
In order for a pedestrian to be detected
he/she must appear full-length and have
a height of at least 80 cm.
•
The system cannot detect a pedestrian
carrying larger items.
•
The camera sensor's ability to see pedestrians at dusk and dawn is limited - just
like the human eye.
•
Optimal examples of what the system regards as
pedestrians with clear body contours.
Optimal performance of the system requires
that the system function that detects pedestrians receives as unambiguous information
as possible about the contours of the body this implies the opportunity to identify the
head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower
body combined with a normal human pattern
of movement.
If large parts of the body are not visible to the
camera then the system cannot detect a
pedestrian.
The camera sensor's capacity to detect
pedestrians is deactivated when driving in
darkness and tunnels - even when streetlights are lit.
WARNING
Operation
Settings are made from MY CAR via the centre console's screen and menu system. For
information on how the menu system is used,
see page 206.
Warning signals On and Off
It is possible to choose whether the acoustic
and visual warning signals of the collision
warning system should be on or off.
When starting the engine, the setting that was
selected when the engine was switched off is
obtained automatically.
NOTE
Collision Warning with Auto Brake &
Pedestrian Detection is an assistance tool.
This function cannot detect all pedestrians
in all situations and it cannot see e.g. partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides the contours of the body or
pedestrians shorter than 80 cm.
•
The driver is always responsible that
the vehicle is driven properly and with
a safety distance adapted to the
speed.
04
The Brake Support and Auto Brake functions are always enabled - they cannot be
deactivated.
Light and acoustic signals
To deactivate the light and acoustic signals:
•
Locate Settings Car settings
Driver support systems Collision
Warning - untick the box there.
The warning lamp (no. [1] in the image on
page 175) is tested each time the engine is
started by briefly lighting the separate light
points of the warning lamp if the visual and
acoustic warning of the collision warning system is activated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
177
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
Acoustic signal
The warning sound can be activated/deactivated separately:
•
Select On or Off in the menu system
under Settings Car settings Driver
support systems Collision Warning
Warning sound.
Set warning distance
04
The warning distance regulates the distance
at which the visual and acoustic warnings are
deployed.
•
Select Long, Normal or Short in the MY
CAR menu system under Settings Car
settings Driver support systems
Collision Warning Warning distance.
The warning distance determines the system's sensitivity. Warning distance Long provides an earlier warning. First test with Long
and if this setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in
certain situations, then change to warning
distance Normal.
Only use warning distance Short in exceptional cases, e.g. for dynamic driving.
3
178
NOTE
When the adaptive cruise control is in use
the warning lamp and warning sound will
be used by the cruise control even if the
collision warning system is switched off.
The collision warning system warns the
driver in the event of a risk of a collision,
but the function cannot shorten driver
reaction time.
Checking settings
The settings required can be controlled in the
centre console's screen. Search with the
menu system MY CAR under Settings Car
settings Driver support systems
Collision Warning, see page 206.
Maintenance
In order for the collision warning system to
be effective, always drive with Distance
Warning set at time interval 4–5, see
page 166.
NOTE
Even if the warning distance has been set
to Long warnings could be perceived as
being late in certain situations, e.g. when
there are large differences in speed or if
vehicles in front brake heavily.
WARNING
No automatic system can guarantee
100 % correct function in all situations.
Therefore, never test Collision Warning
with Auto Brake by driving at people or
vehicles - this may cause severe damage
and injury and risk lives.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Camera and radar sensor3.
For the sensors to work correctly, they must
be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be
cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
will reduce their function and may prevent
measurement.
Limitations
Collision Warning with Auto Brake and
Pedestrian Detection is active from
approx. 4 km/h.
The visual warning signal (no. [1] in the illustration on page 175) may be difficult to notice
in the event of strong sunlight, reflections,
when sunglasses are being worn or if the
driver is not looking straight ahead. The warning sound should therefore always be activated.
On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the
capacity to avoid a collision. In such situations the ABS and DSTC systems will provide
best possible braking force with maintained
stability.
NOTE
WARNING
The visual warning signal can be temporarily disengaged in the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by
strong sunlight for example. If this occurs
then the warning sound is activated even if
it is deactivated in the menu system.
•
Warnings may not appear if the distance to the vehicle in front is small or
if steering wheel and pedal movements are large, e.g. a very active driving style.
Warnings and brake interventions could be
implemented late or not at all if the traffic
situation or external influences mean that
the radar or camera sensor cannot detect
a pedestrian or a vehicle in front correctly.
The sensor system has a limited range for
pedestrians and the system therefore provides effective warnings and brake interventions at vehicle speeds up to 50 km/h.
For stationary or slow-moving vehicles,
warnings and brake interventions are
effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h.
04
Warnings for stationary or slow-moving
vehicles could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility.
Warnings and brake interventions for
pedestrians are switched off at vehicle
speeds exceeding 80 km/h.
The collision warning system uses the same
radar sensors as adaptive cruise control. For
more information on the radar sensor and its
limitations, see page 161.
If warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing then the warning distance
can be reduced. This then leads to the system providing a warning at a later stage,
which reduces the total number of warnings;
see the section "Set warning distance" on
page 178.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
179
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily deactivated with reverse gear engaged.
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is not activated at low speeds - under 4 km/h, which is
why the system does not intervene in situations where the car is approaching a vehicle
in front very slowly, e.g. when parking.
04
In situations where the driver demonstrates
active, aware driving behaviour, a collision
warning may be postponed slightly in order to
keep unnecessary warnings to a minimum.
When Auto Brake has prevented a collision
with a stationary object the car remains stationary for a maximum of 1.5 seconds. If the
car is braked for a vehicle in front that is moving, then speed is reduced to the same speed
as that maintained by the vehicle in front.
On a car with manual gearbox the engine
stops when Auto Brake has stopped the car,
unless the driver manages to depress the
clutch pedal beforehand.
Camera sensor limitations
The car’s camera sensor is also used - as
well as by Collision Warning with Auto Brake
- by the functions:
180
•
Automatic main/dipped beam dimming see page 96
•
Road sign information - see page 148
•
•
Driver Alert Control – see page 184
Lane Departure Warning – see page 188.
NOTE
Keep the windscreen surface in front of the
camera sensor clean from ice, snow, mist
and dirt.
cannot be detected in some situations, or
they are detected later than anticipated.
During very high temperatures the camera is
temporarily switched off for about 15 minutes
after the engine is started in order to protect
camera functionality.
Fault tracing and action
Do not attach or fit anything to the windscreen in front of the camera sensor, as
this could reduce or prevent the function
of one or more camera-dependent systems.
If the display shows the message
Windscreen Sensors blocked then this
means that the camera sensor is blocked and
cannot detect pedestrians, vehicles or road
markings in front of the car.
The camera sensors have limitations similar
to the human eye, i.e. they "see" worse in
darkness, heavy snowfall or rain and in thick
fog for example. Under such conditions the
functions of camera-dependent systems
could be significantly reduced or temporarily
disengaged.
At the same time, this means that - besides
Collision Warning with Auto Brake - the Automatic main/dipped beam dimming, Road sign
information, Driver Alert Control and Lane
Departure Warning functions will not have full
functionality either.
Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface,
dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings
could also significantly reduce camera sensor
function when it is used to scan the carriageway and detect pedestrians and other vehicles.
The field of vision of the camera sensor is limited, which is why pedestrians and vehicles
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The following table presents possible causes
for a message being shown along with the
appropriate action.
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
Cause
Action
Cause
Action
Cause
Action
The windscreen
surface in front of
the camera is dirty
or covered with ice
or snow.
Clean the windscreen surface in
front of the camera
from dirt, ice and
snow.
Wait. It may take
several minutes for
the camera to
measure the visibility.
Dirt has appeared
between the inside
of the windscreen
and the camera.
Thick fog, heavy
rain or snow means
that the camera
does not work sufficiently well.
No action. At times
the camera does
not work during
heavy rain or snowfall.
The windscreen
surface in front of
the camera has
been cleaned but
the message
remains.
Visit a workshop to
have the windscreen inside the
camera cover
cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
04
Symbols and messages in the display
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Collis'n warning
OFF
Collision warning system switched off.
Shown when the engine is started.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Collision warn.
Unavailable
The collision warning system cannot be activated.
Shown when the driver attempts to activate the function.
The message clears after about 5 seconds or after one press of the OK button.
Auto braking was
activated
Auto Brake has been active.
The message clears after one press of the OK button.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
181
04 Driver support
Collision Warning with Auto Brake & Pedestrian Protection*
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 180.
Radar blocked See
manual
04
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is temporarily disengaged.
The radar sensor is blocked and cannot detect other vehicles. For example, in the event that heavy rain or
if slush has collected in front of the radar sensor.
Read about the limitations of the radar sensor, see page 161.
Collision warn.
Service required
A
182
Collision Warning with Auto Brake is fully or partially disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System*
General information on Driver Alert
System
The Driver Alert System is intended to assist
drivers whose driving ability is deteriorating or
who are inadvertently leaving the lane they
are driving on.
The Driver Alert System consists of different
functions which can either be switched on at
the same time or individually:
•
Driver Alert Control – DAC, see
page 184.
•
Lane Departure Warning – LDW, see
page 188.
04
A switched-on function is set in standby
mode and is not activated automatically until
speed exceeds 65 km/h.
The function is deactivated again when speed
decreases to below 60 km/h.
Both functions use a camera which is
dependent on the lane having side markings
painted on each side.
WARNING
The Driver Alert System does not work in
all situations but is instead only intended
to be of supplementary assistance.
The driver always has ultimate responsibility that the car is driven safely.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
183
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
General information on DAC
The objective for DAC is to detect slowly
deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily
intended for major roads. The function is not
intended for city traffic.
Operation
In some cases driving ability is not affected
despite driver fatigue. In which case there
may not be any warning issued for the driver.
For this reason it is always important to stop
and take a break in the event of any signs of
driver fatigue, irrespective of whether or not
DAC issues a warning.
04
NOTE
The DAC (Driver Alert Control) function is
intended to attract the driver's attention when
he/she starts to drive less consistently, e.g. if
he/she becomes distracted or starts to fall
asleep.
A camera detects the side markings painted
on the carriageway and compares the section
of the road with the driver's steering wheel
movements. The driver is alerted if the vehicle
does not follow the carriageway evenly.
NOTE
The function must not be used to extend a
driving stint. Always plan breaks at regular
intervals and ensure that you are fully
rested.
Limitation
In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for
example:
•
•
The camera sensor has certain limitations,
see page 180.
184
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
in strong side winds.
on rutted road surfaces.
Settings are made from the centre console's
screen and its menu system. For information
on how the menu system is used, see
page 206.
On/Off
To set Driver Alert in standby mode:
•
In MY CAR, search for Car settings
Driver support systems Driver Alert
and check the box - No check in the box:
Function disengaged.
Function
Driver Alert is activated when speed exceeds
65 km/h and remains active as long as the
speed is over 60 km/h.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
If the vehicle is being driven erratically, the driver is notified by an
acoustic signal plus the text message Driver Alert Time for a break
- the linked symbol is illuminated in the combined instrument panel at the same time. The
warning is repeated after a time if driving ability does not improve.
The warning symbol can be switched off:
•
Press the left-hand stalk switch's OK button.
WARNING
An alarm should be taken very seriously,
as a sleepy driver is often not aware of
his/her own condition.
In the event of an alarm or a feeling of
tiredness; stop the car in a safe manner as
soon as possible and rest.
04
Studies have shown that it is equally as
dangerous to drive while tired as it is under
the influence of alcohol.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
185
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
Symbols and messages
Combined instrument panel
SymbolA
04
Message
Specification
Driver Alert Time for a
break
The vehicle has been driven inconsistently - the driver is alerted by an acoustic warning signal + text.
Windscreen Sensors
blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 180.
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
A
The system is disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
Screen
SymbolA
186
Message
Specification
Driver Alert OFF
The function is disengaged.
Driver Alert Available
The function is activated.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - DAC*
SymbolA
A
Message
Specification
Driver Alert Standby <65 km/h
The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
Driver Alert Unavailable
The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 180.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
04
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
187
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - LDW*
General information on - LDW
NOTE
The driver is only warned once each time
the wheels cross a line. So there is no
acoustic alarm when there is a line
between the car's wheels.
Operation and function
04
The LDW function's side lines (marked in red in
the figure).
The LDW (Lane Departure Warning) function
is intended to reduce the risk of so-called single-vehicle accidents – accidents where, in
certain situations, the vehicle leaves the carriageway and is in danger of driving either
into a ditch or into oncoming traffic.
LDW consists of a camera that detects the
side lines painted on the carriageway.
If the vehicle crosses the left or right-hand
side line of the carriageway without due
cause then the driver is alerted by an acoustic
signal.
188
The function is switched on or off by means
of a button on the centre console. An indicator lamp in the button illuminates when the
function is switched on.
This function is complemented in the combined instrument panel with intuitive graphics
in different situations. Here are several examples:
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
The LDW symbol has WHITE side lines the function is active and detects/"sees"
one side line, or both.
•
The LDW symbol has GREY side lines the function is active but detects neither
left nor right-hand side line.
or
•
The LDW symbol has GREY side lines the function is in standby mode because
the speed is below 65 km/h.
•
The LDW symbol has no side lines - the
function is deactivated.
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - LDW*
Limitations
The LDW function's camera sensor has limitations similar to the human eye. For more
information, see page 180.
A direction indicator is switched on
Settings are made from the centre console's
screen via the menu system in MY CAR.
From there, search and locate Settings
Car settings Driver support systems
Lane Departure Warning. For information on
how the menu system is used - see
page 206.
The driver's foot is on the brake pedal1
Select from the options:
In the event of rapid accelerator pedal
depression1
• On at start-up - The function enters
NOTE
There are several situations when LDW
does not give any warning, for example:
•
•
•
when the engine was switched off is
obtained.
Personal preferences
•
In the event of rapid steering wheel
movements1
•
In the event of turning so suddenly that
the car rolls.
SymbolA
standby mode every time the engine is
started. Otherwise the same value as
Message
Specification
Lane departure warning ON/
Lane departure warning OFF
The function is switched on/off.
• Increased sensitivity - The sensitivity
increases, an alarm is triggered earlier
and fewer limitations apply.
Symbols and messages in the display
In situations where there is no LDW function a
symbol may be shown in the combined
instrument panel in combination with an
explanatory message - follow the recommendation given if appropriate.
04
Examples of messages:
Shown at switch-on/off.
The text disappears after 5 seconds.
Lane Depart. Warning
Unavailable at this speed
1
The function is set in standby mode due to speed being lower than 65 km/h.
When "Increased sensitivity" is selected a warning is still given, see page 189.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
189
04 Driver support
Driver Alert System - LDW*
SymbolA
Message
Specification
Lane Depart. Warning
Unavailable
The carriageway does not have clear side markings or the camera sensor is temporarily disengaged. Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 180.
Lane Depart. Warning Available
The function scans the carriageway's side markings.
Windscreen Sensors blocked
The camera sensor is temporarily disengaged.
Shown in the event of snow, ice or dirt on the windscreen for example.
•
04
Clean the windscreen surface in front of the camera sensor.
Read about the limitations of the camera sensor, see page 180.
Driver Alert Sys Service
required
A
190
The system is disengaged.
•
Visit a workshop if the message remains - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Symbols are schematic - may vary by market and car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
General
Function
Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. An acoustic signal as well as symbols in
the centre console's screen indicate the distance to the detected obstacle.
Parking assistance sound level can be
adjusted during the ongoing acoustic signal
using the centre console's VOL knob or in the
car's menu system MY CAR - see page 206.
Parking assistance is available in two variants:
•
•
04
Rear only
Both front and rear.
WARNING
•
Parking assistance does not relinquish
the driver's own responsibility during
parking.
•
The sensors have blind spots where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of e.g. people or animals
near the car.
The system is automatically activated when
the engine is started - the switch's On/Off
lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is
switched off with the button, the lamp goes
out.
Screen view - showing an obstacle left front and
right rear.
The centre console's screen shows an overview of the relationship between the car and
detected obstacle.
Marked sectors show which of the four sensor(s) detected an obstacle. The closer to the
car symbol a selected sector box is, the
shorter the distance between the car and a
detected obstacle.
The frequency of the signal increases the
shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of
or behind the car. Other sound from the audio
system is muted automatically.
When the distance is within 30 cm the tone is
constant and the active sensor's field nearest
the car is filled in. If the detected obstacle is
within the distance for the constant tone both
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
191
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
behind and in front of the car, then the tone
sounds alternately from the loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance
Front parking assistance
The distance covered to the rear of the car is
about 1.5 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles behind comes from one of the rear
loudspeakers.
The distance covered in front of the car is
about 0.8 metres. The acoustic signal for
obstacles in front comes from one of the front
loudspeakers.
Rear parking assistance is activated when
reverse gear is engaged.
Front park assist is active up to
approx. 10 km/h. The lamp in the button is
illuminated in order to indicate that the system is activated. When the speed is below
10 km/h the system is reactivated.
IMPORTANT
Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or
low barriers may be in the "signal shadow"
and are then temporarily not detected by
the sensors - the pulsating tone may then
unexpectedly stop instead of changing
over to the expected constant tone.
04
The sensors cannot detect high objects,
such as projecting loading docks.
•
In such situations, pay extra attention
and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current
parking manoeuvre - there may be a
high risk of damage to vehicles or
other objects since the sensors are
temporarily unable to function optimally.
When reversing with e.g. a trailer on the towbar, rear parking assistance is switched off
automatically - otherwise the sensors would
react to the trailer.
NOTE
When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike
carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may
need to be switched off manually in order
that the sensors do not react to them.
192
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Front parking assistance is deactivated
when the parking brake is applied or P
mode is selected in a car with an automatic gearbox.
04 Driver support
Park assist syst*
IMPORTANT
Cleaning the sensors
When fitting auxiliary lamps: Remember
that they must not obscure the sensors –
the auxiliary lamps could then be detected
as obstacles.
NOTE
Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors
may cause incorrect warning signals.
Fault indicator
If the combined instrument panel's
information symbol illuminates with
constant glow and the text message
Park assist syst Service required is shown
then parking assistance is disengaged.
04
Sensor location, front.
IMPORTANT
In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external
audio sources that emit the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works
with.
Examples of such sources include horns,
wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes
and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.
Sensor location, rear.
The sensors must be cleaned regularly to
ensure that they work properly. Clean them
with water and car shampoo.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
193
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
General
Function and operation
The parking camera is an assist system and
is activated when reverse gear is engaged
(can be changed in the settings menu, see
page 206).
The camera image is shown in the centre
console's screen.
WARNING
04
•
The parking camera serves as an aid.
It does not relieve the driver of responsibility when reversing.
•
The camera has blind spots, where
obstacles cannot be detected.
•
Be aware of people and animals in the
vicinity of the car.
CAM button location.
The camera shows what is behind the car
and if something appears from the sides.
The camera shows a wide area behind the
car and part of the bumper and any towbar.
When reverse gear is engaged two unbroken
lines are shown graphically which illustrate
where the car's rear wheels will roll with the
current steering wheel angle, this facilitates
tight parking, reversing into tight spaces and
for hitching a trailer. The car’s approximate
external dimensions are illustrated by means
of two dashed lines. These help lines can be
switched off in the settings menu.
If the car is also equipped with parking assistance sensors* then their information is displayed graphically as coloured fields in order
to illustrate the distance to detected obstacles, see page 191.
The camera is active approx. 5 seconds after
reverse gear has been disengaged or until the
car's speed exceeds 10 km/h.
Objects in the screen may appear to tilt
slightly - this is normal.
NOTE
Objects on the display screen may be
closer to the car than they appear to be on
the screen.
If another view is active the parking camera
system takes over automatically and the
camera image is displayed in the screen.
194
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Camera location next to the opening handle.
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
Light conditions
The camera image is adjusted automatically
according to prevailing light conditions.
Because of this, the image may vary slightly
in brightness and quality. Poor light conditions can result in a slightly reduced image
quality.
directly related to steering wheel movement,
which shows the driver the path the car will
take, even when turning.
NOTE
•
When reversing with a trailer which is
not connected electrically to the car,
the lines on the display show the route
the car will take - not the trailer.
•
The screen shows no lines when a
trailer is connected electrically to the
car's electrical system.
•
The parking camera is deactivated
automatically when towing a trailer if a
Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.
NOTE
Keep the camera lens clear of dirt, snow
and ice to ensure optimum function. This
is particularly important in poor light.
Park assist lines
IMPORTANT
Bear in mind that the screen only shows
the area behind the car - pay attention to
the sides and front of the car when
manoeuvring during reversing.
Examples of how the park assist lines can be displayed for the driver.
The lines in the screen are projected as if they
were at ground level behind the car and are
Boundary lines
04
The system's lines.
Boundary line, 30 cm zone backwards
from the car
Boundary line, free reversing zone
"Wheel tracks"
The unbroken line (1) frames in a zone that is
within about 30 cm from the bumper.
The dashed line (2) frames in a zone up to
about 1.5 m back from the bumper. It is also
the limit of the car's most protruding parts,
such as door mirrors and corners - also during turning.
The wide "wheel tracks" (3) between the side
lines indicate where the wheels will roll and
can extend about 3.2 m back from the
bumper if no obstacle is in the way.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
195
04 Driver support
Park assist camera*
Cars with reversing sensors*
Settings
Press OK/MENU when a camera view is
shown. Make the settings as desired.
Miscellaneous
•
The default setting is that the camera is
activated when reverse gear is engaged.
•
One press on CAM activates the camera
even if reverse gear is not engaged.
•
Change between normal and zoomed
image by turning TUNE or by pressing
CAM.
•
If the car has several cameras* installed
then cameras are alternated between by
pressing CAM or turning TUNE.
04
Coloured areas (x 4, one per sensor) show distance.
If the car is also equipped with parking assistance sensors (see page 191) the distance
indication will be more precise and the coloured areas show which of the 4 sensors
is/are registering an obstacle.
The colour of the areas changes with
decreasing distance to the obstacle - from
yellow to orange to red.
196
Colour / paint
Distance (metres)
Yellow
1,5–
Orange
0,3–1,5
Red
0–0,3
Limitations
NOTE
A bike carrier or other accessory mounted
on the rear of the car could obscure the
camera's view.
Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it
only looks like a relatively small part of the
image is obscured, it could be a relatively
large sector that is hidden from view. Obstacles could thereby go undetected until they
are very close to the car.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
To bear in mind
•
Keep the camera lens free from dirt, ice
and snow.
•
Clean the camera lens regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - take care
not to scratch the lens.
04 Driver support
BLIS*
General information on BLIS and CTA
Operation
Function
The BLIS function (Blind Spot Information
System) is designed for driving in dense traffic on roads with several lanes in the same
direction. BLIS is a driver's aid intended to
provide a warning about:
•
•
BLIS and CTA are activated when the engine
is started. This is confirmed by the indicator
lamps in the door panels flashing once.
Activate/deactivate BLIS
vehicles in the car's blind spot
rapidly approaching vehicles in the left
and right-hand lanes closest to the car.
The BLIS function CTA (Cross Traffic Alert) is
a driver's aid intended to provide a warning
about:
•
crossing traffic when the car is reversed.
WARNING
BLIS and CTA are supplementary aids and
do not work in all situations.
BLIS and CTA are no substitutes for a safe
driving style and the use of rearview and
door mirrors.
BLIS and CTA can never replace the driver's responsibility and attention - it is
always the driver's responsibility to reverse
and change lanes in a safe manner.
1
2
04
BLIS lamp location1.
Indicator lamp
BLIS symbol
Button for activating/deactivating.
NOTE
The lamp illuminates on the side of the car
where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at
the same time then both lamps illuminate.
The BLIS function can be deactivated/activated by pressing the BLIS button on the
centre console.
Some combinations of the selected equipment leave no vacant space for a button in
the centre console - in which case the function is handled by the car's menu system MY
CAR2:
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
For information on the menu system - see page 206.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
197
04 Driver support
BLIS*
•
Select On or Off at Settings
settings BLIS.
Car
When BLIS operates
When BLIS is deactivated/activated the lamp
in the button extinguishes/illuminates and the
combined instrument panel confirms the
change with a text message. The door panel
indicator lamps flash once upon activation.
will change from a constant glow to flashing
with a more intense light.
WARNING
BLIS does not work in sharp bends.
BLIS does not work when the car is being
reversed.
To extinguish the message:
•
Activate/deactivate CTA
Press the left-hand stalk switch's OK button.
04
or
•
Wait approx. 5 seconds - the message
extinguishes.
Principle for BLIS: 1. Zone in blind spot. 2. Zone
for rapidly approaching vehicle.
In cars equipped with parking assistance (see
page 191), the CTA function can be deactivated/activated with the parking assistance
On/Off button.
The BLIS function is active at speeds above
approx. 10 km/h.
The system is designed to react when:
•
the driver's vehicle is overtaken by other
vehicles
•
the driver's vehicle is rapidly caught up
by another vehicle.
When BLIS detects a vehicle in zone 1 or a
rapidly approaching vehicle in zone 2, the
door panel's BLIS lamp illuminates with a
constant glow. If the driver activates the
direction indicator on the same side as the
warning in this situation then the BLIS lamp
2
198
For information on the menu system - see page 206.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
On/Off for parking assistance and CTA sensors.
CTA can be deactivated individually in the
menu system MY CAR2 as follows:
04 Driver support
BLIS*
•
Go to Settings Car settings BLIS
Cross Traffic Alert and deselect. The
CTA function is then deactivated. BLIS
remains activated however.
When CTA operates
•
If CTA detects something approaching
from the side, an acoustic warning signal
sounds. The signal comes from either the
left or the right-hand speaker, depending
on the direction from which the object is
approaching.
•
CTA also warns by illuminating the BLIS
lamps.
•
An additional warning is provided in the
form of an illuminated icon in the screen's
PAS graphics, see page 191.
The car is parked deep inside a parking slot.
Limitations
CTA does not perform optimally in all situations, but has a certain limitation - for example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through
other parked vehicles or obstructing objects.
Principle for CTA.
CTA supplements the BLIS function by being
able to see crossing traffic from the side during reversing, such as when reversing out of a
parking space.
04
Blind CTA sector.
Sector where CTA can detect/"see".
Here are some examples of when CTA's "field
of vision" may be limited from the beginning
and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be
detected until they are very close:
CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles.
In favourable conditions, it may also be able
to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists
and pedestrians.
CTA is only active during reversing and is
activated automatically when the gearbox's
reverse position is selected.
In an angled parking slot CTA can be completely
"blind" on one side.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
199
04 Driver support
BLIS*
However, when the driver is slowly reversing
the car, the angle is changed in relation to the
vehicle/object that is blocking, at which the
blind sector rapidly decreases.
Maintenance
In situations where the BLIS and CTA functions fail or are interrupted, the combined
instrument panel may show a symbol, supplemented by an explanatory message. Follow any recommendation given.
Examples of further limitations:
•
04
Dirt, ice and snow covering sensors may
reduce functionality and make it impossible to provide warnings. BLIS and CTA
are unable to detect hazards in such a
situation.
•
Do not affix any objects, tape or labels
within the area for the sensors3.
•
BLIS and CTA are deactivated when a
trailer is connected to the car's electrical
system.
Messages
Examples of messages:
Location of BLIS and CTA sensors.1
The BLIS and CTA sensors are located inside
the rear wing/bumper on each side of the car.
•
To ensure optimal functionality the areas
in front of the sensors must be kept
clean.
IMPORTANT
Repair of the BLIS and CTA functions'
components must only be performed by a
workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop
is recommended.
Message
Specification
CTA OFF
CTA is manually switched
off - BLIS is active.
BLIS and
CTA OFF
Trailer
attached
BLIS and CTA are temporarily non-operational
because a trailer is connected to the car's electrical system.
BLIS and
CTA Service required
BLIS and CTA are nonoperational.
•
Visit a workshop if the
message remains - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
A text message can be acknowledged by
briefly pressing the OK button on the direction indicator stalk.
3
1
200
See the figure in the next section "Maintenance", page 200.
NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
04 Driver support
04
201
Menus and messages...........................................................................
Menu source MY CAR..........................................................................
Climate control......................................................................................
Preconditioning the car ........................................................................
Heater ..................................................................................................
Trip computer........................................................................................
Adapting driving characteristics...........................................................
Comfort inside the passenger compartment........................................
202
204
206
214
225
231
233
238
239
COMFORT AND DRIVING PLEASURE
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Combined instrument panel
Menu overview
Some of the following menu options require
the function and hardware to be installed in
the car.
Settings*
Themes
NOTE
If a warning message appears while you
are using the trip computer, the message
must be read (press OK) before the previous activity can be resumed.
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Message
Specification
Service status
Stop safelyA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Stop engineA
Stop and switch off the
engine. Serious risk of
damage - consult a workshopB.
Service
urgentA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car immediately.
Service
requiredA
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
See manualA
Read the owner's manual.
Messages
Oil level1
Information display and controls for menus.
05
Trip computer reset
Thumbwheel – browse between menu
options.
Message
RESET – reset the active function. Used
in certain cases to select/activate a function, see the explanation under each
respective function.
The menus shown in the display in the combined instrument panel are controlled with the
left-hand stalk switch. The menus shown
depend on key position, see page 84. If a
message appears then this must be acknowledged with OK for the menus to be shown.
1
204
Preconditioning
OK – access to message list and message confirmation.
When a warning, information or indicator
symbol illuminates, a corresponding message
appears in the display at the same time. An
error message is stored in a memory list until
the fault has been rectified.
Press OK (see figure in the section "Combined instrument panel" on page 204) to
acknowledge and browse through messages.
Certain engines.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menus and messages
Message
Specification
Message
Specification
Book time
for maintenance
Time to book regular
service - contact a workshopB.
Transmission
hot Reduce
speed
Time for regular maintenance
Time for regular service contact a workshopB. The
timing is determined by
the number of kilometres
driven, number of months
since the last service,
engine running time and
oil grade.
Drive more smoothly or
stop the car in a safe
manner. Disengage the
gear and run the engine
at idling speed until the
message clears.
Transmission
hot Stop
safely Wait
for cooling
Critical fault. Stop the car
immediately in a safe
manner and contact a
workshopB.
Maintenance
overdue
If the service intervals are
not followed then the
warranty does not cover
any damaged parts contact a workshopB.
Temporarily
offA
A function has been temporarily switched off and
is reset automatically
while driving or after starting again.
Transmission
Oil change
needed
Contact a workshopB to
check the car as soon as
possible.
Low battery
charge
Power save
mode
The audio system is
switched off to save
energy. Charge the battery.
Transmission
Reduced
performance
The gearbox cannot handle full capacity. Drive
carefully until the message clearsC.
A
B
C
05
Part of message, shown together with information on
where the problem has arisen.
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
For more information regarding the automatic gearbox, see
page 128.
If shown repeatedly contact a workshopB.
205
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
General information about MY CAR
Many of the car's features are handled
in this menu source, e.g. setting the
clock, door mirrors and locks.
Operation
Centre console controls
Navigation in the menus is carried out using
buttons in the centre console or with the
steering wheel's right-hand keypad.
current function is interrupted
input characters are deleted
most recent selections are undone
leads up in the menu system
A long press leads to the highest menu level
(Main source view), from where all of the car's
functions/menu sources can be accessed see also page 249.
Centre console controls for menu navigation.
Press MY CAR to open the menus under
MY CAR.
Press OK MENU to select/tick in the
highlighted menu option or to store the
selected function in the memory.
Turn the TUNE knob to scroll up/down
among the menu options.
EXIT
EXIT functions
Depending on the function the cursor is on
when EXIT is pressed, and on the menu level,
one of the following may occur:
206
phone call is rejected
Short and long presses may also produce
varying results.
Certain functions are standard, others are
optional - the range also varies depending on
the market.
05
•
•
•
•
•
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Steering wheel keypad*
The following is an example of how a function
can be accessed and adjusted using the
steering wheel keypad:
MY CAR
The following options are available in menu
source MY CAR:
1. Press the centre console button MY
CAR.
2. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Settings,
with the thumbwheel (1) and then press
the thumbwheel - a submenu opens.
3. Scroll to the desired menu, e.g. Car
settings and press the thumbwheel - a
submenu opens.
The keypad may vary depending on market.
Turn the thumbwheel to scroll up/down
among the menu options.
Press the thumbwheel to select/tick in
the highlighted menu option or to store
the selected function in the memory.
EXIT (see heading "EXIT functions" page
206).
Search paths
4. Scroll to Lock settings and press the
thumbwheel - a new submenu opens.
05
5. Scroll to Doors unlock and press the
thumbwheel - a submenu of selectable
functions opens.
6. Choose between the options All doors
and Driver door, then all and press the
thumbwheel - a cross is marked in the
option's empty box.
Current menu level is shown at the top right
of the centre console's screen. Search paths
to the menu system functions are described
in this manual in the following form:
7. Exit the programming by backing out of
the menus incrementally with short
presses on EXIT (2) or with one long
press.
Settings Car settings Lock settings
Doors unlock Driver door, then all.
The procedure is the same as with the centre
console's buttons - see page 206: OK MENU
(2), EXIT (4) and the TUNE knob (3).
•
•
•
•
•
My V60
Trip statistics (Trip statistics)
Hybrid
Support systems (Support systems)
Settings (Settings)
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
207
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
• Driving modes
My V60
The various drive modes of the car are
explained; see page 123.
• Eco driving guide
Tips, advice and a description of what it
means to drive economically are found
here.
Trip statistics
MY CAR
05
NOTE! The figure is schematic – the number of
functions varies depending on the selected
equipment and market.
MY CAR
Trip statistics
The screen shows history with a bar chart of
average electricity and fuel consumption, see
page 237.
My V60
208
Setup - menus
The menus are structured as follows:
Menu level 1
Menu level 2
p. x
Menu level 3
Menu level 4
When selecting whether a function should be
activated/On or deactivated/Off a square is
displayed:
Hybrid
Information on the car's drive system is found
here. Select from among the following headings:
The screen shows which motor is powering the car and how the drive force flows;
see page 126.
The screen shows a summary of the current
status of the car's driver support systems.
Shown here are the 4 first menu levels under
MY CAR Settings. Some menus have further submenus - these are then described in
detail in their respective sections.
Hybrid
• Power flow
Support systems
(MY CAR > Support systems)
Driver support system
The screen shows a grouping of all of the
car's driver support systems - these can be
activated or deactivated here.
MY CAR
MY CAR
On: Selected square.
Off: Empty square.
NOTE! The figure is schematic – the number of
functions varies depending on the selected
equipment and market.
•
Select On/Off with OK - then back out of
the menu with EXIT.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Functions in MY CAR
Side mirror settings
Car settings
Fold mirrors
Car key memory
On
Off
p. 87
and
108
Automatic door locking
On
Off
p.
48,
58
and
62
Driver door, then all
Keyless entry
Any door
Doors on same side
Triple indicator
On
On
p.
100
Off
Off
Unlock confirmation light
Active bending lights
p.98
05
On
p. 48
and
102
Off
Auxiliary lights
30 sec
On
60 sec
Off
p.98
90 sec
Both front doors
Ask when exiting
Door lock confirmation light
Off
All doors
Activate once
90 sec
p.46
Approach light duration
p.
101
60 sec
Off
All doors
Reduced Guard
30 sec
Tilt right mirror
On
Doors unlock
Home safe light duration
Tilt left mirror
Light settings
Lock settings
p.
108
Steering wheel force
p. 63
and
67
Low
p.
238
Medium
High
}}
209
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Reset car settings
Lane Departure Warning
All menus in Car settings are
given original factory settings.
On
Driver support systems
On at start-up
Collision Warning
On
City Safety
On
Off
BLIS
On
Off
Normal
On
Off
Road Sign Information
Short
On
Warning sound
On
Distance Alert
On
Long
p.
148
Driver Alert
On
Off
System options
Off
On
Off
p.
146
Time
p.82
The combined instrument panel's
clock is adjusted here.
Time format
12 h
24 h
210
p.
184
Off
On
DSTC
p.
166
Off
Speed alert
Off
p.
197
Off
Increased sensitivity
Warning distance
p.
169
Off
On
p.
175
Off
05
p.
188
p.82
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Screen saver
On
p.
206
Off
Temperature unit
Celsius
Fahrenheit
The screen's current content fades
out after a period of inactivity and
is replaced by a blank screen if this
option is selected.
Selects the unit for the display of
outside temperature and setting of
the climate control system.
Volume levels
The current screen content returns
if any of the screen's buttons or
controls are actuated.
Voice output volume
Front park assist volume
Language
Rear park assist volume
Selects language for menu texts.
Phone ringing volume
(Voice output volume: Only with
Volvo's GPS navigator RTI installed
– see RTI manual.)
Show help text
On
Off
Reset system options
Explanatory text for the screen's
current content is shown with this
option selected.
Distance and fuel units
MPG (UK)
MPG (US)
km/l
l/100km
All menus in System options are
given original factory settings.
p.
237
Voice settings
Voice tutorial
This menu option + OK provides
spoken information about how the
system works.
Voice command list
Phone commands
Phone
Phone call contact
Phone dial number
Navigation commands
Navigation
Navigation repeat instruction
Navigation go to address
General commands
Help
05
Cancel
Voice tutorial
The menu options under Phone
commands show several examples of available voice commands only with a Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone installed. For more
and detailed information - see
page 274.
The menu options under Navigation commands show several
examples of available voice commands - only with Volvo's navigation system RTI* installed.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
211
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Voice user setting
Default setting
User 1
User 2
Here there is the option to create a
second user profile - an advantage
if more than one person shall use
the car/system regularly. Default
setting gives factory settings.
Voice training
User 1
05
User 2
With Voice training the voice recognition system is taught to recognise the driver's voice and pronunciation. A number of phrases are
presented in the screen for the
driver to read aloud. When the system has learnt how the driver talks,
the presentation of the phrases
stops. Following which e.g. User 1
can be selected in Voice user setting in order that the system shall
listen to the right user.
Voice output volume
Automatic blower adjustment
A volume control appears in the
screen - at which point, proceed as
follows:
Normal
High
Low
1. Adjust the volume with the
thumbwheel.
Recirculation timer
2. Test-listen using OK.
On
3. Use EXIT to store the setting
and the menu is switched off.
Off
Automatic rear defroster
Voice POI list
On
Edit list
Off
The number of facilities is extensive and varies depending on market. Maximum 30 favourite facilities
can be stored in this list.
Auto start steering wheel heater
On
Off
Menu option Voice POI list is only
shown if Volvo's navigation system
RTI* is installed. For more information on Facilities and Voice recognition - see the Navigation system's owner's manual.
Audio settings
Climate settings
Auto start driver seat heater
On
Off
Interior air quality system
p.
247
On
Off
Reset climate settings
All menus in Climate settings are
given original factory settings.
212
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
p.
214
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Menu source MY CAR
Favourites (FAV)
p.
250
Volvo On Call
Described in a separate manual.
Information
Number of keys
p.46
VIN number
p.
388
DivX® VOD code
p.
267
Bluetooth software
version in car
p.
273
05
Map and software version*
Only in cars with Volvo GPS navigator - see separate manual.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
213
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
General
Climate control
The V60 Plug-in Hybrid is equipped with electronic climate control, see page 218. The climate control system cools or heats as well as
dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment.
When the climate control system is activated
it is recommended that the panel's air vents
are fully open in order to obtain the most efficient air conditioning possible.
05
If there is no heat from the coolant then the
electrically-driven heater is used primarily. In
colder weather the car's fuel-driven heater
can also be started.
The engine block heater, fuel-driven heater
and electrically-driven heater are used as
heat sources during driving. The heat
source(s) used depends on the prevailing
conditions, e.g. ambient temperature.
During driving the car automatically starts the
systems needed to maintain comfort inside
the passenger compartment - except in
PURE1 drive mode, when climate comfort is
deprioritised, e.g. AC and certain electricallydriven sources are switched off.
1
214
NOTE
The air conditioning system (AC) can be
switched off, see page 221, but to ensure
the best possible climate comfort in the
passenger compartment and to prevent
the windows from misting, it should always
be on.
Preconditioning the passenger
compartment
The climate in the car's passenger compartment can be preconditioned (acclimatised)
before departure, in both hot and cold climates.
NOTE
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the car works to reach comfort temperature and not the temperature
set in the climate control system.
NOTE
The car's doors and windows should be
closed during the preconditioning of the
passenger compartment.
For more information on preconditioning, see
page 225.
Actual temperature
The temperature you select corresponds to
the physical experience with reference to factors such as air speed, humidity and solar
radiation etc. in and around the car.
The system includes a sun sensor which
detects on which side the sun is shining into
the passenger compartment. This means that
the temperature can differ between the right
and left-hand air vents despite the controls
being set for the same temperature on both
sides.
Sensor location
Warming-up includes the passenger compartment, windows and front seats if desired.
•
When the passenger compartment is being
cooled (when the car is not plugged into the
mains power circuit)* energy is drawn from
the hybrid battery, correspondingly reducing
mileage on electricity.
The sun sensor is located on the top side
of the dashboard.
•
The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is located below the climate control panel.
For information about drive modes, see page 123.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
•
The outside temperature sensor is
located on the door mirror.
•
The humidity sensor* is located by the
interior rearview mirror.
NOTE
Do not cover or block the sensors with
clothing or other objects.
Side windows and sunroof*
To ensure that the air conditioning works
optimally, the side windows, and sunroof* if
specified, should be closed.
Misting windows
Remove misting on the insides of the windows by primarily using the defroster function.
To reduce the risk of misting, keep the windows clean and use window cleaner.
Temporary shut-off of the air
conditioning
When the engine requires full power, e.g. for
full acceleration or driving uphill with a trailer,
the air conditioning can be temporarily
switched off. There may then be a temporary
increase in temperature in the passenger
compartment.
2
Condensation
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*
When running at idling speed, preconditioning or charging the hybrid battery2 in hot
weather, condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car. This is normal.
This option keeps the passenger compartment clear of allergy and asthma inducing
substances. For more information on CZIP,
see the brochure included with the purchase
of the car.
Ice and snow
Remove ice and snow from the climate control system air intake (the grille between the
bonnet and the windscreen).
The following is included:
•
An enhanced fan function that means that
the fan starts when the car is opened with
the remote control key. The fan fills the
passenger compartment with fresh air.
The function starts when required and is
disengaged automatically after a time or
when one of the passenger compartment
doors is opened.
•
The air quality system IAQS is a fully
automatic system that cleans the air in
the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level
ozone.
Total airing function
The function opens/closes all side windows
simultaneously and can be used for example
to quickly air the car during hot weather, see
page 62.
Passenger compartment filter
All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter. This must be
replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo
Service Programme for the recommended
replacement intervals. If the car is used in a
severely contaminated environment, it may
be necessary to replace the filter more often.
05
NOTE
There are different types of passenger
compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.
See also page 304.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
215
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
NOTE
To keep the CZIP standard in cars with
CZIP the IAQS filter must be changed after
15 000 km or once per year depending on
whichever occurs first. However, up to
75 000 km over 5 years. In cars without
CZIP and where the customer does not
want to keep the CZIP standard the IAQS
filter must be changed at a regular service.
Use of tested materials in the interior
equipment.
05
The materials have been developed in order
to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and they contribute to
making the passenger compartment easier to
keep clean. The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are
removable and easy to remove and clean.
Use cleaning agents and car care products
recommended by Volvo, see page 381.
•
Automatic start of rear window defroster,
see page 109.
Air distribution is fully automatic in AUTO
mode.
•
•
Air quality system*, see page 223.
If necessary it can be controlled manually,
see page 224.
•
Automatic start of steering wheel heating,
see page 92.
Automatic start of seat heating driver, see
page 219.
The climate control system's functions can be
reset to the default settings via the menu system in MY CAR and this is carried out under:
Settings Climate settings Reset
climate settings.
Air distribution
Open
Closed
Lateral airflow
Menu settings
It is possible to activate/deactivate or change
the default settings for six of the climate control system's functions via the centre console.
For general information about menu navigation, see page 207:
216
•
Fan level for automatic climate control,
see page 220.
•
Recirculation timer, see page 223.
Air vents in the dashboard
Vertical airflow
Aim the outer vents at the side windows to
remove misting.
The incoming air is divided between a number of different vents in the passenger compartment.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Air vents in the door pillars
Closed
Open
05
Lateral airflow
Vertical airflow
Aim the vents at the windows to remove misting in cold weather.
Aim the vents into the passenger compartment to maintain a comfortable climate in the
rear seat in hot weather.
NOTE
Remember that small children may be sensitive to air flows and draughts.
217
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Electronic climate control, ECC
05
Temperature control, left-hand side
Electrically heated front seat, left-hand
side
Max. defroster
Temperature control, right-hand side
Recirculation
Fan
AUTO - Automatic climate control
Air distribution - ventilation floor
AC – – Air conditioning on/off
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Rear window and door mirror defrosters,
see page 109
218
Electrically heated front seat, right-hand
side
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Operating the controls
Heated seats*
WARNING
The heated seat should not be used by
people who find it difficult to perceive temperature increase because of sensory loss
or for any reason have difficulty in managing to use the control of the heated seat.
Otherwise, burn injuries may arise.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Front seats
•
Lowest heat level - one orange field illuminates in the screen.
•
Switch off the heat - no field illuminates.
Rear seat3
Automatic start of driver's seat heating
With the automatic start of the driver's seat
heating activated, the driver's seat will have
the highest heat level when the engine is
started.
Current heat level is shown in the centre console's screen.
Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the function:
•
Highest heat level - three orange fields
illuminate in the centre console's screen
(see figure above).
•
Lower heat level - two orange fields illuminate in the screen.
3
Not included if two-stage booster seat is selected.
Automatic start takes place when the car is
cold and the ambient temperature is lower
than approx. +7 °C. Activate/deactivate the
function via the menu system in MY CAR
under Settings Climate settings Auto
start driver seat heater. For a description of
the menu system, see page 206.
Current heat level is shown in the pushbutton's
lamps.
Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the function:
•
Highest heat level - three lamps illuminate.
•
•
•
Lower heat level - two lamps illuminate.
05
Lowest heat level - one lamp illuminates.
Switch off the heat - no lamp illuminates.
}}
219
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Fan
Air distribution
NOTE
If the fan is fully switched off then the air
conditioning is not engaged - which can
cause a risk of misting on the windows.
Fan knob
Turn the knob to increase or
decrease fan speed. If AUTO
is selected then fan speed is
regulated automatically. The
previously set fan speed is
disengaged.
05
Air distribution - defroster windscreen
Air distribution - air vent instrument panel
Air distribution - ventilation floor
The figure consists of three buttons. When
pressing the buttons the corresponding figure
is illuminated in the screen (see following figure) and an arrow in front of each part of the
figure shows the air distribution that is
selected. For more information on air distribution, see page 224.
The selected air distribution is shown in the centre console's screen.
AUTO - Automatic climate control
The Auto function automatically regulates temperature,
air conditioning, fan speed,
recirculation, and air distribution.
If you select one or more manual functions,
the other functions continue to be controlled
automatically. All manual settings are disengaged when AUTO is pressed. The screen
shows AUTO CLIMATE.
Fan speed in automatic mode can be set in
the menu system MY CAR under: Settings
Climate settings Automatic blower
220
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
adjustment. Choose between Low, Normal
or High:
The temperature can be
adjusted with the knob separately for the driver's
side and the passenger side.
• Low - Automatic fan control. Low airflow
is prioritised.
• Normal - Automatic fan control.
• High - Automatic fan control. A more
intense airflow is prioritised.
For a description of the menu system, see
page 207.
Temperature control
resumed.
When the car is started, the
most recent setting is
When the lamp in the AC button is switched
off the air conditioning is disconnected. Other
functions are still controlled automatically.
When the max. defroster function is activated
the air conditioning is switched on automatically, so that the air is dehumidified at the
maximum setting.
Heated windscreen* and max. defroster
NOTE
Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by
selecting a higher/lower temperature than
the actual temperature required.
AC – Air conditioning on/off
05
In the PURE1 drive mode the
AC is preset not to start.
When the lamp in the AC
button illuminates, the air
conditioning is controlled by
the system's automatic function. This way, incoming air is cooled and
dehumidified.
Current temperature for each side is shown in
the centre console's screen.
1
The selected setting is shown in the centre console's screen.
Electric heating*
Max. defroster
For information about drive modes, see page 123.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
221
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Used to quickly remove misting and ice from the windscreen and side windows.
The light in the defroster button illuminates when the
function is active.
NOTE
Heated windscreen and IR window, see
page 106, may have an impact on the performance of transponders and other communication equipment.
Press the button repeatedly in order to activate the function.
05
Air flows to the windows - symbol (2) illuminates in the screen.
•
Switch off the function - no symbol illuminates.
For cars with heated windscreen:
•
Start the heating for the windscreen4 symbol (1) illuminates in the screen.
•
Start the heating for the windscreen4 and
air flow to the windows - symbols (1) and
(2) illuminate in the screen.
•
Switch off the function - no symbol illuminates.
Heated steering wheel*
The heating of the steering
wheel is activated/deactivated via a button in the centre console. For more information, see page 92.
NOTE
A triangular area at the end of each side of
the windscreen is not electrically heated,
where de-icing may take longer.
For cars without heated windscreen:
•
In the PURE drive mode activation of the
defroster function may cause the internal
combustion engine to start and change to
HYBRID1 drive mode.
The following also takes place in order to provide maximum dehumidification in the passenger compartment:
•
the air conditioning is automatically
engaged
•
recirculation and the air quality system
are automatically disengaged.
NOTE
The noise level increases as the fan is
operating at max.
Recirculation
When recirculation is
engaged the orange lamp in
the button illuminates. The
function is selected to shut
out bad air, exhaust gases
etc. from the passenger
compartment. The air in the
passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e.
no outside air is taken into the car when this
function is activated.
When the defroster is switched off the climate
control returns to the previous settings.
4
1
222
If the character C is shown in the rearview mirror when the heated windscreen is activated then the compass* must be recalibrated. See section Calibration on page 111 .
For information about drive modes, see page 123.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
IMPORTANT
If the air in the car recirculates for too long,
there is a risk of misting on the insides of
the windows.
Timer
With the timer function activated the system
will exit manually activated recirculation mode
according to a time that depends on the outside temperature. This reduces the risk of ice,
misting and bad air. Activate/deactivate the
function in the menu system MY CAR under
Settings Climate settings
Recirculation timer. For a description of the
menu system, see page 207.
NOTE
When max. defroster is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.
Air quality system*
The air quality system (IAQS) separates gases
and particles to reduce the levels of odours
and contaminants in the passenger compartment. If the outside air is contaminated then
the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated.
Activate/deactivate the function in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Climate
settings Interior air quality system. For a
description of the menu system, see
page 207.
NOTE
The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger compartment.
In a cold climate recirculation is limited so
as to prevent misting.
In the event of misting, the air quality sensor should be disengaged, and the
defroster functions for the windscreen and
side windows, as well as the rear window,
should be used.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05
223
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Climate control
Air distribution table
Air distribution
Use
Air distribution
Use
Air to windows. Some air
flows from the air vents. The
air is not recirculated. Air
conditioning is always
engaged.
to remove ice and
misting quickly.
Air to the floor and
windows. Some air
flows from the dashboard air vents.
to ensure comfortable
conditions and good
demisting in cold or
humid weather.
Air to windscreen, via
defroster vent, and side windows. Some air flows from
the air vents.
to prevent misting and
icing in a cold and
humid climate, (not at
too low fan speed to
enable this).
Air to floor and from
dashboard air vents.
in sunny weather with
cool outside temperatures.
Airflow to windows and from
dashboard air vents.
to ensure good comfort in warm, dry
weather.
Air to floor. Some air
flows to the dashboard air vents and
windows.
to direct heat or cold to
the floor.
Airflow to the head and chest
from the dashboard air
vents.
to ensure efficient
cooling in warm
weather.
Airflow to windows,
from dashboard air
vents and to the floor.
to provide cooler air
along the floor or
warmer air higher up in
cold weather or hot, dry
weather.
05
224
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Preconditioning the car
General
NOTE
With preconditioning1 of the
V60 Plug-in Hybrid the energy needs during
the journey are reduced - the electricity mileage is extended. For this reason, use preconditioning to enable the use of the battery
power2 for driving.
•
During preconditioning of the passenger
compartment, the car works to reach comfort temperature and not the temperature
set in the climate control system.
In a cold climate the fuel-driven heater
heats both the engine and the passenger
compartment - the electrically-driven
heater only heats the passenger compartment before departure.
In a hot climate the AC system cools the
passenger compartment.
Preconditioning the car reduces wear.
Condensation may form during preconditioning, see page 215.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you activate preconditioning via the timer, and then have
the car connected to the mains power circuit, see page 226.
NOTE
Preconditioning of the car is possible when it
is plugged into the mains power circuit, see
page 304.
•
NOTE
Preconditioning can be deselected if only
a limited time is available for charging.
NOTE
The compressor can operate and cool the
hybrid battery even when passenger compartment cooling is not selected or
required. The compressor emits noise.
05
Preconditioning can be activated:
•
directly via the information display,
remote control key* or mobile*, see
page 227
•
with the timer, see page 228.
OK button
Thumbwheel
RESET - resets/selects
Preconditioning is possible even when the
car is not connected to the mains.*
1
2
Operation
For symbols and messages associated with
preconditioning, see page 229.
See also page 214.
If the car is cooled when it is not plugged into the mains power circuit then preconditioning draws energy from the hybrid battery.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
225
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Preconditioning the car
For more information on the menus shown in
the display and controls on the left-hand stalk
switch, see page 204.
Setting the preconditioning
Select from the following:
•
•
parking inside
parking outside.
Preconditioning when the car is
plugged into the mains power circuit
•
05
Heating/cooling can last up to
50 minutes.
Seat heating for both front seats can be activated during preconditioning.
For more information about the car's connection to the mains power circuit, see
page 304.
Preconditioning when the car is not
plugged into the mains power circuit*
•
•
Heating can last up to 50 minutes.
Cooling takes place for 2-3 minutes.
Parking inside
The electrically-driven heater is activated with the Indoor parking
option.
If you select the Indoor parking setting then
the fuel-driven heater is deactivated during
preconditioning. This heating will have a
slightly lower performance than the Outdoor
parking setting in outside temperatures
lower than 5 °C.
NOTE
The car must be connected to the mains
power circuit before the electrically-driven
heater can be activated.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3. If the setting Indoor parking has already
been made then the symbol for this is
shown in the display, in which case continue from point 7.
4. If Outdoor parking is selected then the
symbol for this is shown instead, see
3
4
5
226
Seat heating can only be activated when the car is plugged into the mains power circuit.
Tick the box to activate.
The fuel-driven heater is not activated if the outside temperature exceeds 15 °C.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Parking outside on page 226. Scroll with
the thumbwheel to the symbol and select
with OK.
5. Scroll forward in the next menu to Indoor
parking and select with OK.
6. Go back in the menu with RESET.
7. Select whether or not seat heating3
should be activated. Scroll with the
thumbwheel to
and select with OK.
8. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Driver
seat or Passenger seat and select with
the OK button if they should be activated4 during preconditioning.
9. Exit the menu with RESET.
Parking outside
The Outdoor parking option also
allows the fuel-driven heater5 during
preconditioning.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
indoors in unventilated areas. Exhaust
fumes are given off.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Preconditioning the car
NOTE
The car can be started and driven even
when the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is running.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3. If the setting Outdoor parking has
already been made then the symbol for
this is shown in the display, in which case
continue from point 7.
4. If Indoor parking is selected then the
symbol for this is shown instead, see
Parking inside on page 226. Scroll with
the thumbwheel to the symbol and select
with OK.
5. Scroll forward in the next menu to
Outdoor parking and select with OK.
6. Go back in the menu with RESET.
the OK button if they should be acti฀
vated4 during preconditioning.
Activate direct start via remote control
key*
9. Exit the menu with RESET.
Direct start and immediate stop
NOTE
In the event of direct start of preconditioning, Volvo recommends that you activate
via the remote control key or mobile.
Activate/deactivate via the display
1. Press OK to access the menu.
Indicator lamp on remote control key with PCC*.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3. Scroll forward in the next menu to Direct
start/Stop in order to activate/deactivate
the preconditioning and select with OK.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
7. Select whether or not seat heating3
should be activated. Scroll with the
thumbwheel to
and select with OK.
Preconditioning can be activated via the
remote control key:
–
05
Hold the button for approach lighting
depressed for 2 seconds.
Hazard warning flashers provide information in accordance with the following:
•
5 short flashes followed by a constant
glow for approx. 3 seconds - the signal
8. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Driver
seat or Passenger seat and select with
3
4
Seat heating can only be activated when the car is plugged into the mains power circuit.
Tick the box to activate.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
227
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Preconditioning the car
has reached the car and precondition฀
ing has been activated.
•
•
05
5 short flashes - the signal has
reached the car but preconditioning
has not been activated.
Hazard warning flashers remain
switched off - the signal has not
reached the car.
If the button for information
is depressed
when preconditioning is active then the indicator lamp will show the status for this - at
the same time the car's lock status is shown,
see page 49. While the status is being investigated the indicator lamp emits a pair of short
flashes followed by a constant glow if preconditioning is active.
Timer
Two different times can be selected using the
timer. Here time refers to the time when the
car shall be used and acclimatised. The car's
electronics select when preconditioning shall
be activated based on prevailing external climatic conditions.
Setting the timer
1. Press OK to access the menu.
Starting the timer
1. Press OK to access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and activate with OK.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
A timer activated for preconditioning can be
switched off manually. Proceed as follows:
4. Briefly press OK to move to the illuminated hours setting.
1. Press OK to access the menu.
Switching off the timer
Status is also shown in the trip computer
while preconditioning is in progress.
5. Select the required hour using the thumbwheel.
Activate direct start via mobile*
6. Briefly press OK to move to the illuminated minutes setting.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to
Preconditioning and select with OK.
> If a timer is set but not activated then a
clock symbol is shown beside the set
time.
7. Select the required minute using the
thumbwheel.
3. Select one of the two timers using the
thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
8. Press OK6 to confirm the setting.
4. Switch off the timer by pressing:
Activation and information about the selected
settings that can be managed from a mobile
phone will be available via Volvo On Call*, see
separate owner's manual for Volvo On Call*.
9. Go back in the menu structure with
RESET.
6
228
10. Select the second timer (continued from
point 2) or exit the menu with RESET.
An further press of OK activates the timer.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
•
long on OK or
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Preconditioning the car
•
short on OK to go forward in the
menu. Then select to stop the timer
and confirm with OK.
5. Exit the menu with RESET.
A timer activated for preconditioning can also
be switched off in accordance with the
instructions in the section "Direct start and
immediate stop", see page 227.
Clock/timer
The heater's time is connected to the car's
clock.
Symbol
NOTE
All timer programming will be cleared if the
car's clock is reset.
the display at the same time as the set time is
shown next to the symbol.
Symbol in the display for activated
timer.
Symbols and messages
When the fuel-driven heater has
been activated the heat symbol illuminates in the display.
When one of the timers has been activated,
the symbol for activated timer illuminates in
Display
Specification
Auto heater ON
The fuel-driven heater is switched on and operating.
05
The heater's timer is activated after the remote control key has been removed from the ignition
switch and leaving the car - the engine and passenger compartment are heated at the set time.
Fuel operated heater stopped
Battery saving mode
The fuel-driven heater is stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.
The starter battery's charge level is too low.
229
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Preconditioning the car
Symbol
05
Display
Specification
Fuel operated heater stopped
Low fuel level
The fuel-driven heater is stopped.
Fuel operated heater Service
required
The fuel-driven heater is fully or partially disengaged.
Preconditioning interrupted
by power supply change
The electrically-driven heater or AC system is stopped.
Preconditioning stopped due
to malfunction
The electrically-driven heater or AC system is stopped.
Preconditioning stopped
Hybrid battery temperature
high
The electrically-driven heater or AC system is stopped.
A display text clears automatically after a time
or after one press on the indicator stalk OK
button.
230
Setting the heater is not possible due to fuel level being too low - this is in order to facilitate starting the engine as well as approx. 50 km driving.
Visit a workshop if the message remains. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop.
The transfer of energy is interrupted.
Visit a workshop. An authorised workshop is recommended.
The hybrid battery is too hot, wait until the temperature has returned to normal.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Heater
General
Fuel-driven heater
The V60 Plug-in Hybrid has a large heat
requirement, in particular during electric operation. As a consequence, the car is equipped
with electrically-driven heater and fuel-driven
heater. These heaters are required in order to
achieve the correct operating temperature for
the engine and to generate sufficient heat in
the passenger compartment.
In colder weather, the car's fuel-driven heater
can be activated during warming-up. The
heater starts automatically when extra heat is
required and is switched off automatically
when not required.
Electrically-driven heater
The heater cannot be controlled manually but
is activated automatically when required.
NOTE
If the electrically-driven heater is activated
then the charging time for the hybrid battery will be extended. The time required for
heating the car is mainly determined by the
outside temperature.
NOTE
When the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is
active, exhaust fumes may be given off
from the right-hand wheel housing, which
is perfectly normal.
If you do not want the car's fuel-driven heater
to start during preconditioning, activate
Indoor parking, see page 226. However, this
may prolong the warming-up time.
The fuel-driven heater cannot be started during driving or preconditioning if the outside
temperature exceeds 15 °C. At –5 °C or lower
the maximum running time of the heater is
50 minutes during preconditioning.
If the fuel level in the tank is too low then the
fuel-driven heater is prevented from starting,
with inadequate heating as a result.
NOTE
Make sure that there is sufficient fuel in the
car's regular fuel tank when driving at temperatures below +15 °C.
WARNING
Do not use the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
indoors in unventilated areas. Exhaust
fumes are given off.
Auto mode or deactivation
The fuel-driven heater's automatic start
sequence can be deactivated if required.
NOTE
05
If the fuel-driven auxiliary heater is deactivated, the diesel engine will start more frequently in order to meet the need for heat
in drive mode PURE or HYBRID, i.e. electrical operation will be restricted.
1. Press OK, see page 225, in order to
access the menu.
2. Scroll with the thumbwheel to Settings
and select with OK.
3. Select one of the alternatives Auto
heater ON or Auto heater OFF using
the thumbwheel and confirm with OK.
231
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Heater
4. Exit the menu with RESET.
NOTE
The menu options are only visible in key
position I - any adjustments must therefore
be made before starting the engine.
Refuelling
05
Warning label on fuel filler flap.
WARNING
Fuel which spills out could be ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven auxiliary heater
before starting to refuel.
Check in the combined instrument panel
that the heater is switched off. The heat
symbol and the message Auto heater ON
are shown when it is operating.
232
Parking on a hill
If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of
the car should point downhill to ensure that
there is a supply of fuel to the fuel-driven
heater.
Starter battery and fuel
If the starter battery has insufficient charge or
if the fuel level is too low, the heater will be
switched off automatically and a message is
shown in the combined instrument panel.
Acknowledge the message by pressing the
indicator stalk OK button once, see
page 225.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
General
Checking and settings can be made immediately after the combined instrument panel is
automatically illuminated in connection with
unlocking. If none of the trip computer's controls are actuated within approx. 30 seconds
after the driver's door has been opened then
the instrument extinguishes, after which
either key position II1 or engine starting is
required in order to operate the trip computer.
•
•
Functions
Functions
Heading in combined instrument panel
Proceed as follows to open and check/adjust
functions:
The trip computer's functions or headings
are each listed in an infinite loop.
Combined instrument panel "Digital"
4. Finish by pressing RESET twice after
completed checking/ adjustment.
NOTE
Acknowledge the message by briefly
pressing the indicator stalk OK button.
Group menus
The trip computer has two different group
menus:
2. Press OK - loop with all functions opens.
3. Browse through the functions with the
thumbwheel and select/confirm with OK.
The different functions of the trip computer
are listed in the following table:
If a warning message appears when the
trip computer is used then the message
must first be acknowledged before the trip
computer can be reactivated.
•
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
2 presses on RESET.
05
Information displays and controls.
OK - Opens the loop with the trip computer's functions + Activates the selected
option.
Thumbwheel - Opens the loop with the
trip computer's headings + Scrolls
through the options.
RESET - Undoes, zeroes or backs out of
a function after making a selection.
1
For information on key positions - see page 85.
233
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Functions
Information
Trip computer reset
Note that this function does not reset both trip meters T1 and T2 - see the table in the
section "Headings" page 235 or the heading "Resetting" page 236 for information on the
process.
Average
Average speed
Messages
For more information, see page 204.
Themes
Combined instrument panel appearance is selected here, see page 75.
Settings*
Select Auto On or Off.
For more information, see page 231.
05
Contrast mode/Colour mode
Adjusting the combined instrument panel's brightness and colour intensity.
Preconditioning
For a description of programming the timer, see page 228.
– Direct start
- Symbol Timer 1 - leads to the menu for selecting
time.
- Symbol Timer 2 - leads to the menu for selecting
time.
A
234
Service status
Shows the number of months and mileage to next service.
Oil levelA
For more information, see page 348.
Certain engines.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
Headings
Three trip computer headings can be displayed simultaneously - one in each "window" (see previous figure).
play in the combined instrument panel. Proceed as follows to determine which:
1. To ensure that no control is in the middle
of a sequence - "Reset" them first with
2 presses on RESET.
2. Turn the thumbwheel - selectable heading combinations are shown in a loop.
One of the heading combinations in the following table can be selected for constant dis-
3. Stop on desired heading combination.
Heading combinations
Information
Battery status
Trip meter T1 + Meter reading
Distance to empty battery
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Average
Trip meter T1 + Meter reading
Average speed
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T1.
Instantaneous
Trip meter T2 + Meter reading
Distance to empty tank
•
Long press on RESET resets trip meter T2.
Instantaneous
Meter reading
kmh<>mph
No trip computer information.
The combined instrument panel's heading
combination for the trip computer can be
changed to another option at any time during
the journey. Proceed as follows:
•
Turn the thumbwheel - stop on the
desired heading.
kmh<>mph - see "Digital speed display" page 236.
05
This option extinguishes all three trip computer displays - it also
marks the beginning/end of the loop.
Supplementary information
Average speed
Average
The average speed is calculated for the driving distance driven since the last reset to
zero.
Average fuel consumption is calculated from
the last resetting.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
a fuel-driven heater* has been used.
Instantaneous
The information for current fuel consumption
is updated continuously - approximately once
per second. When the car is driven at low
speed the consumption is shown per time
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
235
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
unit - at a higher speed it is shown related to
mileage.
can be driven with the energy quantity
remaining in the hybrid battery.
Different units (km/miles) can be selected for
the display - see the heading "Change unit"
page 237.
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption with normally loaded car, with
normal driving and not too many power consumers (stereo, AC, seat heating, etc).
Range - distance to empty tank
The trip computer shows the approximate
distance that can be driven with the fuel
quantity remaining in the tank.
No guaranteed range remains when the heading Distance to empty shows "----".
•
05
In which case, refuel as soon as possible.
The calculation is based on the average fuel
consumption over the last 30 km and the
remaining driveable fuel quantity.
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
the driving style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in
a longer driving distance. For more information on how fuel consumption can be influenced, see page 10.
Distance to empty battery
No guaranteed range remains when the display shows "---- km to empty battery". The
display shows the approximate distance that
236
NOTE
There may be a slight error in the reading if
the driving style has been changed.
An economic driving style generally results in
a longer driving distance. For more information on how energy consumption can be influenced, see page 10.
Mileage for electric operation
In order to achieve the longest possible mileage for electric operation, the driver of an
electric car also has to think about energy
conservation. The more consumers there are
(stereo, electric heating in windows/mirrors/
seats, very cold air from the climate control
system, etc.) that are active - the shorter the
potential mileage.
NOTE
In addition to high current take-off in the
passenger compartment, sudden acceleration and braking, high speed, heavy loads
and uphill gradients also reduce the possible driving distance.
Digital speed display
The speed is shown in the opposite unit
(kmh/mph) in relation to the main instrument.
If it is calibrated in mph then the trip computer shows the corresponding speed in
km/h and vice versa.
Resetting
Trip meter
Turn with the thumbwheel to the heading
combination containing the trip meter to be
reset:
•
Give a long press on RESET - selected
trip meter is zeroed.
Average speed & Average consumption
1. Select function Trip computer
reset and activate with OK.
2. Select one of the following options with
the thumbwheel and activate with OK:
- l/100 km
- km/h
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Trip computer
- Reset both
Function
Operation
A setting can be made in the MY CAR menu
system:
3. Finish with RESET.
Change unit
MY CAR
To change unit (km/miles) for distance and
speed - go to MY CAR Settings
System options Distance and fuel units,
see page 206.
•
Trip statistics*
Information is stored about completed trips
containing average fuel consumption and
average speed, which can be viewed in the
centre console's screen as a bar chart.
Trip statistics:
• Reset for every driving cycle - tick in
the box with ENTER and go back out
from the menu with EXIT.
NOTE
In addition to the trip computer, these
units are also changed at the same time in
Volvo's GPS navigator RTI.
My V60
Start new trip - ENTER deletes all previous statistics, go back out from the menu
with EXIT.
Trip
statistics2.
Fuel and electricity consumption are shown in
separate graphs. Electricity consumption is
"net" consumption, i.e. energy consumed
minus regenerated energy created during
braking.
Each bar symbolises 1 km or 10 km driven
distance, depending on the scale selected the bar at the far right shows the value for the
current kilometre or 10 km.
With the "Reset for every driving cycle"
option ticked all statistics are deleted automatically after driving is finished and the car
has been stationary for 4 hours. Trip statistics
start from zero the next time the engine is
started.
05
If a new driving cycle is started before
4 hours have elapsed then the current period
must first be deleted manually using the
"Start new trip" option.
See also information on Eco guide on page
77.
Using the TUNE control, the scale for the
bars can be changed between 1 km and
10 km - the cursor on the far right changes
position between up and down in relation to
the scale selected.
2
The figure is schematic - layout may vary depending on updated software and market.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
237
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Adapting driving characteristics
Speed related power steering*
Steering force increases with the speed of the
car to give the driver enhanced sensitivity.
The steering is firmer and more immediate on
motorways. Steering is light and requires no
extra effort when parking and at low speed.
The driver can choose between three different levels of steering force for road responsiveness or steering sensitivity. Go to the
menu system MY CAR and locate Settings
Car settings Steering wheel force and
select Low, Medium or High.
05
238
For a description of the menu system, see
page 206. This menu cannot be accessed
while the car is in motion.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
Storage spaces
05
}}
239
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
Storage compartment in door panel
Tunnel console
Glovebox
Storage pocket* on front edge of front
seat cushions
Ticket clip
Glovebox
Storage compartment
Jacket holder
Storage compartment, cup holder
Cup holder* in armrest, rear seat
05
Storage compartment (e.g. for CDs) and
USB*/AUX input under the armrest.
Storage pocket
Includes cup holder for driver and passenger. (If ashtray and cigarette lighter
are specified then there is a cigarette
lighter in the 12 V socket for the front
seat, see page 241, and a detachable
ashtray in the cup holder.)
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile
phones, cameras, remote controls for
accessories, etc. in the glove compartment
or other compartments. Otherwise they
may injure people in the car in the event of
sudden braking or a collision.
Jacket holder
The jacket holder is only designed for light
clothing.
240
Cigarette lighter and ashtray*
The ashtray in the tunnel console is detached
by lifting the tray straight up.
Activate the lighter by pushing in the button.
The button pops out when the lighter is hot.
Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the
heated coils.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
The owner's manual and maps can be kept
here for example. There are also holders for
pens on the inside of the lid. The glovebox
can be locked using the key blade, see pages
50 and 62.
Inlaid mats*
Volvo supplies specially manufactured inlay
mats.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
Vanity mirror
12 V socket
For the socket to supply current, the remote
control key must be in at least key position I,
see page 84.
WARNING
Always leave the plug in the socket when
the socket is not in use.
NOTE
Vanity mirror with lighting.
12 V socket in tunnel console, front seat.
The light illuminates automatically when the
cover is lifted.
Optional equipment and accessories - e.g.
display screens, music players and mobile
phones - which are connected to one of
the passenger compartment's 12V electrical sockets, could be activated by the climate control system, even when the
remote control key has been removed or
when the car is locked, for example, when
the parking heater is activated at a preset
time.
05
For this reason remove the plugs from the
electrical sockets for optional equipment
or accessories when not in use because
the battery could be drained in the event of
such an occurrence!
12 V socket in tunnel console, rear seat.
The electrical socket can be used for various
accessories designed for 12 V, e.g. TV
screens, music players and mobile phones.
241
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
Comfort inside the passenger compartment
IMPORTANT
Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket
is used at a time. If both sockets in the
tunnel console are used simultaneously,
7.5 A (90 W) per socket is applicable.
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sockets, no other current consumer must be
connected to the other one.
NOTE
05
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), see
page 338.
Electrical socket in cargo area*
For more information, see page 313.
242
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
05 Comfort and driving pleasure
05
243
General information on infotainment.....................................................
Radio.....................................................................................................
Media player.........................................................................................
External audio source via AUX/USB* input...........................................
246
257
264
268
Media Bluetooth®* ................................................................................ 271
Bluetooth® handsfree*..........................................................................
Voice recognition* mobile phone..........................................................
TV*.........................................................................................................
Remote control* ...................................................................................
244
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
274
283
287
291
INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
General
The infotainment system consists of radio,
media player, TV* and the facility to communicate with mobile phone*. Information is presented on a 5 or 7-inch* screen in the upper
section of the centre console. Functions can
be controlled via buttons in the steering
wheel, in the centre console under the screen
or via a remote control*. A mobile phone can
also be controlled with voice recognition in
certain cases.
06
If the Infotainment System is active when the
engine is switched off then it is automatically
activated the next time the key is inserted into
key position I or higher, and it continues with
the same source (e.g. radio) as before the
engine was switched off (the driver's door
must be closed on cars with Keyless systems*).
The infotainment system can be used for 15
minutes at a time without the remote control
key being in the ignition switch by pressing
the On/Off button.
NOTE
Remove the remote control key from the
ignition switch if the infotainment system is
used when the engine is switched off. This
is to avoid discharging the battery unnecessarily.
Dolby, Pro Logic
The Audyssey MultEQ system has been used
in the development and tuning of the sound
to ensure a world-class sound experience.
Overview
Made under license from Dolby Laboratories.
Dolby, Pro Logic and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Audyssey MultEQ
Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
When the car is being started the infotainment system is switched off temporarily and
continues when the engine has started.
246
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
AUX (only applies to Performance) - and
USB (does not apply to Performance) -
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
inputs for external audio sources (e.g.
iPod®).
Operating the system
applies to DVD discs). A long press fastwinds disc tracks or searches for the next
available radio station.
Steering wheel keypad (with*/without
thumbwheel).
SOUND - press for access to audio settings (bass, treble, etc.). For more information, see page 251.
Screen. The screen is available in two
sizes: 5 and 7-inch. The manual shows a
7-inch screen.
VOL - raise or lower the volume.
Centre console control panel.
ON/OFF/MUTE - short press starts
the system and long press (until the screen is
off) switches off. Note that the whole of the
Sensus system (including navigation * and
phone functions*) starts/switches off at the
same time. Briefly press to mute the sound
(MUTE) or restore the sound if it had been
switched off.
Disc insert and eject slot.
Main sources - press to select the main
source (e.g. RADIO, MEDIA). Last active
source is shown (e.g. FM1). If you are in
RADIO or MEDIA and press the main source
button, a source view is shown. If you are in
TEL* or NAV* and press the main source button then a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options.
Scroll/fast wind/search - short press
scrolls between disc tracks, preset radio stations (does not apply to DAB) or chapter (only
06
Disc eject.
OK/MENU - press the thumbwheel in the
steering wheel or the button in the centre
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
247
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
06
console to accept selections in menus. If you
are in the normal view and press OK/MENU a
menu is shown for the selected source (e.g.
RADIO or MEDIA). Arrow to the right of the
screen is shown when there are underlying
menus.
used function in FM etc. For more information, see page 250.
TUNE - turn the thumbwheel in the steering wheel or the knob in the centre console to
scroll between disc tracks/folders, radio and
TV* stations, phone contacts* or navigate
between the options in the screen.
Voice recognition (cars with navigation) press to activate voice recognition (for Bluetooth®-connected mobile phone and navigation system*).
MUTE (cars without navigation) - press to
deactivate the radio/media audio or restore
the audio if it has been switched off.
EXIT - short press leads upwards in the
menu system, interrupts current function,
interrupts/rejects phone calls or erases
entered characters. Long press leads to normal view, or if you are in normal view to the
highest menu level (main source view), from
where you can reach the same main source
buttons located in the centre console (7).
INFO - If more information than can be
shown in the screen is available, press the
INFO button to see the remaining information.
Preset buttons, input of numbers and letters.
FAV – shortcut to a favourite setting. The
button can be programmed for a commonly
248
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Menus
06
The example shows navigation to different functions when a disc is played back. (1) Main source button, (2) Normal view, (3) Shortcut/Source menu, (4) Quick
menu, (5) Source menu.
}}
249
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Select main source by pressing a main
source button (1) (RADIO, MEDIA, TEL). To
navigate in the source's menus, use the controls for TUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT or the main
source button (1).
For Menu overview, see page 252.
NOTE
Quick menu - fast mode when TUNE is
turned, e.g. for changing disc tracks, radio
station, etc.
Source view - for menu navigation
(accessed by pressing OK/MENU).
FAV - store a preset
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad with a thumbwheel*, these can be
used instead of the controls in the centre
console (TUNE, OK/MENU, EXIT).
The FAV button can be used to store functions that are used frequently so that the
function can be started simply by pressing
FAV. You can select a favourite (e.g.
Equalizer) for each function as follows:
In RADIO mode:
•
•
FM1/FM2
DAB1*/DAB2*
In MEDIA mode:
250
Bluetooth*
AUX
TV*
It is also possible to select and store a
favourite for MY CAR, CAM* and NAV*.
Favourites can also be selected and stored
under MY CAR. For more information on the
menu system MY CAR, see page 206.
2. Select a wavelength or source (FM1,
Disc, etc.).
Main source button - press to change
the main source or show the Shortcut/Source
menu in the active source.
Shortcut/Source menu - shows commonly used menu options in the main
sources e.g. TEL and MEDIA (accessed by
pressing the active source's main source button (1)).
USB*
iPod*
1. Select a main source (e.g. RADIO,
MEDIA).
Appearance depends on source, equipment
in the car, settings, etc.
Normal view - normal mode for the
source.
DISC
To store a function in the FAV button:
Menus and views in the screen
06
•
•
•
•
•
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
3. Press and hold the FAV button until the
"favourites menu" is shown.
4. Turn TUNE to select an option from the
list and press OK/MENU to save.
> When the main source (e.g. RADIO,
MEDIA) is active the stored function is
available via a short press on FAV.
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
General audio settings
Press SOUND to access the audio settings
menu (Bass, Treble, etc.). Scroll forward with
SOUND or OK/MENU to your selection (e.g.
Treble).
• Subwoofer*1 - Bass speaker level.
• DPL II centre level/3 channel centre
level1 - Volume for centre speaker.
• DPL II surround level1, 2 – Level for surround.
Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and save
the setting with OK/MENU.
Advanced audio settings
Continue pressing SOUND or OK/MENU to
access other options:
Equalizer3
• Surround1 - Can be set to the On/Off
position. When On is selected, the system selects the setting for optimal sound
reproduction. Normally DPLII and
then appear in the screen. If the recording
is made with Dolby Digital technology
then playback will take place with this
setting,
then appears in the
screen. When Off is selected, 3-channel
stereo is available.
•
• Treble - Treble level.
• Fader – Balance between the front and
Bass - Bass level.
rear speakers.
• Balance – Balance between the left and
right-hand speakers.
1
2
3
Sound stage1
The sound experience can be optimised for
the driver's seat, both front seats or the rear
seat. If there are passengers in both the front
and rear seats then the option recommended
is; both front seats. The options can be
selected under Audio settings Sound
stage.
The volume level can be adjusted separately
for different wavelengths.
For general information on menu navigation,
see page 249 and menu overview, see
page 252.
1. Press OK/MENU to access Audio
settings and select Equalizer.
Audio volume and automatic volume
control
2. Select wavelength by turning TUNE and
confirm with OK/MENU.
The audio system compensates for disrupting
noises in the passenger compartment by
increasing the volume in relation to the speed
of the car. The compensation level can be set
to low, medium, high or off. Select the level
under Audio settings Volume
compensation.
3. Adjust the audio settings by turning
TUNE and confirm with OK/MENU. Continue in the same way with other wavelengths you want to change.
4. When you have finished with audio settings, press EXIT to confirm and return to
normal view.
For general information on menu navigation,
see page 249 and menu overview, see
page 252.
06
For general information on menu navigation,
see page 249 and menu overview, see
page 252.
Only Premium Sound Multimedia.
Only when Surround is activated.
Not Performance.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
251
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
External audio source audio volume
If an external audio source (e.g. an MP3
player or iPod®) is connected to the AUX
input then the audio source that is connected
can have a different volume than the audio
system's internal volume (e.g. radio). Correct
this by adjusting the volume of the input:
1. Press the MEDIA button and turn TUNE
to AUX and wait a few seconds or press
OK/MENU.
2. Press OK/MENU and then turn TUNE to
AUX input volume. Confirm with OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to adjust the volume for the
AUX input.
NOTE
06
If the external audio source's volume is too
high or too low, the quality of the sound
may deteriorate. The audio quality may
also be impaired if the player is charged
while the infotainment system is in AUX
mode. In which case, avoid charging the
player via the 12 V socket.
Optimum sound reproduction
The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital
signal processing.
252
This calibration takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment
acoustics, listener position etc. for each combination of car model and audio system.
There is a also a dynamic calibration that
takes into account the position of the volume
control, radio reception and vehicle speed.
The controls explained in these operating
instructions, e.g. Bass, Treble and
Equalizer, are only intended for the user to
be able to adapt the sound reproduction
according to personal taste.
News settings
Advanced settings
p.261
REG
Alternative frequency
Menus RADIO
Set TP favourite
TP
p.259
Show radio text
p.260
Show presets
p.258
See footnote
Scan
PTY settings
Reset all FM settings
Audio settings
Main menu FM1/FM2
A
p.261
See footnote
p.260
p.259
EON
Menu overview
The main sources RADIO, MEDIA and TEL
contain the following menus. For information
about menu navigation, see page 249.
p.260
p.259
p.260
p.261
p.251
B
Sound stage
p.251
See footnote C
Equalizer
See footnote D
p.251
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Volume compensation
Reset all audio settings
A
B
C
D
p.251
DAB band
p.251
Sub channels
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
The menu options for audio settings are the same for all
audio sources.
Only applies to Premium Sound Multimedia.
Does not apply to Performance.
Random
p.266
Repeat folder
p.266
See footnote B
Change subtitles
p.265
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
For submenus, see "Main menu FM".
Change audio track
p.265
Scan
p.266
p.261
PTY filtering
p.262
B
p.262
Menus MEDIA
p.251
Main menu CD Audio (Disc menu)
Audio settings
Show radio text
p.262
Random
p.266
Show presets
p.262
Scan
p.266
See footnote A
See footnote
A
B
p.261
Advanced settings
p.263
DAB linking
Pause
p.263
Audio settings
Scan
p.263
Audio settings
See footnote A
A
p.265
p.265
Ensemble learn
Turn off PTY filtering
Play
p.263
Stop
Reset all DAB settings
A
Main menu CD/DVDA Data (Disc menu)
p.263
Show PTY text
Main menu DAB1*/DAB2*
p.263
For submenus, see "Main menu FM".
p.251
p.251
B
06
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
For submenus, see "Main menu FM".
Main menu DVDA Video (Disc menu)
DVD disc menu
p.266
Play/Pause/Continue
p.266
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
253
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Stop
p.266
Main menu USBA
Subtitles
p.266
Play
p.269
Change device
p.272
Remove Bluetooth device
p.272
Scan
p.273
Pause
Audio tracks
Advanced settings
p.266
DivX® VOD code
Audio settings
p.266
Bluetooth software
version in car
p.273
Random
Repeat folder
p.266
Audio settings
p.251
p.267
p.267
p.251
See footnote B
B
p.269
p.267
Angle
A
Stop
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
For submenus, see "Main menu FM".
Select USB device
p.270
Change subtitles
p.269
Change audio track
p.269
Scan
p.266
Audio settings
p.251
06
Main menu iPodA
Random
Scan
p.266
Audio settings
See footnote
A
B
254
See footnote B
p.266
B
p.251
A
B
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Does not apply to Performance.
For submenus, see "Main menu FM".
Main menu AUX
AUX input volume
p.251
Audio settings
p.251
See footnote
A
For submenus, see "Main menu FM".
Main menu TV*
Main menu Media BluetoothA
Random
A
B
A
Does not apply to Performance.
For submenus, see "Main menu FM".
Does not apply to Performance.
For submenus, see "Main menu FM".
See footnote B
p.273
Select country
p.288
Reorganise presets
p.288
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Autostore
p.289
Scan
p.289
Audio settings
See footnote
A
p.251
All calls
All calls
p.277
p.277
For submenus, see "Main menu FM".
Missed calls
Press OK/MENU when a video file is being
played back or TV* is being shown in order
to access the pop-up menu.
Image settings
p.267
Source menu
p.249
See footnote
B
Dialled calls
Call duration
p.266
Search
See footnote C
DVD disc TOP
Answered calls
Phone book
DVD disc menu
C
Memory status
Main menu Bluetooth® handsfreeA
(Phone menu)
A
Pop-up menuA*video and TV*
A
B
Menus TEL
menuC
p.266
Only applies when playing back videos or displaying TV.
What is shown in the pop-up menu for the source menu
depends on what is being played back or displayed, it can
be e.g. CD/DVD data menu or USB menu.
Only applies to DVD video discs.
New contact
Speed dials
Receive vCard
p.277
p.277
p.277
p.277
p.278
p.279
p.280
Clear phone book
p.281
p.282
Change phone
p.276
Remove Bluetooth device
p.277
Phone settings
Discoverable
Sounds and volume
Download phone book
Bluetooth software version in car
p.275
p.277
p.278
p.282
06
Call options
Auto answer
p.277
p.281
p.281
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
255
06 Infotainment system
General information on infotainment
Voicemail number
Disconnect phone
A
06
256
Does not apply to Performance.
p.277
p.276
06 Infotainment system
Radio
General
Automatic tuning
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 247. For a description of
the remote control, see page 291.
2. Hold in
/
in the centre console
(or in the steering wheel keypad*). The
radio searches for the next/previous available station.
Station list1
Menus
The menus inRADIO are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 249 and menu overview, see
page 252.
The radio automatically compiles a list of the
strongest FM stations whose signals it is currently receiving. This enables you to find a
station when you drive into an area where you
do not know the radio stations and their frequencies.
Station presets (0-9)
Radio FM
To go to the list and select a station:
Select the desired frequency/station or
navigate in the radio menu by turning
TUNE.
Tuning
1. Select the desired wavelength (FM1 or
FM2).
Centre console, controls for radio functions.
RADIO button for selecting the wavelength (FM1, FM2, DAB1*, DAB2*).
Confirm your selection or go to the radio
menu by pressing OK/MENU.
Hold in the button for next/previous available station. Short press for preset.
1
1. Press RADIO, turn TUNE until the
desired wavelength (e.g. FM1) is shown,
press OK/MENU.
NOTE
The reception is dependent both on how
good the signal strength and signal quality
are. The transmission may be disturbed by
various factors such as tall buildings or the
transmitter being far away. Coverage level
can also vary depending on where in the
country you are located.
06
2. Turn TUNE one step in either direction.
This displays the list of all stations in the
area. The currently tuned station is indicated with enlarged text in the list.
3. Turn TUNE again in either direction to
select a station from the list.
4. Confirm your selection with OK/MENU.
Does not apply to Performance.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
257
06 Infotainment system
Radio
NOTE
06
•
The list only shows the frequencies of
stations that are currently being
received, not a complete list of all
radio frequencies on the selected
wavelength.
•
If the signal from the currently received
station is weak, this may prevent the
radio from updating the station list. If
this occurs, press the
button
(while the station list is shown in the
display screen) in order to change to
manual tuning and set a frequency. If
the station list is no longer shown, turn
TUNE one step in either direction to
show the list again, and press
to
switch.
The list disappears from the screen after a
few seconds.
If the station list is no longer shown, turn
TUNE one step in either direction and press
the
button in the centre console to
change to manual tuning (or to return from
manual tuning to the function for "Station
list").
Manual tuning
The preset from the factory is that the radio
shows the station list of the strongest stations
in the area when you turn TUNE (see the section "Station list", page 257). When the station list is shown, press the
button in
the centre console to change to manual tuning. This allows you to select a frequency
from the list of all available radio frequencies
in the selected wavelength. In other words, if
turn TUNE one step in a manual search the
frequency is changed from e.g. 93.3 to
93.4 MHz, etc.
To manually select a station:
1. Press the RADIO button, turn TUNE until
the desired wavelength (e.g. FM1) is
shown, press OK/MENU.
NOTE
The preset from the factory is that the
radio automatically searches for the stations in the area where you are driving (see
previous section "Station list" above).
But if you have changed over to manual
tuning (by pressing the
button in the
centre console when the station list was
shown), then the radio remains set in the
function for manual tuning the next time
you switch on the radio. To change back
to the function for "Station list", turn TUNE
one step (to show the complete list of sta.
tions) and press the button
Note that if you press
when the station list is not shown then INFO is activated. For more information on this function, see page 247.
2. Turn TUNE to select a frequency.
Preset
10 presets can be stored per wavelength (e.g.
FM1).
The stored presets are selected using the
preset buttons.
1. Tune into a station (see "Tuning", page
257).
2. Hold in one of the preset buttons for a
few seconds, the sound disappears dur-
258
06 Infotainment system
Radio
ing this time and returns when the station
is stored. The preset button can now be
used.
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown2
in the screen. The function is activated/deactivated in FM mode under FM menu Show
presets.
RDS functions
RDS (Radio Data System) links FM transmitters into a network. An FM transmitter in such
a network sends information that gives an
RDS radio the following functions:
•
Automatically switches to a stronger
transmitter if reception in the area is poor.
•
Searches for programme type, such as
traffic information or news.
•
Receives text information on current radio
programme.
NOTE
Some radio stations do not use RDS or
only some if its functionality.
the CD player is in use, it is paused. The
interrupting transmission is played at a preset
volume, see page 261. The radio returns to
the previous audio source and volume when
the set programme type is no longer broadcast.
The programme functions alarm (ALARM!),
traffic information (TP), news (NEWS), and
programme types (PTY) interrupt one another
in order of priority, where alarm has the highest priority and programme types has the
lowest. For additional settings of programming interruptions (EON Distant and EON
Local), see the section "Enhanced Other Networks – EON" below. Press EXIT to return to
the interrupted audio source, press the OK/
MENU to clear the message.
Alarm
This function is used to warn of serious accidents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be
temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The
message ALARM! appears in the screen
when an alarm message is transmitted.
Traffic information – TP
If a required programme type is located the
radio can switch stations interrupting the
audio source currently in use. For example, if
2
3
This function allows traffic information sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The TP symbol indicates that the
function is activated. If the preset station can
send traffic information then this is shown by
TP glowing brightly in the screen, otherwise
TP will be grey.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
FM menu TP.
Enhanced Other Networks – EON
This function is useful in urban areas with
many regional radio stations. It allows the distance between the car and the radio station
transmitter to determine when programme
functions should interrupt the current audio
source.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode by
selecting one of the options under FM
menu Advanced settings EON:
• Local – interrupts only if the radio station
transmitter is close.
06
• Distant3 – interrupts if the station trans-
mitter is far away, even if there is a lot of
static.
TP from selected station/all stations
The radio can only interrupt for traffic information from the selected station or all stations within the RDS network.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
Factory settings.
259
06 Infotainment system
Radio
–
Go in FM mode to FM menu
Advanced settings Set TP favourite
to change.
News
This function allows news broadcasts sent
within a set station's RDS network to break
through. The NEWS symbol indicates that the
function is active.
2. Then the PTY function must be activated
under FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Receive traffic
bulletins from other networks.
–
An indicator is shown in the screen when PTY
is activated.
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
FM menu News settings News.
News from selected station/all stations
The radio can only interrupt for news from the
selected station or all stations in the RDS network.
–
06
Go in FM mode to FM menu News
settings Set news favourite to
change.
Programme types – PTY
The PTY function can be used to select one
or more programme types, such as pop
music and serious classic. The PTY symbol
indicates that the function is active. This function allows programme types broadcast
within a set station's RDS network to break
through.
4
260
1. Activate in FM mode by first selecting the
programme types under FM menu
Advanced settings PTY settings
Select PTY.
Only cars with 7-inch screen
Deactivation of the PTY function is performed
in FM mode under FM menu Advanced
settings PTY settings Receive traffic
bulletins from other networks. Selected
programme types (PTY) are not reset.
Resetting and removing PTY are performed
under FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Select PTY Clear all.
PTY search
This function searches the entire wavelength
for the selected programme type.
1. In FM mode select one or more PTY
under FM menu Advanced settings
PTY settings Select PTY.
2. Go to FM menu
PTY settings
Advanced settings
Seek PTY.
To finish searching, press EXIT.
–
To continue searching for another broadcast of the selected programme types,
or
.
press on
Display of programme type
The programme type of the current station
can be shown in the screen.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
FM menu Advanced settings PTY
settings Show PTY text.
Radio text4
Some RDSstations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This information can be shown in the screen.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
FM menu Show radio text.
Automatic frequency update – AF
The function selects the strongest transmitter
for the set station. In order to find a strong
transmitter the function may, in exceptional
cases, need to search the entire FM wavelength.
06 Infotainment system
Radio
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
FM menu Advanced settings
Alternative frequency.
Regional radio programmes – REG
This function causes the radio to continue
with a regional transmitter even if its signal
strength is low. The symbol REG shows that
the function is active.
–
Activate/deactivate in FM mode under
FM menu Advanced settings REG.
Resetting RDS functions
All radio settings can be reset to the original
factory settings.
–
The reset is carried out in FM mode under
FM menu Advanced settings
Reset all FM settings.
Volume control, programme types
The interrupting programme types, e.g.
NEWS or TP, are heard at the volume
selected for each respective programme
type. If the volume level is adjusted during the
programme interruption, the new level is
saved until the next programme interruption.
Scan wavelength
found, it is played for approx. 10 seconds
before scanning is resumed. When a station
is playing back it can be saved as a preset in
the usual way, see the section Preset, page
258.
–
To start scanning go in FM mode to FM
menu Scan.
NOTE
Service - Channel, radio channel (only
audio services are supported by the system).
•
Ensemble - A collection of radio channels on the same frequency.
Storing channel groups (Ensemble
learn)
Programming of channel groups creates an
updated list of all available channel groups.
The list is not updated automatically.
Radio system - DAB*
General
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) is a digital
broadcasting system for radio. This system
supports DAB, DAB+ and DMB.
Coverage for DAB is not available in all
locations. If there is no coverage then the
message No reception is shown in the
display screen.
•
When the vehicle is moved to a new broadcasting area, programming of existing channel groups in the area may be necessary.
Scanning stops if a station is saved.
NOTE
Service and Ensemble
Programming is carried out in the menu system in DAB mode under DAB menu
Ensemble learn. Programming can also take
place as follows:
06
1. Turn TUNE one step in either direction.
> Ensemble learn is shown in the list of
available channel groups.
2. Press OK/MENU.
> New programming is started.
Programming can be cancelled with EXIT.
The function automatically searches for available channels and takes into account any
programme type filtering. When a station is
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
261
06 Infotainment system
Radio
Navigation in channel group list
(Ensemble)
To navigate in and access the channel group
list turn TUNE. The name of the Ensemble is
shown in the upper part of the screen. When
switching to the new Ensemble the name
changes to the new one.
•
Service - Shows channels irrespective of
the channel group to which they are allocated. The list can also be filtered using
the selection of programme type (PTY
filtering), see below.
Scanning
06
The function automatically searches the current wavelength for strong stations. When a
station is found, it is played for approx. 10
seconds before scanning is resumed. When a
station is playing back it is saved as a preset
in the usual way. For more information on
presets, see "Preset" below.
–
Go in DAB mode to DAB menu
to start scanning.
NOTE
Scanning stops if a station is saved.
5
262
Scan
Scanning can also be selected in DAB-PTY
mode. In which case only channels of the
pre-selected programme type are played.
Programme type (PTY)
Various types of radio programmes can be
selected using the programme type function.
There are a number of different programme
types which also include different programme
categories. After selecting a programme type,
navigation only takes place within the channels that are broadcasting that type.
Programme type is selected in DAB mode
under DAB menu PTY filtering. Exit this
mode as follows:
–
Press EXIT.
> An indicator is shown in the screen
when PTY is activated.
In certain cases DAB radio will exit PTY mode
when DAB to DAB linking (see below) is
implemented.
Preset
10 station presets can be stored per wavelength. DAB has 2 memories for presets:
DAB1 and DAB2. Storage of presets is made
by means of a long press on the desired preset button, for more information see
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
page 258. The stored presets are selected
using the preset buttons.
A preset contains one channel but no subchannels. If a subchannel is being played and
a preset is saved then only the main channel
is registered. This is because subchannels
are temporary. At the next attempt to retrieve
the preset, the channel which contained the
subchannel will be played. The preset is not
dependent on the channel list.
A list of pre-selected channels can be shown5
in the screen. The function is activated/deactivated in DAB mode under DAB menu
Show presets.
NOTE
The audio system's DAB system does not
support all functions available in the DAB
standard.
Radio text
Some radio stations transmit information on
programme content, artists, etc. This information is shown in the screen.
The function is deactivated/activated in DAB
mode under DAB menu Show radio text.
06 Infotainment system
Radio
NOTE
Only one of the functions "Show radio
text" and "Show presets" can be activated at a time. If one of them is activated
when the other is already activated, then
the previously activated function is deactivated automatically. Both functions can be
deactivated.
Advanced settings
DAB to DAB link
DAB to DAB linking means that the DAB radio
can go from one channel with poor or no
reception to the same channel in another
channel group with better reception. There
may be a certain delay when changing channel group. There may be a period of silence
between the current channel no longer being
available to the new channel becoming available.
The function can be activated/deactivated in
DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings DAB linking.
Wavelength
DAB can be transmitted on two6 wavelengths:
6
• Band III - covers most areas.
• LBand - available only in a few areas.
By selecting for example Band III on its own,
channel programming takes place more
quickly than if both Band III and LBand have
been selected. It is not certain that all channel
groups will be found. Wavelength selection
does not affect the stored memories.
Wavelengths can be deactivated/activated in
DAB mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings DAB band.
Subchannel
Secondary components are usually named
subchannels. These are temporary and can
contain e.g. translations of the main programme into other languages.
If one or more subchannels are broadcast
then the
symbol is shown to the left of the
channel name in the screen. A subchannel is
indicated by the - symbol appearing to the
left of the channel name in the screen.
Press
Display of subchannels can be deactivated/
activated in DAB mode under DAB menu
Advanced settings Sub channels
Programme type text
Some radio stations broadcast information
about programme type and programme category, for information on Programme type
(PTY), see page 262. This information is
shown in the screen.
The function is activated/deactivated in DAB
mode under DAB menu Advanced
settings Show PTY text.
Resetting the DAB settings
All DAB settings can be reset to the original
factory settings.
–
The reset is carried out in DAB mode
under DAB menu Advanced settings
Reset all DAB settings.
06
to access the subchannels.
Subchannels can only be accessed on the
selected main channel and not on any other
channel without selecting it.
Not all areas/countries use both wavelengths.
263
06 Infotainment system
Media player
General
media source and press the MEDIA button then a shortcut menu is shown for
commonly used menu options.
The media player can playback audio and
video from CD/DVD* discs and externally
connected audio sources via the AUX/USB*
input or wirelessly stream audio files from
external devices using Bluetooth®. Certain
media players can show TV* and have the
option to communicate with a mobile phone
(see page 274)* via Bluetooth®.
CD/DVD1
Disc eject
Input of numbers and letters.
Select the disc tracks/folders, or navigate
through menu options by turning TUNE.
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
for the selected media source by pressing
OK/MENU.
functions
Fast forward/reverse and change disc
track or chapter2.
The media player supports and can play the
following main types of discs and files:
•
•
06
•
•
Centre console control panel.
Disc insert and eject slot
Pre-recorded CD discs (CD Audio).
Burned CD discs with audio and/or video
files1.
Pre-recorded DVD video discs1.
Burned DVD discs1 with audio and/or
video files.
For more information about the supported
formats, see page 267.
MEDIA button, activates last active
media source. If you are already in a
1
2
264
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
Only applies to DVD discs.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 247. For a description of
the remote control, see page 291.
Menus
The menus in MEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 249 and menu overview, see
page 252.
Starting playback of a disc
Press the MEDIA button, turn TUNE until
Disc is shown, press OK/MENU. If there is a
disc in the media player then the disc starts
playing back automatically, otherwise Insert
disc is shown in the TV screen. Then insert a
disc, with text side up. The disc starts to play
back automatically.
If a disc with audio/video files is inserted into
the player then the disc's folder structure
needs to be loaded. Depending on the quality
of the disc and the quantity of information
06 Infotainment system
Media player
there may be a certain delay before playback
starts.
Disc eject
A disc remains in the ejected position for
about 12 seconds, after which it is inserted
back into the player for safety reasons.
Pause
When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE
is pressed, the media player is paused. When
the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed
again, the media player starts. It is also possible to pause via the menu system3, press
OK/MENU, select Play/Pause.
Playback and navigation
CD audio discs
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist and
navigate in the list. Use OK/MENU to confirm
the selection of the disc track and start playback. Press EXIT to cancel and exit the playlist. A long press on EXIT leads to the playlist's root level.
Disc tracks can also be changed by pressing
/
on the centre console or the
on
steering wheel keypad*.
3
1
4
Burned discs audio/video files1
Turn TUNE to access the disc's playlist/folder
structure and navigate in the list/structure.
Use OK/MENU to confirm either selection of
subfolder or start of playback of the selected
audio/video file. Press EXIT to either stop and
exit the playlist or go up (back) in the folder
structure. A long press on EXIT leads to the
playlist's root level.
Audio/video files can also be changed by
/
on the centre console or
pressing
the steering wheel keypad*.
Audio files have the symbol
, video files1
have the symbol
and folders have the
symbol
.
When playback of a file is complete the playback of the other files (of the same type) in
that particular folder continues. Change4 of
folder takes place automatically when all the
files in the current folder have been played
back. The system automatically detects and
changes setting when a disc containing only
audio files or only video files is loaded into
the media player and then plays back these
files. However, the system does not change
setting if a disc containing a mixture of audio
and video files is loaded into the media
player, but instead the player continues to
play back the previous file type.
NOTE
A video film is only shown when the car is
stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is
shown and No visual media available
while driving appears on the display
screen, although the audio is heard during
this time. The picture is shown again as
soon as the car's speed falls below about
6 km/h.
NOTE
Some audio files that are copy-protected
by record companies or privately copied
audio files cannot be loaded by the player.
06
DVD video discs1
For playback of DVD video discs, see
page 266.
Fast forward/reverse
/
to fast forward/
Hold in the buttons
rewind. Audio files are fast forwarded/
rewound at one speed, while video files are
Does not apply to CD Audio
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
265
06 Infotainment system
Media player
fast forwarded/rewound at several speeds.
/
to
Repeatedly press the buttons
increase the fast forward/rewind speed for
video files. Release the button to return to
viewing at normal speed.
Repeat folder6
This function plays the first ten seconds of
each disc track/audio file. To scan:
This function makes it possible to play files in
a folder over and over again. When the last
file has been played out, playback of the first
file starts again.
1. Press OK/MENU
1. Press OK/MENU
2. Turn TUNE to Scan
> The first 10 seconds of each disc track
or audio file are played.
2. Turn TUNE to Repeat folder
Scan5
3. Cancel the scan with EXIT, the disc track
or audio file being played back will continue playing.
Random5
06
Disc tracks/audio files can be changed by
pressing
/
on the centre console or
the steering wheel keypad*.
This function plays the tracks in random
order. To listen to the tracks in random order:
1. Press OK/MENU
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the function.
NOTE
A video film is only shown when the car is
stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed of over about 8 km/h no picture is
shown and No visual media available
while driving appears on the display
screen, although the audio is heard during
this time. The picture is shown again as
soon as the car's speed falls below about
6 km/h.
Navigation in the DVD video disc's
menu
Playback of DVD video discs1
Playback
When playing back a DVD video disc a disc
menu may appear on the display screen. The
disc menu gives access to additional functions and settings, such as selecting subtitles,
language and scene selection.
2. Turn TUNE to Random
3. Press OK/MENU to activate/deactivate
the function.
5
6
1
266
Does not apply to DVD video discs.
Only applies to audio/video files on burned discs or USB.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Navigation in the DVD video disc's menu is
performed using the number keys in the centre console as illustrated above.
06 Infotainment system
Media player
DivX® Video On Demand
Compatible file formats
Turn TUNE to access the list of chapters and
navigate through them (if the film is being
played back then it is paused). Press OK/
MENU to select the chapter, this also leads
back to the original position (if the film was
being played back then it is restarted). Press
EXIT to access the title list.
The media player can be registered in order
to play DivX VOD type files from burned discs
or USB. The code for registration can be
found in the menu system MY CAR Settings
Information DivX® VOD code. For
general information on menus, see under
MY CAR, see page 206.
The media player can play back a variety of
file types and is compatible with the formats
in the following table.
Titles are selected in the title list by turning
TUNE and the selection is confirmed with
OK/MENU, this also leads back to the chapter list. Press OK/MENU to activate the
selection and return to the start position. Use
EXIT to cancel the selection and this leads
back to the original position (without any
selection being made).
For more information visit www.divx.com/
vod.
Changing chapter or title
The chapter can also be changed by pressing
/
on the centre console or the
on
steering wheel keypad*.
Advanced settings7
Angle
If the DVD video disc supports it, the function
can be used to choose from which camera
position a particular scene should be shown.
Go in disc mode to Disc menu Advanced
settings Angle.
7
NOTE
Dual format, double-sided discs (DVD
Plus, CD-DVD format) are thicker than regular CD discs and therefore playback cannot be guaranteed and malfunction may
arise.
Picture settings7
If a CD contains a mixture of MP3 and
CDDA tracks, all MP3s will be ignored.
You can adjust the settings (when the car is
stationary) for brightness and contrast.
1. Press OK/MENU and select Image
settings, confirm with OK/MENU.
Audio formatA
Audio
2. Turn TUNE to the adjustment option and
confirm with OK/MENU.
Video formatC
3. Adjust the setting by turning TUNE and
confirm with OK/MENU.
To return to the settings list, press the OK/
MENU or EXIT.
The picture settings can be reset to factory
settings with the Reset option.
formatB
A
B
C
CD audio, mp3, wma
CD audio, mp3, wma, aac,
m4a
CD video, DVD video,
divx, avi, asf
06
Applies to Performance.
Does not apply to Performance.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
267
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
General
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 247. For a description of
the remote control, see page 291.
An iPod® or MP3 player with rechargeable
batteries is recharged (when the ignition is on
or the engine is running) if the device is plugged into the USB connection.
Connection points for external audio sources.
06
An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or
MP3 player, can be connected to the audio
system via any of the connections in the centre console. An audio source connected to
the USB input can then be handled1 with the
car's audio controls. A device connected via
the AUX input cannot be controlled via the
car.
To connect the audio source:
1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE to the desired
audio source USB, iPod or AUX, press
OK/MENU.
> If USB is selected then Connect USB
is shown in the TV screen.
2. Connect your audio source to one of the
connections in the centre console's storage compartment (see previous illustration).
The text Reading USB is shown in the TV
screen when the system is loading the storage media's file structure. Depending on the
1
268
Only applies to the media source connected via the USB connection.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
file structure and number of files there may be
some delay before loading is finished.
NOTE
The system supports most iPod® models
produced in 2005 or later.
NOTE
To prevent damage to the USB connection, this is shut off if the USB connection
is short-circuited or if a connected USB
unit is taking too much power (this may
happen if the unit connected does not
meet the USB standard). The USB connection is reactivated automatically the
next time the ignition is turned on, unless
the fault persists.
Menus
The menus in MEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 249 and menu overview, see
page 252.
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
Playback and navigation2
Turn TUNE to access the playlist/folder structure and navigate in the list/structure. Use
OK/MENU to either confirm selection of subfolder or start of playback of the selected
audio/video file. Press EXIT to either stop and
exit the playlist or go up (back) in the folder
structure. A long press on EXIT leads to the
playlist's root level.
Audio/video files can also be changed by
/
on the centre console or
pressing
the steering wheel keypad*.
Audio files have the symbol
, video files3
have the symbol
and folders have the
symbol
.
When playback of a file is complete the playback of the other files (of the same type) in
that particular folder continues. Change4 of
folder takes place automatically when all the
files in the current folder have been played
back. The system automatically detects and
changes setting when a device containing
only audio files or only video files is connected to the USB port and then it plays back
2
3
4
5
6
these files. However, the system does not
change setting if a device containing a mixture of audio and video files is connected to
the USB port, but instead the player continues to play back the previous file type.
Fast forward/reverse2
See page 265.
Scan2
See page 266.
Repeat folder5
See page 266.
Pause
When the volume is reduced entirely or MUTE
is pressed, the media player is paused. When
the volume is increased or MUTE is pressed
again, the media player starts. It is also possible to pause via the menu system6, press
OK/MENU, select Play/Pause.
Audio sources
Random2
See page 266.
USB memory
Search function2
The keypad on the control panel in the centre
console can be used to find a filename in the
current folder.
The search function is accessed either by
turning TUNE (to access the folder structure)
or by pressing one of the letter keys. As a letter or character in a search string is entered
you get closer to your search target.
To facilitate the use of a USB memory stick,
only store music files on it. It takes a lot
longer for the system to load storage media
that contains anything other than compatible
music files.
06
Start playback of a file by pressing OK/
MENU.
Only applies to USB and iPod®.
Applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
If Repeat folder is activated then this does not take place.
Only applies to USB.
Does not apply to iPod®
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
269
06 Infotainment system
External audio source via AUX/USB* input
NOTE
The system supports mobile media compliant with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file system and can handle 1000 folders with a
maximum of 254 subfolders/files in every
folder. The top level, which can handle up
to 1000 subfolders/files, is an exception to
this.
iPod®
An iPod® is charged and supplied with power
by the USB connection* via the player's connection cable.
NOTE
The system only supports the playback of
audio files from iPod®.
NOTE
NOTE
When using a longer model USB memory
stick the use of a USB adapter cable is
recommended. This is to avoid mechanical
wear to the USB input and the connected
USB memory stick.
USB hub
06
It is possible to connect a USB hub to the
USB connection and thereby connect multiple USB devices simultaneously. Selection of
USB device is made in USB mode under
USB menu Select USB device.
When an iPod® is used as audio source,
the car's infotainment system has a menu
structure that is similar to the iPod® player's own menu structure.
Compatible file formats via the USB
connection
Audio and video files in the following table are
supported by the system for playback via the
USB connection.
MP3 player
Many MP3 players have their own file systems that are not supported by the audio system. For use in the system, an MP3 player
must be set in USB Removable device/
Mass Storage Device mode.
270
A
Audio format
mp3, wma, aac, m4a
Video formatA
divx, avi, asf
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
Media Bluetooth®*
General
The car's media player is equipped with
Bluetooth®1 and can wirelessly play streaming audio files from external devices with
Bluetooth®, such as mobile phones and
PDAs. Navigation and control of the sound
can be carried out via the centre console buttons or via the steering wheel keypad*. In
some external devices it is also possible to
change tracks from the device.
To play back the audio the car's media player
must first be set in Bluetooth mode.
When a mobile phone is connected to the
car, it is also possible to remotely control a
selection of the mobile phone's functions, see
page 274. Switch between the main sources
TEL and MEDIA to operate each one's functions.
Overview
NOTE
The Bluetooth® media player must support
the Audio/Video Remote Control Profile
(AVRCP) and Advanced Audio Distribution
Profile (A2DP). The player should use
AVRCP version 1.3, A2DP 1.2. Otherwise
some functions may not work.
Not all mobile phones and external media
players available in the market are fully
compatible with the Bluetooth® function in
the car's media player. Volvo recommends
that you contact an authorised Volvo
dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for
information on compatible phones and
external media players.
NOTE
VOL – volume
MEDIA button. Last active source (e.g.
iPod®) is activated automatically. If a
source is activated and you press MEDIA
then a shortcut menu is shown with commonly used menu options.
The car's media player can only play the
audio files via the Bluetooth® function.
Menus
The menus in MEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 249 and menu overview, see
page 252.
1
Centre console control panel.
06
Navigate in the menu by turning TUNE.
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
by pressing OK/MENU.
Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
271
06 Infotainment system
Media Bluetooth®*
EXIT - leads up in the menu system,
stops the function in progress.
EXIT. Connect a new external device, see
"Change to another external device" below.
Short presses are used to scroll between
audio files. Long presses are used to
fast forward and rewind audio files.
Change to another external device
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 247. For a description of
the remote control, see page 291.
Getting started
Connect an external
06
1. Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until Bluetooth
is shown, press OK/MENU.
2. Check that the external device is searchable/visible via Bluetooth®, see the manual for the external device.
3. Press OK/MENU.
Bluetooth®
device
A maximum of ten external devices can be
registered. The connection is made in the
same way as for the phone, see Connect an
external Bluetooth® device, page 275.
Automatic connection
When the Bluetooth® function is active and
the last external device connected is in range
it is connected automatically. When the infotainment system searches for the last device
connected its name is shown in the TV
screen. To connect to another device, press
272
It is possible to change a connected device
with another device if there are several devices in the car. However, the device must first
have been paired, see "Connect an external
Bluetooth® device" above. To change to
another device:
4. Turn TUNE to Change device, and confirm with OK/MENU.
> After a while, the external device's
name is shown in the TV screen. If several external devices have been paired
then these are also shown.
5. Select the device to be connected by
turning TUNE and confirm with OK/
MENU.
> Connection of the external device
takes place.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Change audio file by pressing
/
on
the centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Disconnecting the device
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
external device moves out of the infotainment
system's range. For more information on connection, see page 272.
Remove the connected device
1. Press Bluetooth mode on OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to Remove Bluetooth
device and confirm with OK/MENU.
3. Select the device to be removed by turning TUNE, and confirm with OK/MENU.
> A prompt asking whether or not you
want to remove the connection is
shown in the TV screen.
4. Press OK/MENU to confirm.
EXIT cancels.
06 Infotainment system
Media Bluetooth®*
Random2
This function plays back the audio files on the
external device in random order. Activate/
deactivate the random function in Bluetooth
mode under Bluetooth menu Random.
Change audio file by pressing
/
on
the centre console or the steering wheel keypad*.
Scanning of audio files in external
device2
This function play backs the first ten seconds
of each audio file. Activate/deactivate the
function in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth
menu Scan.
Cancel scanning with EXIT.
06
Version information Bluetooth®
The car's current Bluetooth® version can be
seen in Bluetooth mode under Bluetooth
menu Bluetooth software version in car.
2
Not supported by all mobile phones.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
273
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
General
A mobile phone equipped with Bluetooth®
can be connected wirelessly to the Infotainment system1. The infotainment system then
works handsfree, with the option to control a
range of the mobile phone's functions
remotely. The microphone used is located by
the driver's sun visor (2). The mobile phone
can be operated by its own keys irrespective
of whether or not it is connected.
gation, see page 249 and menu overview, see
page 252.
Phone functions, controls overview
Overview
NOTE
Only a selection of mobile phones are fully
compatible with the handsfree function.
Volvo recommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo dealer or
visit www.volvocars.com for information
on compatible phones.
06
Centre console control panel.
Number and letter buttons
System overview
When a mobile phone is connected to the
car, it is also possible to stream audio files
from the phone at the same time, see
page 271. Switch between the main sources
TEL and MEDIA to operate each one's functions.
Mobile phone
Microphone
Steering wheel keypad
Centre console control panel
Menus
The menus in TEL are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navi1
274
Applies to High Performance, High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
TEL button activates/searches last connected phone. If a phone is already connected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut
menu is shown with commonly used
menu options for the phone.
TUNE - Turn in normal view to the right to
access the phone book, and to the left for
the call register for all calls; also used for
navigation among the options in the
screen.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
Accept incoming calls, confirm your
selection or go to the Phone menu by
pressing OK/MENU.
EXIT - Cancels/rejects phone calls, deletes input characters, leads up in the menu
system and cancels the current function.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 247. For a description of
the remote control, see page 291.
Remember
Activate
A short press on TEL activates/searches last
connected phone. If a phone is already connected, and TEL is pressed, a shortcut menu
is shown with commonly used menu options
symbol indicates
for the phone. The
that a phone is connected.
Connect an external Bluetooth® device
A maximum of ten external devices can be
registered. Registration is performed once
per device. After registration the device no
longer needs to be activated as visible/
searchable.
NOTE
If the phone's operating system is updated
then it is possible that the registration of
the phone is interrupted. In which case,
disconnect the phone, see page 277 and
then reconnect it, see page 275.
It is possible to have two Bluetooth® devices
connected simultaneously. One phone and
one media device, which it is possible to
switch between, see page 276 or see
page 272. It is also possible to use the phone
while streaming audio files from a connected
device.
Connecting an external device takes place in
different ways depending on whether or not
the device has been connected previously.
The connection alternatives below assume
that this is the first time the device is being
connected and that no other device is connected.
There are two possible ways of connecting
devices, either search for the external device
from the car, or search for the car from the
external device. If one option does not work
then try with the other.
Example of normal view for the phone.
If you are not already in the normal view,
press TEL in the centre console.
Alternative 1 - search for the external device
via the car's menu system
1. Make the external device searchable/visible via Bluetooth®, see the external device's manual or www.volvocars.com.
06
2. Press OK/MENU and follow the instructions in the car's screen.
> The external device is now connected
and can be controlled from the car.
Connection failed, press EXIT twice and connect in accordance with Alternative 2.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
275
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
Alternative 2 - Search for car with the external device's Bluetooth® function.
tem searches for the last phone connected its
name is shown in the screen.
1. Make the car searchable/visible via
Bluetooth®. Turn TUNE to Phone
settings, confirm with OK/MENU, select
Discoverable and confirm with OK/
MENU.
If you want to change the connected mobile
phone, go in phone mode to Phone menu
Change phone.
2. Select My Volvo Car on the external
device's screen and follow the instructions.
06
Change to another external device
3. Enter an optional PIN code into the external device, then select the option to connect.
It is possible to change a connected device
with another device if there are several devices in the car. However, the device must first
have been registered to the car, see Connect
an external Bluetooth® device. To change to
another device:
4. Press OK/MENU and then enter the
same PIN code via the car's keypad in
the centre console.
1. Check that the external device is searchable/visible via Bluetooth®, see the manual for the external device.
When the external device is connected, the
external device's Bluetooth® name is shown
in the car's screen and the device can be
controlled from the car.
2. Press TEL and then select Change
phone.
> The car searches for previously connected devices. The external devices
detected are specified with their
respective Bluetooth® name in the
screen.
Automatic connection
When the handsfree function is active and the
last mobile phone connected is in range it is
connected automatically. If the last connected mobile phone is not available then the
system will try to connect a mobile phone
that was paired earlier. When the audio sys2
276
Manual connection
3. Select the device to be connected by
turning TUNE and confirm with OK/
MENU.
Only Keyless Drive.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
> Connection of the external device
takes place.
To call
1. Make sure that the
symbol appears
at the top of the screen and that the
handsfree function is in phone mode.
2. Dial either the desired number or speed
dial number, see page 281. Or in normal
view turn TUNE to the right to access the
phone book, and to the left for the call
register for all calls. For information on
the phone book, see page 278.
3. Press OK/MENU.
The call is interrupted with EXIT.
Disconnecting the mobile phone
Automatic disconnection takes place if the
mobile phone moves out of the audio system's range. The connection to the mobile
phone can be manually broken in phone
mode under Phone menu Disconnect
phone. For more information on connection,
see page 275.
The handsfree function is deactivated when
the engine is switched off and the door is
opened2.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
When the mobile phone has been disconnected an ongoing call can be continued by
using the mobile phone's built-in microphone
and speaker.
NOTE
Even when your mobile phone has been
manually disconnected, some mobile
phones may automatically couple up to
the last handsfree unit connected, e.g.
when a new call begins.
Remove the device
A connected mobile phone can be deregistered and removed. This is performed in
phone mode under Phone menu Remove
Bluetooth device.
Making and receiving calls
Incoming call
–
Press OK/MENU to answer the call, even
if the audio system is in e.g. RADIO or
MEDIA mode.
Refuse or end with EXIT.
Automatic answer
The automatic answer function means that
calls are accepted automatically.
–
Activate/deactivate in phone mode under
Phone menu Call options Auto
answer.
NOTE
In call menu
Certain mobile phones show a list of the
last dialled numbers in reverse order.
Press OK/MENU during an ongoing call to
access the following functions:
• Mute - audio system microphone is
Voice mailbox
muted.
• Mobile phone - the call is transferred
from handsfree to the mobile phone. For
some mobile phones the connection is
interrupted. This is normal. The handsfree
function asks if you want to reconnect.
• Dial number - option to call a third party
using the number keys (current call set in
standby).
Call lists
The call lists are copied to the handsfree
function at each new connection and are then
updated during the connection. In normal
view, turn to the left with TUNE to see the call
register for All calls .
In phone mode it is possible to see all the call
lists under Phone menu All calls:
• All calls
• Missed calls
• Answered calls
• Dialled calls
• Call duration
In normal view a speed dial number for the
voice mailbox can be programmed in and
then accessed later via a long press on 1.
Voice mailbox number is changed in phone
mode under Phone menu Call options
Voicemail number Change number. If
there is no number stored then this menu can
be reached with one long press on 1.
Audio settings
06
Phone call volume
The phone call volume can only be changed
during a call. Use the steering wheel keypad*
or turn the VOL control.
Audio system volume
Providing there is no ongoing call taking
place, the audio system volume is controlled
as usual by turning VOL.
If an audio source is active during an incoming call then it can be muted automatically.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
277
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
Activate/deactivate in phone mode under
Phone menu Phone settings Sounds
and volume Mute radio/media.
Ring volume
In phone mode go to Phone menu Phone
settings Sounds and volume Ring
volume and adjust by turning VOL. Press
OK/MENU to hear the audio volume. Press
EXIT to save.
Ring signals
signal.
There are two phone books. These are
merged into one in the car and are displayed
as a single phone book in the car.
•
The car downloads the mobile phone's
phone book and only displays this phone
book when the mobile phone from which
this phone book was downloaded is connected.
•
The car also has a built-in phone book.
This contains all the contacts stored in
the car irrespective of which phone was
connected when saving them. These contacts are visible for all users, regardless of
the mobile phone that is connected to the
car. If a contact is saved in the car then
the symbol
is shown in front of the
contact in the phone book.
NOTE
06
For some mobile phones, the ringtone on
the phone connected will not be switched
off when one of the inbuilt signals for the
handsfree system is used.
In order to select the connected phone's ring
signal3, go in phone mode to Phone menu
Phone settings Sounds and volume
3
278
Changes made from the car to a record in
the mobile phone's telephone book will
result in a new record in the car's telephone book, i.e. changes will not be saved
to the phone. From the car, this will now
look like you have double records, with different icons. Note also that when a shortcut number is saved or a change to a contact is made, this will result in a new
record in the car's phone book.
Phone book
Ring signals
The handsfree function has integrated ring
signals that can be selected in phone mode
under Phone menu Phone settings
Sounds and volume Ring signals Ring
signal 1 etc.
NOTE
Mobile phone ring
Not supported by all mobile phones.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
All use of the phone book requires that the
symbol appears at the top of the
screen and that the handsfree function is in
phone mode.
The audio system stores a copy of the phone
book from each paired mobile phone. The
phone book can be copied automatically to
the audio system during each connection.
–
Activate/deactivate the function in phone
mode under Phone menu Phone
settings Download phone book.
If the phone book contains a ringing caller's
contact information then this is shown in the
screen.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
Quick search for contacts
In normal view turn TUNE to the right to
obtain a list of contacts. Turn TUNE to select
and press OK/MENU to call.
Under the name of the contact is the phone
number that is selected by default. If the symbol > appears to the right of the contact then
there are several phone numbers stored for
the contact. Press OK/MENU to show the
numbers. Change and dial a number other
than that selected by default by turning
TUNE. Press OK/MENU to dial.
Search in the list of contacts by using the
centre console's keypad to key in the start of
the contact's name (see "Character table keypad in centre console" for button functions).
The list of contacts can also be accessed
from normal view by pressing and holding the
button on the centre console's keypad with
the letter that the contact searched for starts
with. For example, a long press on the button
for 6 gives instant access to that part of the
list where the contacts with the letter M are
located.
Character table keypad in centre
console
Key
Key
Function
Function
+0pw
Space . , - ? @ : ; / ( ) 1
#*
ABCÅÄÆÀÇ2
Searching for contacts
DEFÈΔ3
GHIÌ4
JKL5
MNOΚØÑÒ6
PQRSΤ7
TUVÜÙ8
Search contacts using the text wheel.
06
Character list
WXYZ9
Changing the input mode (see table
below)
Shift between upper and lower
case letter.
Phone book
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
279
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
To search for or edit a contact, go in phone
mode to Phone menu Phone book
Search.
123/ABC
Change between letters and
numbers with OK/MENU.
More
Change to special characters
with OK/MENU.
NOTE
Leads to the phone book (3).
Turn TUNE to select a contact,
press OK/MENU to see the
saved numbers and other
information.
There is no text wheel for High Performance, so TUNE cannot be used there to
input characters: only the digit and letter
buttons on the control panel in the centre
console can be used for this.
1. Turn4 TUNE to the desired letter, press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number and
letter buttons on the control panel in the
centre console can also be used.
2. Continue with the next letter and so on.
The result of the search is shown in the
phone book (3).
06
3. To change the input mode to numbers or
special characters, or to go to the phone
book, turn TUNE to one of the options
(see explanation in the table below) in the
list for changing the input mode (2), press
OK/MENU.
4
280
New contact
A short press on EXIT deletes an input character. A long press on EXIT will clear all
entered characters.
By pressing a number key in the centre console when the text wheel is shown (see previous illustration), a new character list (1) is
shown in the screen. Continue repeatedly
pressing the number key to the desired letter
and then release. Continue with the next letter and so on. When a button is depressed
the entry is confirmed when another button is
depressed.
To enter a number, hold in the corresponding
number key.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Entering letters for New contact.
Changing the input mode (see table
below)
Input field
New contacts can be added in phone mode
under Phone menu Phone book New
contact.
NOTE
There is no text wheel for High Performance, so TUNE cannot be used there to
input characters: only the digit and letter
buttons on the control panel in the centre
console can be used for this.
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
1. When the Name row is selected, press
OK/MENU to reach the input mode (illustration above).
2. Turn4 TUNE to the desired letter, press
OK/MENU to confirm. The number and
letter buttons on the control panel in the
centre console can also be used.
3. Continue with the next letter and so on.
The name entered is shown in the input
field (2) in the screen.
When all details have been filled in, select
Save contact in the menu to save the contact.
123/ABC
Change between letters and
numbers with OK/MENU.
More
Change to special characters
with OK/MENU.
OK
Save and go back to Add
contact with OK/MENU.
4. To change the input mode to numbers,
special characters, change between
uppercase/lowercase letters, etc., turn
TUNE to one of the options (see explanation in the table below) in the list (1) and
then press OK/MENU.
When the name has been fully entered, select
OK in the list in the screen (1) and press OK/
MENU. Now continue with the telephone
number in the same way as above.
When the telephone number has been
entered, press OK/MENU and select a telephone number type (Mobile phone, Home,
Work or General). Press OK/MENU to confirm.
4
Change between uppercase
and lowercase letters with OK/
MENU.
Press OK/MENU, the cursor
moves to the input field (2) at
the top of the screen. The cursor can now be moved, with
TUNE, to the appropriate
place to e.g. insert new letters
or delete with EXIT. To be able
to insert new letters first go
back to the input mode, by
pressing OK/MENU.
Speed dial numbers
Use phone mode to add speed dial numbers
under Phone menu Phone book
Speed dial.
Dialling with speed dial numbers can be performed in phone mode using the number
keys on the keypad in the centre console, by
pressing a number key and then pressing
OK/MENU. If there is no contact stored on
the speed dial number then an option is
shown to save a contact to the selected
speed dial number.
Receiving a vCard
It is possible to receive a vCard to the car's
phone book from other mobile phones (other
than the one currently connected to the car).
In order to allow this the car is set to visible
mode for Bluetooth®. The function is activated in phone mode under Phone menu
Phone book Receive vCard.
06
Memory status
Memory status of the car's phone book and
the connected mobile phone's phone book
can be seen in phone mode under Phone
menu Phone book Memory status.
Only applies to High Performance Multimedia and Premium Sound Multimedia.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
281
06 Infotainment system
Bluetooth® handsfree*
Delete phone book
The car's phone book can be deleted, this is
carried out in phone mode under Phone
menu Phone book Clear phone book.
NOTE
Deleting the car's telephone book only
deletes contacts in the car's telephone
book. Contacts in the mobile phone's
phone book are not deleted.
Version information Bluetooth®
The car's current Bluetooth® version can be
seen in phone mode under Phone menu
Phone settings Bluetooth software
version in car.
06
282
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
General
The infotainment system's voice recognition1
allows the driver to voice-activate certain
functions in a Bluetooth®-connected mobile
phone or in Volvo's navigation system - RTI
(Road and Traffic Information System).
NOTE
•
•
The information in this section
describes the use of voice commands
to control a mobile phone connected
using Bluetooth®. For detailed information on using a mobile phone connected using Bluetooth® with the car's
Infotainment system see page 274.
The Volvo navigation system RTI
(Road and Traffic Information System)
has a separate user manual which
contains more information on voice
control and voice commands to control that system.
Language
WARNING
The driver always holds overall responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner
and complying with all applicable rules of
the road.
The voice recognition system allows the
driver to voice-activate certain functions of a
Bluetooth®-connected mobile phone and in
Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and
Traffic Information System), while the driver
can keep his/her hands on the wheel at the
same time. The input data are in dialogue
form with spoken commands from the user
and verbal replies from the system. The voice
recognition system uses the same microphone as the Bluetooth® handsfree system
(see illustration on page 274) and the voice
recognition system's replies come via the
car's speakers.
Language list.
Voice recognition is not possible for all languages. Languages available for voice recognition are marked with an icon in the lan. Changing the language is perguage list formed in the menu system MY CAR, see
page 208.
06
Voice commands offer convenience and help
the driver to avoid being distracted, and
instead concentrate on driving and focus
attention on the road and traffic conditions.
1
Only applies to vehicles equipped with Volvo's navigation system - RTI (Road and Traffic Information System).
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
283
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
Remember
Keep the following things in mind when you
use the voice recognition system:
•
For a command - speak after the tone,
with normal voice at normal speed.
•
Do not speak while the system is replying
(the system cannot understand commands during this time).
•
The car's doors, windows and sunroof*
must be closed.
•
Avoid background noise in the passenger
compartment.
NOTE
Steering wheel keypad.
Button for voice recognition
To activate the system
06
Before voice commands to a mobile phone
can be used the mobile phone must be
paired and connected via Bluetooth® handsfree. If a telephone command is given and no
mobile phone is paired, then the system will
provide information about this. For information on pairing and connecting a mobile
phone, see page 275.
•
284
Press the button for voice recognition (1)
in order to activate the system and initiate
a dialogue with voice commands. The
system will then display commonly used
commands in the screen in the centre
console.
If the driver is unsure of which command
to use, he (she) can say "Help" - the system then responds with a few different
commands which can be used in the current situation.
Help functions for voice recognition
•
Instructions: A function that helps you
get familiar with the system and the procedure for giving commands.
•
Voice training: A function that enables
the voice recognition system to learn to
know your voice and your accent. The
function provides an opportunity to voice
train two user profiles.
The help functions can be accessed by
pressing the MY CAR button on the control
panel in the centre console and then turning
TUNE to the desired menu option.
Instructions
The instructions can be started in two ways:
NOTE
This instruction and voice training can only
be started when the car is parked.
Voice commands can be disabled by:
•
•
•
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
saying "Cancel"
not speaking
•
a long press on the steering wheel button for Voice recognition
Press the button for Voice recognition
and say "Voice tutorial".
•
Activate the instructions in the menu system MY CAR under Settings Voice
settings Voice tutorial. For a description of the menu system, see page 206.
Press EXIT or another main source
button (e.g. MEDIA).
The instructions are divided into 3 lessons,
which take around 5 minutes in total to complete. The system starts with the first lesson.
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
To skip a lesson and go to the next one,
press the button for voice recognition and say
"Next". Go back to the previous lesson by
saying "Previous".
Using voice commands
Exit the instructions by means of a long press
on the button for voice recognition.
Once a dialogue has been started, commonly
used commands will be shown in the screen.
Greyed-out text or text within brackets is not
included in the spoken command.
Voice training
The system displays up to fifteen phrases for
you to say. Voice training can be started in
the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice training. Choose
between User 1 or User 2. For a description
of the menu system, see page 206.
The driver initiates a dialogue with the voice
commands by pressing the button for voice
recognition (see illustration on page 284).
When the driver becomes accustomed to the
system, he/she can speed up the command
dialogue and skip the prompts from the system, by briefly pressing the button for voice
recognition.
commands. For a description of the menu
system, see page 206.
Dial a number
The system understands the numbers 0 (zero)
to 9 (nine). These numbers can be pronounced individually, in groups of several
numbers at a time, or the whole number all at
once. Numbers greater than 9 (nine) cannot
be handled by the system, e.g. 10 (ten) or 11
(eleven) are not possible.
The following is an example of a dialogue
with voice commands. The system's reply will
vary depending on the situation.
After voice training has been completed,
remember to set your user profile under
Voice user setting.
Commands can be given in several ways
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
The command "Phone call contact" can be
pronounced as e.g.:
Phone > dial number
Additional settings in MY CAR
•
Phone dial number
•
•
User setting - Two user profiles can be
set, the function is activated in the menu
system MY CAR under Settings Voice
settings Voice user setting. Choose
between User 1 or User 2. For a description of the menu system, see page 206.
Voice output volume - Can be changed
in the menu system MY CAR under
Settings Voice settings Voice
output volume. For a description of the
menu system, see page 206.
or
"Phone > Call contact" - Say "Phone",
wait for the system's reply, and then continue by saying "Call contact."
or
•
System reply
06
Number?
User action
"Phone call contact" - Say the whole
command in one sequence.
Quick commands
Quick commands for the phone can be found
in the menu system MY CAR under Settings
Voice settings Voice command list
Phone commands and General
Start saying the numbers (as individual units,
i.e. six-eight-seven, etc.) in the phone number. If you say several numbers and pause,
the system will repeat them, and then say
"Continue".
Continue to say the numbers. When finished,
finish the command by saying "Call".
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
285
06 Infotainment system
Voice recognition* mobile phone
•
You can also change the number by saying the commands "Correct" (which deletes the last spoken group of numbers) or
"Delete" (which deletes the whole spoken
phone number).
Dialling from the call register
•
If there are several contacts with similar
names, they will be presented in the
screen in the numbered rows and the
system prompts you to select a row number.
•
If there are more rows in the list than can
be displayed simultaneously, saying
"Down" allows you to scroll down in the
list (and saying "Up" allows you to scroll
up in the list).
The following dialogue allows you to make a
phone call from one of your mobile phone's
call registers.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call from the call register
or
Phone call from the call register
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
Call a contact
06
The following dialogue allows you to call your
pre-defined contacts in the mobile phone.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call contact
or
Calling voice mailbox
The following dialogue allows you to call your
voice mailbox to check if you have received
any messages. The phone number for your
voice mailbox must be registered in the
Bluetooth® function, see page 277.
The user starts the dialogue by saying:
Phone > call voice mailbox
or
Phone call voice mailbox
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
Phone call contact
Continue by responding to the system's
prompts.
Consider the following when you call a contact:
286
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
TV*
General
NOTE
This system only supports TV broadcasts
in the countries that broadcast in MPEG-2
or MPEG-4 format and follow the DVB-T
standard. The system does not support
analogue broadcasts.
NOTE
The TV picture is only shown when the car
is stationary. When the car is moving at a
speed over about 6 km/h the picture disappears, No visual media available
while driving appears on the display
screen, although the audio is heard during
this time. The picture reappears when the
car has stopped.
shortcut menu is shown with commonly
used menu options.
IMPORTANT
A TV licence is required for this product in
some countries.
Station presets, numeric input.
Menus
The menus in MEDIA are controlled from the
centre console and the steering wheel keypad*. For general information on menu navigation, see page 249 and menu overview, see
page 252.
Overview
Navigate in channel lists or menus by
turning TUNE.
Confirm your selection or go to the menu
by pressing OK/MENU.
EXIT - leads up in the menu system,
stops the function in progress.
The next available channel is shown by
pressing
/
.
NOTE
If the car is equipped with a steering wheel
keypad* and/or remote control* then in
many cases these can be used instead of
the buttons in the centre console. For a
description of the buttons in the steering
wheel, see page 247. For a description of
the remote control, see page 291.
Cars with RSE do not shut off the rear
screens.
06
NOTE
The reception is dependent both on how
good the signal strength and signal quality
are. The transmission may be disturbed by
various factors such as tall buildings or the
TV transmitter being far away. Coverage
level can also vary depending on where in
the country you are located.
Centre console control panel.
MEDIA button. Last active source (e.g.
iPod® or TV) is activated. If a source is
activated and you press MEDIA then a
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
287
06 Infotainment system
TV*
Watch TV
–
Press MEDIA, turn TUNE until TV is
shown in the screen, press OK/MENU.
> A search starts and after a short while
the most recently used channel is
shown.
Changing channel
It is possible to change channel as follows:
•
•
•
06
Turn TUNE, a list of all available channels
in the area is shown. If any of these channels is already saved as a preset then its
preset number is shown to the right of the
channel name. Continue turning TUNE to
reach the desired channel and press OK/
MENU.
By pressing the preset buttons (0-9).
Via a short press on the
/
buttons the next available channel in the area
is shown.
NOTE
If the car has been moved within the country, for example, from one city to another,
it is not certain that the presets are available at the new location as the frequency
range may have changed. In which case,
carry out a new search and save a new
preset list, see the function "Save the
available TV channels as presets", page
289.
NOTE
If no reception is available on the preset
buttons, it may be because the car is at a
location other than where the scan of TV
channels was run, for example, if the car
was driven from Germany to France. A
new selection of country and a new search
may then need to be carried out.
Searching TV channels/Preset list
1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to Select country and press
OK/MENU.
> If one or more countries have previously been selected then they are
shown in a list.
288
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
4. Turn TUNE to either Other countries or
one of the previously selected countries.
Press OK/MENU.
> A list of all available countries is
shown.
5. Turn TUNE to the desired country (e.g.
Sweden) and press OK/MENU.
> An automatic scan for available TV
channels starts, this scan takes a little
while. During this time the figure for
each channel found and added as a
preset is shown. When the scan is
complete a message is shown and the
picture is shown. A preset list (max. 30
presets) has now been created and is
available. To change channel, see
page 288.
The scan and preset storage can be cancelled with EXIT.
Channel management
The preset list can be edited. You can change
the order of the channels that are shown in
the preset list. A TV channel can have more
than one place in the preset list. The TV channel positions can also vary in the preset list.
To change the order in the preset list, go in
TV mode to TV menu Reorganise
presets.
06 Infotainment system
TV*
1. Turn TUNE to the channel you want to
move in the list and confirm with OK/
MENU.
> The selected channel is highlighted.
2. Turn TUNE to the new location in the list
and confirm with OK/MENU.
> The channels change places with each
other.
After the preset channels (max. 30) come all
the other channels available in the area. It is
possible to move a channel up to a place in
the preset list.
Save the available TV channels as
presets
If the car has been moved within the country,
for example, from one city to another, it is not
certain that the presets are available at the
new location as the frequency range may
have changed. In which case, carry out
another scan and save a new preset list.
1. Press TV mode on OK/MENU.
2. Turn TUNE to TV menu and press OK/
MENU.
3. Turn TUNE to Autostore and press OK/
MENU.
> An automatic scan for available TV
channels starts, this scan takes a little
while. During this time the figure for
each channel found and added as a
preset is shown. When the scan is
complete a message is shown and the
picture is shown. A preset list (max. 30
presets) has now been created and is
available. To change channel, see
page 288.
Scanning the TV channels
This function automatically scans through the
frequency range for all channels available in
the area where you are. When a channel is
found, it is shown for approx. 10 seconds
before scanning is resumed. Scanning is
stopped with EXIT, then the channel that you
just watched continues to be shown. Scanning does not affect the preset list.
Activate scanning in TV mode under TV
menu Scan.
Teletext
Return to TV screen with EXIT or by pressing
the
button on the remote control.
It is also possible to control the teletext with
the coloured buttons on the remote control.
Information about the current
programme
Press the INFO button in order to display the
information about the current programme, the
next programme and its start time. If the
INFO button is pressed once more then additional information on the current programme
can sometimes be displayed, such as start
and end times and a brief description of the
current programme. For more information on
the INFO button, see page 247.
06
To return to the TV picture, wait several seconds or press EXIT.
It is possible to read Teletext. Follow these
steps:
1. Press the
control.
Enter new page number, or press the remote
control buttons
/
to go to the next
page.
button on the remote
2. Enter the page number (3 digits) with the
number keys (0-9) to select page.
> The page is shown automatically.
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
289
06 Infotainment system
TV*
Picture settings
The settings for brightness and contrast can
be adjusted. For more information, see
page 267.
The reception is lost
If the reception for the TV channel that is
being shown disappears then the picture will
freeze. Shortly after this a message appears
informing that the reception has been lost for
the current TV channel, and a new search for
the channel continues. When the reception
returns the display of the TV channel starts
immediately. It is possible to change channel
at any time when the message is shown.
06
290
If the message Reception lost, searching is
shown then this is because the system has
detected that there is no reception for all TV
channels. One possible reason may be that a
border has been crossed and that the system
is set to the wrong country. In which case,
change to the right country in accordance
with "Searching TV channels/Preset list", see
page 288.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
06 Infotainment system
Remote control*
General*
The remote control can be used for all functions in the infotainment system. The remote
control's buttons have the same functions as
the buttons in the centre console or steering
wheel keypad*.
When using the remote control, first press the
to position F.
remote control's button
Then aim the remote control at the IR
receiver, which is located to the right of the
INFO button (see page 247) in the centre
console.
WARNING
Keep loose objects such as mobile
phones, cameras, remote controls for
accessories, etc. in the glove compartment
or other compartments. Otherwise they
may injure people in the car in the event of
sudden braking or a collision.
NOTE
Functions
Key
Function
F = Front TV screen
Change to navigation*
Change to radio source (e.g.
FM1)
Change to media source (Disc,
TV* etc.)
Change to Bluetooth® handsfree*
Scroll/fast rewind, change track/
song
Play/pause
06
Stop
Do not expose the remote control to direct
sunlight (e.g. on the instrument panel) otherwise problems may arise with the
batteries.
Scroll/fast forward, change
track/song
Menu
To previous, cancels function,
deletes input characters
Corresponds to TUNE in the centre console.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
291
06 Infotainment system
Remote control*
Key
Function
Key
Navigate up/down
Subtitles, selection of language
for text
Navigate right/left
Teletext*, On/Off
Confirm selection or go to the
menu system for the selected
source
Replacing the battery in the remote
control
Volume, decrease
Volume, increase
0-9
Preset channels, number and
letter input
Shortcuts for favourite setting.
06
Information about the current
programme, song, etc. Also
used when there is more information available than can be
shown in the display screen.
NOTE
Battery life is normally 1-4 years and
depends on how much the remote control
is used.
1. Push down the catch on the battery cover
and slide the battery cover in the direction of the infrared lens.
The remote control is powered by four batteries of the AA/LR6 type.
2. Remove the used batteries, turn the new
batteries in accordance with the symbols
in the battery compartment and fit them.
Take along extra batteries for a long journey.
3. Refit the cover.
Selection of language for soundtrack
292
Function
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
NOTE
Be sure to dispose of the exhausted batteries in an environmentally safe manner.
06 Infotainment system
06
293
Recommendations during driving.........................................................
Refuelling..............................................................................................
Fuel.......................................................................................................
Charging - hybrid battery .....................................................................
Loading.................................................................................................
Cargo area............................................................................................
Driving with a trailer..............................................................................
Towing and recovery.............................................................................
294
296
300
301
304
312
314
317
323
DURING YOUR JOURNEY
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
General
Utilise electric operation as much as possible:
Here is some advice that reduces power consumption (allowing longer possible mileage)
without the need for travelling time to
increase or driving pleasure to decrease.
•
Find out where the charging stations are
located.
•
•
Prioritise choosing a parking space with a
charging station.
Do not hold the car stationary on a hill
with the accelerator pedal. Use the foot
brake instead.
•
Balance electricity consumption with the
accelerator pedal, and by these means
use the advantages of the electric motor.
•
Use engine braking and smooth operation
of the foot brake when braking - this
recharges the hybrid battery and extends
the possible mileage with the electric
motor, see page 133.
Planning your driving
WARNING
Remember that the car does not emit any
engine noise when it is only powered by
the electric motor and may therefore be
difficult to notice by children, pedestrians,
cyclists and animals. This applies in particular at low speeds, such as in car parks.
NOTE
07
Make a habit of always starting a journey
with fully-charged hybrid battery.
Driving techniques
The electric motor acts as both engine and
alternator. During braking the brake force is
used to recharge the hybrid battery - energy
that otherwise would have been lost as heat
energy, see page 133.
296
•
tioned to its optimal temperature range. If the
car's electric motor is started in cold weather
or goes beyond its permitted temperature
range while driving then the fuel heater starts
and, if required, the internal combustion
engine starts automatically so that heating
takes place. The car can be driven electrically
but with reduced power if the temperature
becomes too low.
Similarly, the system may need to be cooled
down when driving in hot conditions.
NOTE
High speed increases power consumption considerably due to increased wind
resistance - doubling speed increases
wind resistance 4 times.
•
Maintain the car regularly - follow Volvo's
recommended service intervals.
•
Towing another car consumes a lot of
electricity - use the AWD mode. This then
charges the hybrid battery, in combination with improving the car's driving characteristics and roadholding, see
page 125.
If the outside temperature drops extremely
low then the diesel engine will always be
running.
Economical driving
Driving economically means driving smoothly
while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions.
•
For more information, see the heading Economical driving.
Outside temperature
The electric motor, electronics and batteries
work best at approx. 25 °C. When the car is
connected to an electrical socket it is condi-
•
•
Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to the current traffic situation and
road - lower engine speeds result in lower
fuel consumption.
Avoid driving with open windows.
Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration
and heavy braking.
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
•
•
•
Drive with the correct tyre pressure, see
page 399.
Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the consumption.
Use engine braking to slow down, when it
can take place without risk to other road
users.
•
A roof load and ski box increase air resistance, leading to higher consumption remove the load carriers when not in use.
•
Do not run the engine to operating temperature at idling speed, but rather drive
with a light load as soon as possible - a
cold engine consumes more fuel than a
warm one.
For more information and further advice, see
the pages 11 and 398.
WARNING
Never switch off the engine while moving,
such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering
and brake servo.
Power consumers
The more power consumers in the car that
are switched on (e.g. stereo, electrically
heated windows, door mirrors, seats, etc.) the
higher the energy consumption.
Driving in water
IMPORTANT
The car can be driven through water at a
maximum depth of 25 cm at a maximum
speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be
exercised when passing through flowing
water.
Engine damage can occur if water enters
the air filter.
In depths greater than 25 cm, water could
enter the transmission. This reduces the
lubricating ability of the oils and shortens
the service life of these systems.
During driving in water, maintain a low speed
and do not stop the car. When the water has
been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly
and check that full brake function is achieved.
Water and mud for example can make the
brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake
function.
•
Clean the electric contacts of the electric
engine block heater and trailer coupling
after driving in water and mud.
•
Do not let the car stand with water over
the sills for any long period of time - this
could cause electrical malfunctions.
In the event of the engine stalling in water,
do not try restart - tow the car from the
water to a workshop - an authorised Volvo
workshop is recommended. Risk of engine
breakdown.
Engine, gearbox and cooling system
Under special conditions, for example hard
driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is
a risk that the engine and drive system may
overheat - in particular with a heavy load.
For information about overheating when driving with a trailer, see page 317.
•
Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front
of the grille when driving in hot climates.
•
If the temperature in the engine's cooling
system is too high then a warning symbol
is illuminated in the combined instrument
panel and its display shows the text message High engine temp Stop safely stop the car in a safe way and allow the
engine to run at idling speed for several
minutes in order to cool down.
07
297
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
•
•
If the text message High engine temp
Stop engine or Coolant level low, Stop
engine is shown then the engine must be
switched off after stopping the car.
In the event of overheating in the gearbox
a built-in protection function is activated
which, amongst other things, illuminates
a warning symbol in the combined instrument panel, and its display shows the
text message Transmission hot Reduce
speed or Transmission hot Stop safely
- follow the recommendation given and
lower the speed and stop the car in a safe
way and allow the engine to run at idling
speed for a few minutes in order to allow
the gearbox to cool down.
•
If the car overheats, the air conditioning
may be switched off temporarily.
•
Do not turn the engine off immediately
you stop after a hard drive.
NOTE
07
It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to
operate for a while after the engine has
been switched off.
Open tailgate
WARNING
Do not drive with the tailgate open. Toxic
exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car
through the cargo area.
–
Do not overload the starter battery
The electrical functions in the car load the
battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the
key position II when the engine is switched
off. Instead use the I mode - which uses less
power.
For more information on key position, see
page 84.
Also, be aware of different accessories that
load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the
engine is switched off. Examples of such
functions are:
•
•
•
•
ventilation fan
headlamps
windscreen wiper
audio system (high volume).
If the starter battery voltage is low then the
combined instrument panel's information display shows the text Low battery Power
save mode. The energy-saving function then
298
shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan
and/or audio system.
In which case, charge the starter battery
by starting the engine and then running it
for at least 15 minutes - charging the
starter battery is more effective during
driving than running the engine at idling
speed while stationary.
Before a long journey
•
Check that the engine is working normally
and that fuel consumption is normal.
•
Make sure that there are no leaks (fuel, oil
or other fluid).
•
•
Check all bulbs and tyre tread depths.
Carrying a warning triangle is a legal
requirement in certain countries.
Winter driving
Check the following in particular before the
cold season:
•
The engine coolant must contain at least
50% glycol. This mixture protects the
engine against frost erosion down to
approximately –35 °C. To achieve opti-
07 During your journey
Recommendations during driving
mum antifreeze protection, different types
of glycol must not be mixed.
•
The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation.
•
Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with
lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel
consumption while the engine is cold. For
more information on suitable oils, see
page 395.
IMPORTANT
Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard
driving or in hot weather.
•
•
The condition of the starter battery and
charge level must be inspected. Cold
weather places great demands on the
starter battery and its capacity is reduced
by the cold.
Use washer fluid to avoid ice forming in
the washer fluid reservoir.
To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if
there is a risk of snow or ice.
NOTE
The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres
are not permitted in all countries.
Slippery driving conditions
Practise driving on slippery surfaces under
controlled conditions to learn how the car
reacts.
the car is not being used for a few days then
energy can be saved by not starting preconditioning. If the car is not used for a long time,
the hybrid battery performs best if the car is
parked in a cool place.
Range
Power consumers
In order to achieve the longest possible mileage for electric operation, the driver of an
electric car also has to think about energy
conservation. The more consumers there are
(stereo, electrically heated windows/mirrors/
seats, very cold air from the climate control
system, etc.) that are switched on - the
shorter the potential mileage.
For more information about range during
electric operation, see page 401.
NOTE
In addition to high power output in the
passenger compartment, high speed, sudden acceleration, heavy loads and uphill
gradients can also reduce the possible
driving distance.
07
Longer periods of inactive time
During normal hybrid battery charging, some
of the charging current is used to keep the
car's drive system ready to drive, mainly to
control the hybrid battery's temperature. If
299
07 During your journey
Refuelling
Refuelling
Opening/closing the fuel cap
Opening/closing the fuel filler flap
Open the fuel filler flap using the button on
the lighting panel - the flap opens when the
button is released.
In the combined instrument panel's
display the arrow on the symbol indicates which side of the car the fuel cap is
located.
07
•
Close the fuel filler flap by pressing it in
until a click confirms that it is closed.
Opening the fuel filler flap manually
300
The fuel filler flap can be opened manually
when electric opening from the passenger
compartment is not possible.
1. Open/remove the side hatch in the cargo
area (same side as fuel filler flap).
2. Expand/open a perforated section in the
isolation and locate a green cord with
handle.
3. Pull the cord gently straight back until the
fuel filler flap folds out with a "click".
IMPORTANT
Pull the wire gently - minimal force is
required to disengage the hatch lock.
The fuel filler cap can be attached onto the flap.
A certain overpressure may arise in the tank
in the event of high outside temperatures.
Open the cap slowly.
•
After refuelling - refit the cap and turn it
until one or more clicking sounds are
heard.
Filling up with fuel
•
Do not overfill the tank but fill until the
pump nozzle cuts out.
NOTE
Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot
weather.
07 During your journey
Fuel
General information on fuel
Fuel of a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo must not be used as engine
power and fuel consumption is negatively
affected.
WARNING
Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes.
In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any
contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty
of water for at least 15 minutes and seek
medical attention.
Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol,
bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed.
Seek medical attention immediately if fuel
has been swallowed.
WARNING
Fuel which spills onto the ground can be
ignited.
Switch off the fuel-driven heater before
starting to refuel.
Never carry an activated mobile phone
when refuelling. The ring signal could
cause spark build-up and ignite petrol
fumes, leading to fire and injury.
IMPORTANT
Mixing different types of fuel or the use of
fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's
guarantees, and any associated service
agreement. This applies to all engines.
NOTE: It does not apply to cars with
engines that are adapted to run on ethanol
fuel (E85).
NOTE
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that
could affect the car's performance.
Catalytic converters
The purpose of the catalytic converters is to
purify exhaust gases. They are located close
to the engine so that operating temperature is
reached quickly.
The catalytic converters consist of a monolith
(ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel
walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/
rhodium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a
chemical reaction without being used up
themselves.
Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor
The Lambda-sond is part of a control system
intended to reduce emissions and improve
fuel economy.
An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine.
This value is fed into an electronic system
that continuously controls the injectors. The
ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is
continuously adjusted. These adjustments
create optimal conditions for efficient combustion, and together with the three-way catalytic converter reduce harmful emissions
(hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous
oxides).
Diesel
Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use diesel of dubious quality. Diesel should fulfil the EN 590 or JIS K2204
standards. Diesel engines are sensitive to
contaminants in the fuel, such as excessively
high volumes of sulphur particles for example.
07
At low temperatures (-6 °C to -40 °C), a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel,
which may lead to ignition problems. Special
diesel fuel designed for low temperatures
around freezing point is available from the
301
07 During your journey
Fuel
major oil companies. This fuel is less viscous
at low temperatures and reduces the risk of
paraffin precipitate.
The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is
reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When
refuelling, check that the area around the fuel
filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the
paintwork. Wash off any spillage with detergent and water.
IMPORTANT
Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European
diesel standard.
The sulphur content must be a maximum
of 50 ppm.
Diesel type fuels that must not be used:
•
•
•
•
Special additives
1
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and push it in to the end position (see page 84).
Marine diesel fuel
2. Press the START button without
depressing the brake and/or clutch pedal.
Heating oil
3. Wait approx. 1 minute.
FAME1
4. To start the engine: Depress the brake
and/or clutch pedal and then press the
START button again.
(Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) and
vegetable oil.
These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in
accordance with Volvo recommendations
and generate increased wear and engine
damage that is not covered by the Volvo
warranty.
Empty tank
The design of the fuel system in a diesel
engine means that if the vehicle runs out of
fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the
workshop in order to restart the engine after
fuelling.
Once the engine has stopped due to fuel
starvation, the fuel system needs a few
moments to carry out a check. Do this before
starting the engine, once the fuel tank has
been filled with diesel:
07
302
IMPORTANT
Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of FAME, but further amounts must not be added.
NOTE
Before filling with fuel in the event of fuel
shortage:
•
Stop the car on as flat/level ground as
possible - if the car is tilting there is a
risk of air pockets in the fuel supply.
Draining condensation from the fuel
filter
The fuel filter separates condensation from
the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine
operation.
The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet
or if you suspect that the car has been filled
with contaminated fuel.
07 During your journey
Fuel
IMPORTANT
Certain special additives remove the water
separation in the fuel filter.
Diesel particle filter (DPF)
Diesel cars are equipped with a particle filter,
which results in more efficient emission control. The particles in the exhaust gases are
collected in the filter during normal driving.
So-called "regeneration" is started in order to
burn away the particles and empty the filter.
This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature.
Regeneration of the particle filter is automatic
and normally takes 10-20 minutes. It may
take a little longer at a low average speed.
Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration.
During regeneration, charging of the hybrid
battery is activated temporarily in the background, which is similar to the SAVE function,
see page 125.
Regeneration in cold weather
If the car is frequently driven short distances
in cold weather then the engine does not
reach normal operating temperature. This
means that regeneration of the diesel particle
filter does not take place and the filter is not
emptied.
When the filter has become approx. 80% full
of particles, a yellow warning triangle is
shown in the combined instrument panel, and
the message Soot filter full See manual is
shown in its display.
Start regeneration of the filter by driving the
car until the engine reaches normal operating
temperature, preferably on a main road or
motorway. The car should then be driven for
approximately 20 minutes more.
NOTE
The following may arise during regeneration:
•
a smaller reduction of engine power
may be noticed temporarily
•
fuel consumption may increase temporarily
•
a smell of burning may arise.
IMPORTANT
If the filter fills up with particles then it can
be difficult to start the engine and the filter
will be incapable of functioning. Then there
is a risk that the filter will have to be
replaced.
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Fuel consumption figures may change if the
car is equipped with extra equipment that
affects the car's weight. See information on
weights page 390 and table page 398.
The manner in which the car is driven, and
other non-technical factors can also affect
fuel consumption.
NOTE
When regeneration is complete the warning
text is cleared automatically.
Extreme weather conditions, driving with a
trailer or driving at high altitudes in combination with fuel grade are factors that
could affect the car's performance.
Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the
engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
07
303
07 During your journey
Charging - hybrid battery
Hybrid battery
In addition to the fuel tank, as in a conventional car, the car is equipped with a
rechargeable battery of the Lithium-ion type
(hybrid battery).
If the hybrid battery's temperature is below
-10 ºC or above 30 ºC then it may mean that
some of the car's functions are changed or
unavailable because the capacity of the
hybrid battery is reduced outside this temperature range. Examples of this are drive
mode PURE (see page 124) which is not
optional if the battery temperature is too low
or too high.
page 309. The charging current is mainly
used for battery charging, but is also used for
preconditioning the car, see page 225.
NOTE
•
Charging time varies depending on the current intensity of the 230 VAC socket.
See examples in the following table:
Current intensity (A)
Charging time
(hours)
6
7,5–10,0
10
4,5–7,0
16
4,0–5,5
If the weather is very cold or very hot
then some of the charging current is
used to heat/cool the hybrid battery
and the passenger compartment (preconditioning), which results in a longer
charging time.
•
The charging time is extended if preconditioning has been selected. The
time required depends mainly on the
outside temperature.
For more information on preconditioning,
see page 225.
WARNING
The hybrid battery must only be replaced
by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Charging current
07
The charging cable between the car and a
230 VAC socket can be set for loads of different current intensities (6-16 A)1 via the control
unit, see page 306. When the charging cable
is activated the combined instrument panel
shows a message and a lamp illuminates in
the car's charging input socket, see
1
304
Amperes may vary depending on market.
Charging cable plug and charging input socket.
07 During your journey
Charging - hybrid battery
To bear in mind
Example 3
Normally several 230 VAC sockets are
included in a fuse circuit, so additional consumers (e.g. lighting, vacuum cleaner, electric
drill, etc.) can be on the same fuse.
If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A
socket and the control unit is set at 6 A, then
the car will only draw 6 A from the 230 VAC
mains power circuit. Battery charging will of
course take longer, but then additional consumers can be connected at the same time to
the same socket (or fuse circuit) as long as
the total load does not exceed the capacity of
the fuse circuit.
Example 1
If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A
socket and the control unit is set at 16 A,
then the car will attempt to draw 16 A from
the 230 VAC mains power circuit - after a
while the overloaded 10 A fuse for the socket
will be tripped and battery charging stopped.
Charging cable
Enclosure class
Ambient temperature
IP67
-25 ºC to +50 ºC
WARNING
The charging cable must not be used if
any part of it is damaged - there is then
the risk of electric shock or serious personal injury.
A damaged or inoperative charging cable
must only be repaired by a workshop - an
authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
In which case, reset the fuse for the socket
and select a lower charging current on the
control unit, see page 309.
Example 2
If the car is connected to a 230 VAC/10 A
socket and the control unit is set at 10 A,
then the car will draw 10 A from the 230 VAC
mains power circuit. If additional consumers
are connected to the same socket (or another
socket in the same fuse circuit) then there is a
risk that the fuse for the socket/fuse socket
will be overloaded and triggered, at which
point battery charging is stopped.
Specifications, charging cable
IMPORTANT
The charging cable must be connected to
its own 230 VAC socket that has no other
load.
The charging cable is located in the storage
compartment under the cargo area's floor cover.
07
In which case, reset the socket/fuse circuit
and select a lower charging current on the
control unit, see page 309 - or disconnect
other consumers.
305
07 During your journey
Charging - hybrid battery
Control unit
No.
Symbol
Function
Indicator - shows the
selected charging current 6-16 AA.
Switch - On (On)/ Off
(Off)
An adapter between the 230 VAC socket
and charging cable may only be used if the
adapter is marked with approval in accordance with IEC 61851 and IEC 62196.
Illuminated when the
charging cable is plugged into a 230 VAC
socket.
Control for increasing or
decreasing the charging
current.
Illuminated when the
charging cable is plugged into the car's
230 VAC input socket.
A
07
Control unit display and controls.
306
IMPORTANT
Multiple plugs, overvoltage protection or
similar devices must not be used together
with the charging cable since this may
involve a risk of fire, electric shock, etc.
Amperes may vary depending on market.
07 During your journey
Charging - hybrid battery
Control unit display
Display (see preceding illustration)
Status
Specification
Recommended action
The indicator for charging current (1) is
extinguished. The car symbol (5) illuminates
in green.
Standby
•
•
The car's connection is found.
Wait until the battery is fully charged.
The lamp for maximum charging current
illuminates in yellow. Existing current consumption is shown with a green indicator
(1). The car symbol (5) flashes green.
Charging in
progress.
•
The car's electronics have started
charging.
•
Charging in progress.
The indicator for charging current (1) is
extinguished. The car symbol (5) illuminates
with a constant green glow.
Charging is finished.
•
The battery is fully charged.
The indicator for charging current is extinguished. The car symbol (5) flashes red.
Charging is not
possible.
•
There is a communication error
between the control unit and the
car.
•
The ventilation for the car's electronics is not adequate, not activated or defective.
Charging is possible but has not
yet been activated by the electronics in the car.
Wait until the battery is fully charged.
1. Finish charging, see page 310.
2. The car is ready for use.
1. Check all connections or use
another 230 VAC socket.
2. Restart the battery charging.
07
}}
307
07 During your journey
Charging - hybrid battery
Display (see preceding illustration)
Status
Specification
Recommended action
The car symbol (5) illuminates with a constant red glow.
Charging is not
possible.
•
1. Unplug the charging cable from
the 230 VAC socket.
The ground fault breaker on the
charging cable has triggered.
2. Set the control unit's switch to
Off/(Off), then On/(On) - then the
ground fault breaker is reset and
the unit restarts.
The indicator (1) for charging current and
the house symbol (3) flash red.
Charging
Charging is not
possible.
Before charging
WARNING
07
1
308
•
Charging the hybrid battery must only
take place from approved grounded
230 VAC sockets.
•
The control unit's ground fault breaker
protects the car, but there may still be
a risk of overloading the 230 VAC
mains power circuit.
•
Avoid visible worn or damaged mains
sockets since they may lead to fire
damage and/or personal injury if used.
•
Never use an extension cable.
Amperes may vary depending on market.
Temperature monitoring has triggered
for the 230 VAC socket.
IMPORTANT
•
The control unit should not be flooded
or immersed in water.
•
Avoid direct sunlight.
Restart charging. If the problem persists - consult a qualified professional.
IMPORTANT
•
Check that the 230 V socket has adequate power supply for charging electric vehicles - in the event of uncertainty the socket must be checked by
a qualified professional.
•
If the socket has unknown current
intensity - use the lowest level on the
control unit.
On the charging cable's control unit, set the
required charging current 6-16 A1. On delivery, the lowest possible charging current is
preset. Maximum possible charging current
07 During your journey
Charging - hybrid battery
can only be selected when the control unit is
activated with the On/(On) button.
Take the charging cable from the storage
compartment under the cargo area floor.
Opening/closing the cover for the
charging input socket
Connect the charging cable to the car.
Connect the charging cable to a 230 VAC
socket. Never use an extension cord.
4. The charging cable's plug is fastened/
locked in and charging starts after
approx. 10 seconds.
To check the remaining charging time:
•
Press in the rear section of the cover and
release.
Open the cover.
Press the remote control key's button
for Approach lighting - the combined
instrument panel then shows the estimated time.
Battery charging can be interrupted for a
while if the car is unlocked:
Pull away the cover for the charging input
socket and secure it inside the cover.
Close the cover for the charging input socket
in reverse order.
Activate the control unit with its power
switch On/(On).
Starting charging
Set the correct charging current (for current 230 VAC socket) on the control unit,
see page 304.
•
and the door is opened - charging
restarts after 2 minutes.
•
without the door being opened - the
car is relocked automatically, see
page 60. Charging restarts after
1 minute.
07
}}
309
07 During your journey
Charging - hybrid battery
IMPORTANT
Never unplug the charging cable from the
230 VAC socket while charging is in progress - there is then a risk of damaging the
230 VAC socket.
passenger compartment lighting has been
switched off.
5. When charging is complete (see following
table) - open the driver's door. Then the
combined instrument panel illuminates
and can show information about charge
status.
LED lamps in the charging input socket
A
B
C
Specification
White constant
LED light
Yellow constant
Waiting modeA - waiting for charging to
start.
Green flashing
Charging in progressB.
Green constant
Charging completeC.
Blue - flashing or
constant
Timer switched on.
Red - flashing or
constant
A fault has arisen.
For example, after a door has been opened or the charging
cable's plug is not locked in.
The slower the flashing, the closer to fully charged.
Extinguishes after a while.
Condensation
07
The LED lamps show the current status during ongoing charging. The white, blue, red
and yellow lamps are activated when the passenger compartment lighting is switched on they remain switched on for a while after the
310
LED lamp glow
Condensation from the air conditioning may
drip under the car during charging. This is
normal and takes place due to cooling of the
hybrid battery.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Finish charging
NOTE
To be able to detach the charging cable
glove from the car's 230 VAC intake, the
car must first be unlocked using the
remote control key/PCC.
Unlock the car with the remote control
key/PCC* - the charging cable's locked
plug releases/is unlocked.
07 During your journey
Charging - hybrid battery
Switch off the control unit with its switch
Off/(Off).
Charging with the diesel engine
The hybrid battery can also
be charged by the car's diesel engine, see page 123.
Temperature fuse
Temperature monitoring is activated automatically when the car's hybrid battery starts
charging. If a critical temperature is reached
then the charging current is lowered.
IMPORTANT
Ground fault breaker
Unplug the cable from the car's electrical
input socket, refit the charging input
socket's cover and close the hatch, see
page 308.
The control unit has a built-in ground fault
breaker that protects the car, and also the
user, from electric shocks caused by system
faults.
If temperature monitoring has automatically reduced the charging current repeatedly, battery charging must be terminated
and the cause of the overheat must be
investigated and rectified.
IMPORTANT
The control unit's earth fault switch does
not protect the 230 VAC socket.
Temperature monitoring during
charging
Unplug the cable from the 230 VAC
socket.
Return the charging cable to the storage
space under the cargo area floor.
In order for the car to be charged safely every
time, the control unit has a built-in monitoring
device for the charging current which ensures
that the permissible charging current is automatically adjusted in order to take account of
safety concerns. This ensures safe operation
without supervision as well as optimised
charging time.
07
311
07 During your journey
Loading
General information on loading
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
The total of the weight of the passengers and
all accessories reduces the car's payload by
a corresponding weight. For more detailed
information on weights, see page 390.
The tailgate is opened via a button
on the lighting panel or the remote
control key, see page 62.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on the weight and distribution
of the load.
To bear in mind when loading
•
07
312
Position the load firmly against the rear
seat's backrest.
Note that objects must not prevent the function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if
any of the rear seat's backrests is folded
down,see page 28.
•
•
Centre the load.
•
Cover sharp edges with something soft to
avoid damaging the upholstery.
Heavy objects should be placed as low
as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on
lowered backrests.
•
Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings.
WARNING
A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a
frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h,
carry the impact of an item weighing
1000 kg.
WARNING
The protection provided by the inflatable
curtain in the headlining may be compromised or eliminated by high loads.
•
Never load cargo above the backrest.
WARNING
Always secure the load. During heavy
braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.
Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with
something soft.
Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long
items. Otherwise you may accidentally
knock the gear lever or gear selector with
the load into a drive position - and the car
could then move off.
Front seat
The passenger seat backrest can also be
folded for an extra long load, see page 86.
Roof load
Using load carriers
To avoid damaging the car and for maximum
possible safety while driving, the load carriers
designed by Volvo are recommended.
Carefully follow the installation instructions
supplied with the carriers.
•
Check periodically that the load carriers
and load are properly secured. Lash the
load securely with retaining straps.
•
Distribute the load evenly over the load
carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the
bottom.
•
The size of the area exposed to the wind,
and therefore fuel consumption, increase
with the size of the load.
•
Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration,
heavy braking and hard cornering.
WARNING
The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads. For
information on maximum permitted roof
load, including load carriers and any space
box, see page 390.
07 During your journey
Loading
Lowering the rear seat backrest
12 V electrical socket*
NOTE
To simplify loading in the cargo area, the rear
seat backrest can be folded down, see
page 88.
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo. For information on the
use of Volvo's recommended temporary
emergency puncture repair (TMK), see
page 338.
Load retaining eyelets
Lower the cover to access the electrical
socket.
•
The folding load retaining eyelets are used to
fasten straps in order to anchor items in the
cargo area.
WARNING
Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects that are
loose or protrude could cause injury during
heavy braking.
Always secure large and heavy objects
with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.
The socket also provides voltage when
the remote control key is not in the ignition switch.
IMPORTANT
Max. power takeoff is 10 A (120 W).
07
NOTE
Remember that using the electrical socket
with the engine switched off involves the
risk of discharging the car's battery.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
313
07 During your journey
Cargo area
Safety net*
•
A rollable safety net comprising two cassettes
has a storage space under the cargo area
floor hatch.
Using the safety net
Removing the cassettes takes place in
reverse order.
The net can also be used when the rear
seat's backrests are folded forward.
Removing the net cassettes
1. Roll the safety nets into the cassettes in
accordance with the procedure in the
section entitled "Using the safety net",
but in reverse.
Securing the net cassettes
2. Fold the whole backrest forward.
3. Slide the cassettes out until they loosen
from the anchor rails.
Store the cassettes in their compartment
under the cargo area floor hatch.
WARNING
The two-part safety net cassette is secured
on the rear of the backrest. The narrowest
cassette is secured on the left-hand side
(seen from the tailgate).
07
Pull up the right-hand section of the net
using its strap.
1. Fold the rear seat's backrest forward, see
page 89.
Insert the rod in the mounting on the
right-hand side and then press it forward
– the rod locks in with a click.
2. Align the cassette's anchor rails in front of
the backrest attachment lugs
.
Pull out the rod's telescope section and
click it in on the other side.
3. Slide the cassette into the attachment
lugs
.
Pull up the left-hand safety net and hook
it into the rod.
4. Fold back and lock the backrests.
314
Pull the net up from the cassettes. The net is
self-locking after about 1 minute if the rear
seat's backrests are raised.
•
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Folding up takes place in reverse order.
Loads in the cargo area must be firmly
secured, even if the safety net is correctly
fitted.
07 During your journey
Cargo area
Safety net combined with cargo cover
Safety grille*
desired, the safety grille can be dismantled
and removed from the car.
For information about the tools required and
methods for fitting/removal, see the installation instructions that were included with the
initial purchase.
For safety reasons, the safety grille must
always be correctly fastened and secured
when being refitted.
Cargo cover*
Puller-straps for raising the net.
The safety net can also be raised from the
rear seat when the cargo cover is extended.
Follow the procedure in the section entitled
"Using the safety net". The straps for raising
are located by the arrows.
A safety grille prevents loads or pets from
being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking.
Folding up
Take hold of the bottom of the safety grille
and pull back/up.
IMPORTANT
The safety grille cannot be folded up or
down when a cargo cover is fitted.
07
Fitting/removal
The safety grille is normally permanently
installed in the car because it can easily be
folded up in the roof and so be out of the way
if a longer cargo area is required. However, if
Pull the cargo cover over the load and hook it
into the recesses at the cargo area's rear
posts.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
315
07 During your journey
Cargo area
IMPORTANT
The safety grille cannot be folded up or
down when the cargo cover is fitted.
Attaching the cargo cover
Move one end piece of the cover into the
recess on the side panel.
Move the other end piece into the corresponding recess.
Press both sides in. A "click" should be
audible and the red marking should disappear.
> Check that both end pieces are
locked.
Removing the cargo cover
1. Press in one end piece button and lift it
out.
2. Carefully angle the cover up/out and the
other end piece loosens automatically.
07
Lowering the cargo cover's rear sealing
disc
In its rolled-in position, the cargo cover's rear
sealing disc protrudes horizontally into the
cargo area when it is fitted.
–
316
Pull the sealing disc back gently, free
from its support shelves, and lower.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
General
Payload depends on the car's kerb weight.
The total of the weight of the passengers and
all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's
payload by a corresponding weight. For more
detailed information on weights, see
page 390.
If the towing bracket is mounted by Volvo,
then the car is delivered with the necessary
equipment for driving with a trailer.
•
The car's towing bracket must be of an
approved type.
•
If the towbar is retrofitted, check with
your Volvo dealer that the car is fully
equipped for driving with a trailer.
•
Distribute the load on the trailer so that
the weight on the towing bracket complies with the specified maximum towball
load.
•
Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load. For tyre
pressure label location, see page 336.
•
The engine is loaded more heavily than
usual when driving with a trailer.
•
Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is
brand new. Wait until it has been driven
at least 1000 km.
•
The brakes are loaded much more than
usual on long and steep downhill slopes.
Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your
speed.
•
For safety reasons, the maximum permitted speed for the car when coupled with
a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow
the regulations in force for the permitted
speeds and weights.
•
Maintain a low speed when driving with a
trailer up long, steep ascents.
•
Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of
more than 12%.
Trailer weights
For information on Volvo's permitted trailer
weights, see page 392.
NOTE
The stated maximum permitted trailer
weights are those permitted by Volvo.
National vehicle regulations can further
limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars
can be certified for higher towing weights
than the car can actually tow.
Trailer cable
WARNING
An adapter is required if the car's towing
bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer
has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable
approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does
not drag on the ground.
Direction indicators and brake lights on
the trailer
If any of the trailer's lamps for direction indicators are broken, then the combined instrument panel's symbol for direction indicators
flashes faster than normal and the information
display shows the text Bulb fail - Ind. signal
trailer.
If any of the trailer's lamps for the brake light
are broken then the Bulb fail - Stop lamp
trailer text is shown.
Follow the stated recommendations for
trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and
trailer may be difficult to control in the
event of sudden movement and braking.
Automatic gearbox
Overheating
When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a
hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.
•
An automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine
speed.
•
In the event of overheating a warning
symbol is illuminated in the combined
instrument panel with a message that is
07
317
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
shown in the information display - follow
the recommendation given.
Steep inclines
•
Do not lock the automatic transmission in
a higher gear than the engine "can cope
with" - it is not always a good idea to
drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions.
Towing bracket
WARNING
If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable
towbar:
Parking on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Activate the parking brake.
3. Move the gear selector to position P.
4. Release the foot brake.
•
•
07
Move the gear selector to park position P
when parking an automatic car with a
hitched trailer. Always use the parking
brake.
Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill.
Starting on a hill
1. Depress the foot brake.
2. Move the gear selector to driving position D.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Release the foot brake and start driving
off.
318
Storing the detachable towbar
If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar, the installation instructions for the loose
section must be followed carefully, see
page 319.
•
Follow the installation instructions
carefully.
•
The detachable section must be
locked with the key before setting off.
•
Check that the indicator window
shows green.
Important checks
•
The towbar's towball must be cleaned
and greased regularly.
NOTE
If a towball hitch with vibration damper is
used, it is not necessary to grease the
towball.
Towbar storage space.
IMPORTANT
Always remove the towbar after use and
store it in the appointed location in the car.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
Attaching the towbar
Dimensions, mounting points (mm)
A
998
B
80
C
854
D
427
E
109
F
282
G
Side member
H
Ball centre
Remove the protective cover by first
pressing in the catch
and then pulling
the cover straight back
.
G021487
G021485
G018928
Specifications
Ensure that the mechanism is in the
unlocked position by turning the key
clockwise.
07
}}
319
07 During your journey
The indicator window must show red.
The indicator window must show green.
G021494
G021490
G021488
Driving with a trailer
Check that the towbar is secure by pulling it up, down and back.
WARNING
Insert the towbar until you hear a click.
07
320
G000000
G021489
If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it
must be detached and reattached in
accordance with the previous instructions.
Turn the key anticlockwise to locked
position. Remove the key from the lock.
IMPORTANT
Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch,
the remainder of the towbar should be
clean and dry.
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
WARNING
Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in
the car, see page 318.
G021495
Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the
unlocked position.
WARNING
Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable
to the correct place.
G018929
Safety cable.
Push in the locking wheel
and turn it
until you hear a click.
anticlockwise
Push the protective cover until it snaps
tight.
Trailer stabiliser - TSA1
Removing the towbar
The TSA system (Trailer Stability Assist)
serves to stabilise the car and trailer combination if it begins to snake.
Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it
comes to a stop. Hold it in this position
while pulling the towbar rearward and
upward.
1
The TSA function is part of the DSTC system
(Dynamic Stability and Traction Control), see
page 146.
07
Function
The snaking phenomenon can occur with any
car/trailer combination. Snaking normally
Included in the installation of Volvo genuine towbar.
321
07 During your journey
Driving with a trailer
occurs at high speed. But, there is a risk of it
occurring at lower speeds (70-90 km/h) if the
trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly
distributed, e.g. too far back.
combination is once again stable, the TSA
system stops regulating and the driver once
again has full control of the car.
In order for snaking to occur, there must be a
triggering factor, e.g.:
The TSA system can engage within the speed
interval 60 to 160 km/h.
•
Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and
powerful side wind.
•
Car with trailer drives on an uneven road
surface or in a pothole.
•
Sweeping steering wheel movements.
Operation
If snaking has started, it could be difficult or
even impossible to suppress. This makes the
car/trailer combination difficult to control and
there is a risk that you could, for example,
end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway.
07
TSA system continually monitors car movements, particularly lateral movements. If
snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually braked. This serves to stabilise the
car/trailer combination. This is often enough
to help the driver regain control of the car.
If snaking is not eliminated the first time the
TSA system comes into action, the car/trailer
combination is braked with all wheels and
engine power is reduced. Once snaking has
been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer
322
Miscellaneous
NOTE
TSA function is switched off if the driver
selects Sport mode, see page 146.
TSA may fail to engage if the driver uses
severe steering wheel movements to try to
rectify the snaking because in such a situation the TSA system cannot determine
whether it is the trailer or the driver that is
causing the snaking.
The DSTC symbol in the combined
instrument panel flashes when the
TSA system is working.
07 During your journey
Towing and recovery
Towing
Towing eye
The towing eye is screwed into a threaded
socket behind a cover on the rear right-hand
side of the bumper.
WARNING
Towing the V60 Plug-in Hybrid is not permitted. When moving the car it must be
transported raised up with all the wheels
on the recovery vehicle's platform.
Attaching the towing eye
The towing eye may be used to pull the car
up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed
platform if:
•
•
The slope of the recovery vehicle's
ramp does not exceed 12 degrees
from a horizontal plane
The car's wheels rotate freely and roll
straight forward.
No one/nothing is allowed to remain
behind the recovery vehicle while the car
pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
Jump starting
Do not tow the car to bump start the engine.
Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged and the engine does not start, see
page 121.
IMPORTANT
The electric drive motor and the catalytic
converter may be damaged during
attempts to tow-start the car.
07
323
07 During your journey
Towing and recovery
Take out the towing eye, which is located
behind the panel on the left-hand side of
the cargo area.
IMPORTANT
The towing eye is only designed for towing
other vehicles on roads - not for pulling
the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a
recovery service for recovery assistance.
The cover for the towing eye's attachment point is available in two variants
which must be opened in different ways:
•
•
Open the variant with a recess using a
coin or similar inserted in the recess,
turning it outwards. Then turn out the
cover completely and remove it.
The second variant has a marking
along one side or in a corner: Press the
marking with a finger and fold out the
opposite side/corner at the same time
using a coin or similar - the cover turns
around its axis and can then be
removed.
Screw the towing eye right in up to its
flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g.
using the wheel wrench.
After use, unscrew the towing eye and
return it to its place.
07
324
Finish by refitting the cover onto the
bumper.
Recovery
Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.
The towing eye must be used to pull the car
up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform if:
•
The slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp
does not exceed 12 degrees from a horizontal plane
•
The car's wheels rotate freely and roll
straight forward.
WARNING
No one/nothing is allowed to remain
behind the recovery vehicle while the car
pulled up onto the flatbed platform.
IMPORTANT
Note that the V60 Plug-in Hybrid must
always be transported raised up with all
the wheels on the recovery vehicle's platform.
07 During your journey
07
325
General .................................................................................................
Changing wheels ..................................................................................
Tyre pressure .......................................................................................
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*..........................................................
Emergency puncture repair (TMK) .......................................................
326
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
328
333
336
337
338
WHEELS AND TYRES
08 Wheels and tyres
General
Driving characteristics
Tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre
pressure and speed rating are important for
how the car performs.
Tyres with the greatest tread depth should
always be fitted to the rear of the car (to
decrease the risk of skidding).
New tyres
NOTE
Ensure that tyres of the same type and
dimensions, and also the same make, are
fitted to all four wheels.
Direction of rotation
Follow the recommended tyre pressures
specified in the tyre pressure table, see
page 400.
Tyre care
G021778
Tyre age
The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.
08
328
Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed
to only turn in one direction have the direction
of rotation marked with an arrow. The tyre
must always rotate in the same direction
throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only be
switched between front and rear positions,
never between left and right-hand sides, or
vice versa. If the tyres are fitted incorrectly,
the car's braking characteristics and capacity
to force rain and slush out of the way are
adversely affected.
All tyres older than 6 years old should be
checked by an expert even if they seem
undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even
if they are hardly ever or never used. The
function can therefore be affected. This
applies to all tyres that are stored for future
use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are
cracks or discoloration.
Tyres are perishable. After a few years they
begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh
tyres as possible when you replace them.
This is especially important with regard to
winter tyres. The last four digits in the
sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking
(Department of Transportation), and this is
stated with four digits, for example 1510. The
tyre in the illustration was manufactured in
week 15 of 2010.
Summer and winter tyres
When summer and winter wheels are
changed the wheels should be marked with
08 Wheels and tyres
General
Wear and maintenance
The correct tyre pressure results in more even
wear, see page 336. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how
quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear
patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can
be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km
and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised
Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth)
between tyres have already occurred, the
least worn tyres must always be placed on
the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than
having the rear end skidding to one side,
resulting in possible complete loss of control
over the car. This is why it is important for the
rear wheels never to lose grip before the front
wheels.
Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging up - and not standing up.
Rims and wheel bolts
WARNING
A damaged tyre can lead to loss of control
of the car.
IMPORTANT
The wheel bolts must be tightened to
140 Nm. Overtightening can damage the
nuts and the bolts.
Tyres with tread wear indicators
Only use rims that are tested and approved
by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories. Check the torque with a torque
wrench.
Locking wheel bolts*
Locking wheel bolts* can be used on both
aluminium and steel rims.
G021829
which side of the car they were mounted on,
for example L for left and R for right.
Tools
Tread wear indicators.
Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless
bands across the width of the tread. On the
side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread
Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth
is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be
level in height with the tread wear indicators.
Change to new tyres as soon as possible.
Remember that tyres with little tread depth
provide very poor grip in rain and snow.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08
329
08 Wheels and tyres
General
The car's towing eye and emergency puncture repair kit are located behind the hatch on
the left-hand side of the cargo area. There is
also space for the sleeve for the lockable
wheel bolts. Jack* and wheel bolt wrench* are
located in a bag on the cargo area floor.
Tools - returning into place
WARNING
The bag should be secured so that the
white arrow (see the inset figure) points
forward in the car.
NOTE
If the car is not equipped with the accessory
spare wheel then the jack need not be stored
in the car.
If the floor hatch in the cargo area floor is
not closed then privacy locking does not
work, see page 52.
WARNING
When the towing eye and emergency
puncture repair kit are stored in the foam
block, they must always be strapped in
using the tensioning strap.
Jack*
The original jack should only be used for
changing to the spare wheel. The jack's
thread must always be well greased.
08
330
Winter tyres
The white arrow must point toward the front of
the car.
After use, crank the jack together and screw
apart the towing eye and wheel bolt wrench.
Place the wheel bolt wrench and the jack in
their respective compartments in the bag.
Tighten the bag's centre strap firmly and use
the other strap to secure the bag in the rear
load retaining eyelet on the left-hand side of
the cargo area. Position the bag so it is not
pinched when the tailgate is closed. The
white arrow on the bag must point toward the
front of the car. Refit the towing eye in the
foam block on the left-hand side of the cargo
area.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter
tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted
to all four wheels.
NOTE
Volvo recommends that you consult a
Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and
tyre types are most suitable.
Studded tyres
Studded winter tyres should be run in gently
for 500-1000 km so the studs settle properly
into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life.
08 Wheels and tyres
General
NOTE
The legal provisions for the use of studded
tyres vary from country to country.
Tread depth
Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands
on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo
therefore recommends not to drive on winter
tyres that have a tread depth of less than
4 millimetres.
Using snow chains
Snow chains may only be used on the front
wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars).
Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow
chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this
wears out both the snow chains and tyres.
WARNING
Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model,
and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event
of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you
consult an authorised Volvo workshop.
The wrong snow chains may cause serious
damage to your car and lead to an accident.
Specifications
The car has whole vehicle approval. This
means that certain combinations of wheels
and tyres are approved. For the permissible
combinations, see page 399
Wheel (rim) dimensions
Wheels (rims) have a designation of dimensions, for example: 7Jx16x50.
17
Rim diameter in inches (")
97
Codes for the maximum permitted
tyre load, tyre load index (LI)
W
Speed rating for maximum permitted
speed, speed rating (SS). (In this
case 270 km/h).
Load index
7
Rim width in inches
J
Rim flange profile
16
Rim diameter in inches
Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a
load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres.
Minimum permitted index is specified in the
table, see page 399.
50
Off-set in mm (distance from wheel
centre to wheel contact surface
against the hub)
Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum
speed, a speed rating (Speed Symbol; SS).
Tyre dimensions
The dimensions are stated on all car tyres.
Example of designation:
235/45R17 97W.
235
Tyre width (mm)
45
Ratio between tyre wall height and
tyre width (%)
R
Radial ply
Speed ratings
Tyre speed class must at least correspond
with the car's top speed. Minimum permitted
speed rating is specified in the table, see
page 399.
The only exception to these conditions is winter tyres (both those with metal studs and
those without), where a lower speed rating
may be used. If such a tyre is chosen, the car
must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be
driven at a maximum of 160 km/h).
08
331
08 Wheels and tyres
General
Traffic regulations determine how fast a car
can be driven, not the speed rating of the
tyres.
NOTE
It is the maximum permitted speed that is
stated in the table.
Q
160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)
T
190 km/h
H
210 km/h
V
240 km/h
W
270 km/h
Y
300 km/h
WARNING
The car must be fitted with tyres which
have the same or a higher load index (LI)
and speed rating (SS) than specified. If a
tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat.
08
332
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
Spare wheel*
The following instructions only apply if a
spare wheel has been purchased as an
accessory for the car. If the car is not equipped with a spare wheel, see page 338 for
information on the temporary mobility kit
(TMK).
The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only
intended for use temporarily and must be
replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as
possible. The car's handling may be altered
by the use of the spare wheel. The spare
wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The
car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not
machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is
fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow
chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive
cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be
repaired. The correct tyre pressure for the
spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure
table, see page 399.
IMPORTANT
Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a
spare wheel on the car.
Before changing a wheel
IMPORTANT
1. Loosen the straps, lift out the spare wheel
from the cargo area and remove it from
the spare wheel bag.
The car must never be driven fitted with
more than one temporary spare wheel.
2. To access the towing eye, open the hatch
on the left-hand side of the cargo area.
The spare wheel is supplied in a bag which
must be secured on the cargo area floor
using straps.
Turn the handle on the spare wheel bag out
towards you. Attach the sewn-in tensioning
strap hooks in the front load retaining eyelets.
Attach the long strap into one of the front
load retaining eyelets, run the strap diagonally
over the spare wheel and through the upper
handle. Tighten the short tensioning strap
onto the long one. Attach the rear load retaining eyelet and tighten.
3. Take out the jack* and the wheel bolt
wrench* (which is located in a bag on the
cargo area floor - see figure on page
335). If another jack is selected, see
page 346
WARNING
Check that the jack is not damaged, that
the threads are thoroughly lubricated and
that it is free from dirt.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
08
333
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
NOTE
Removing
If the car is not equipped with the
accessory spare wheel then the jack
need not be stored in the car.
1. Apply the parking brake (see page 136)
and engage reverse gear, or position P if
the car has an automatic gearbox.
•
Volvo recommends only using the jack*
that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's
label.
2. Place chocks in front of and behind the
wheels which will remain on the ground.
Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones
for example.
•
The decal also indicates the jack's
maximum lift capacity at a specified lifting height.
3. Screw together the towing eye with the
wheel wrench* until the stop position as
illustrated below.
•
NOTE
4. Loosen the wheel bolts ½-1 turn anticlockwise with the wheel wrench.
WARNING
Never position anything between the
ground and the jack, nor between the jack
and the car's jacking point.
5. There are two jacking points on each side
of the car. There is a recess in the plastic
cover at each point. Crank the foot of the
jack down so it is pressed squarely on the
ground.
The car's regular jack is designed only for
use occasionally and for a short time, such
as when changing a wheel with a punctured tyre, switching between summer
tyres and winter tyres, etc. Only the jack
belonging to the specific model is to be
used to jack up the car. If the car is to be
jacked up more often, or for a longer time
than is required just to change a wheel,
use of a garage jack is recommended. In
this instance, follow the instructions for
use that come with the equipment.
IMPORTANT
08
334
4. Set up the warning triangle, see
page 337 if a wheel must be replaced at
a busy location. The car and jack* must
be on a firm horizontal surface.
The towing eye must be screwed into all
threads in the wheel bolt wrench.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
IMPORTANT
The ground must be firm, smooth and
level.
08 Wheels and tyres
Changing wheels
6. Lift the car so that the wheel is free.
Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the
wheel.
WARNING
Never crawl under the car when it is raised
on the jack.
Passengers must leave the car when it is
raised on the jack.
Installation
1. Clean the contact surfaces between
wheel and hub.
Park the car so that passengers have the
car - or preferably a crash barrier between them and the road.
2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts
thoroughly.
3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot
rotate.
The white arrow must point toward the front of
the car.
5. Screw apart the towing eye and the wheel
bolt wrench. Place the wheel bolt wrench
and the jack in their respective compartments in the bag. Tighten the bag's centre strap firmly and use the other strap to
secure the bag in the rear load retaining
eyelet on the left-hand side of the cargo
area. Position the bag so it is not pinched
when the tailgate is closed. The white
arrow on the bag must point toward the
front of the car.
4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is
important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm. Check
the torque with a torque wrench.
WARNING
The bag should be secured so that the
white arrow (see the inset figure) points
forward in the car.
08
335
08 Wheels and tyres
Tyre pressure
Tyre pressure
Press one edge of the cover (without the hole)
into place (nearest the tyre - B). Then fold the
cover in toward the wheel rim - and at the
same time, gently press down the angled top
edge in order to help it in under the edge of
the wheel rim. Check that the cover is flush
with the surface of the wheel rim - if not, gently press in the part that is bulging out.
G021830
NOTE
The tyre pressure label on the driver side's
door pillar (between frame and rear door)
shows the tyre pressures for the car's recommended tyre size. This is also specified in the
tyre pressure table, see page 400.
NOTE
Temperature differences change the
tyre pressure.
08
336
•
Check the tyre pressure when the
tyres are cold. "Cold tyres" means that
the tyres are at the same temperature
as the outdoor temperature. The tyres
will heat up and the tyre pressures will
increase after driving for a few kilometres.
•
Tyre pressures which are too low will
increase fuel consumption, reduce tyre
service life and impair the car's handling. Driving with tyre pressures
which are too low may lead to the
tyres overheating and sustaining damage. Tyre pressures affect ride comfort, road noise and steering.
•
Tyre pressure decreases over time,
this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre
pressure also varies depending on
ambient temperature.
The tyre valve is covered by a plastic cover
which is equipped with a hole.
Remove the valve cover
Take the torx wrench (which is fitted in
the foam block behind the panel on the lefthand side of the cargo area).
Press the torx wrench into the hole.
Prize off the cover using the torx wrench (A).
Remove the valve cap.
Checking the tyre pressure
Refit the valve cover
The tyre pressures must be checked every
month.
Fit the valve cap.
08 Wheels and tyres
Warning triangle and first-aid kit*
Warning triangle
First aid kit*
Lift the floor hatch and take out the warning triangle.
Take the warning triangle from the case,
fold out and assemble the two loose
sides.
Fold out the warning triangle's support
legs.
A case with first aid equipment is located
under the floor in the cargo area.
Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a
suitable place with regard to traffic.
Ensure the warning triangle and its case are
properly secured in the cargo area after use.
NOTE
If the car has been locked with privacy
locking then the boot lid/tailgate and floor
hatch cannot be opened, see page 52.
08
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
337
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)
General
NOTE
Overview
The emergency puncture repair kit is only
intended for sealing tyres with a puncture
in the tread.
The emergency puncture repair kit has limited
capacity to seal tyres which have punctures
in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger
slits, cracks or similar damage.
Emergency puncture repair (TMK; Temporary
Mobility Kit)1 is used to seal a puncture and
check and adjust tyre pressure. It consists of
a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid.
The kit works as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced before its
expiration date and after use.
The emergency puncture repair kit is located
behind the hatch on the left-hand side of the
cargo area.
Set up the warning triangle (see page 337) if a
tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location.
08
The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punctured in the tread.
1
338
Option only in certain markets.
Connect the compressor to one of the car's
12 V sockets. Choose the socket that is nearest to the punctured tyre.
IMPORTANT
If the compressor for emergency puncture
repair is connected to one of the two sockets in the tunnel console, see page 241, no
other current consumer must be connected to the other one.
NOTE
The compressor for temporary emergency
puncture repair has been tested and
approved by Volvo.
Label, maximum permitted speed
Switch
Cable
Bottle holder (orange cap)
Protective cap
Pressure reducing valve
Air hose
Sealing fluid bottle
Pressure gauge
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)
Sealing punctured tyres
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has
been used. Volvo recommends that you
visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum
driving distance is 200 km). The staff there
can determine whether or not the tyre can
be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
WARNING
The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the
case of contact with skin, wash away the
fluid with soap and water.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
5. Remove the valve cover
Take the torx wrench (which is fitted in the
foam block behind the panel on the lefthand side of the cargo area).
Press the torx wrench into the hole.
Prize off the cover using the torx wrench
(A).
2. Check that the switch is in position 0 and
locate the cable and the air hose.
NOTE
For information on the function of the parts, see
preceding illustration.
1. Detach the label for maximum permitted
speed (which is fitted on one side of the
compressor) and affix it to the steering
wheel.
Do not break the bottle's seal before use.
The seal is broken automatically when the
bottle is screwed in.
3. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the
bottle's stopper.
4. Screw the bottle into its holder.
6. Connect the hose from the compressor to
the valve.
7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and
start the car.
08
339
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)
NOTE
If the compressor is connected to one of
the two 12 V sockets, in the tunnel console, no other current consumer must be
connected to the other one.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
8. Flick the switch to position I.
WARNING
Never stand next to the tyre when the
compressor is running. If cracks or
unevenness arise then the compressor
must be switched off immediately. The
journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.
NOTE
When the compressor starts, the pressure
can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure
drops after approximately 30 seconds.
08
340
9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
10. Switch off the compressor to check the
pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum
3.5 bar. (Release air with the pressure
reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too
high.)
WARNING
If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the
hole in the tyre is too big. The journey
should not be continued. Contacting an
authorised tyre centre is recommended.
11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the
cable from the 12 V socket.
12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and
fit the valve cap.
Press the cover back over the tyre valve
with the hole against the wheel's hub.
Two clicks confirm that the cover is fitted
in place.
13. As soon as possible, drive approximately
3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so
that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.
Rechecking the repair and pressure
1. Reconnect the equipment (see the section "Removing the valve cover" on page
339).
2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure
gauge.
•
If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is
insufficiently sealed. The journey
should not be continued. Contact a
tyre centre.
•
If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3
bar, the tyre must be inflated to the
pressure specified in accordance with
the tyre pressure table, see page 400
(1 bar=100 kPa). Release air using the
pressure reducing valve if the tyre
pressure is too high.
WARNING
Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped
with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.
3. Make sure the compressor is switched
off. Detach the air hose and cable.
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)
NOTE
The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must
be replaced after use. Volvo recommends
that this replacement is performed by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
Check the tyre pressure regularly.
Fit the valve cap.
Refit the valve cover
Press one edge of the cover (without the
hole) into place (nearest the tyre - B).
Then fold the cover in toward the wheel
rim - and at the same time, gently press
down the angled top edge in order to help
it in under the edge of the wheel rim.
Check that the cover is flush with the surface of the wheel rim - if not, gently press
in the part that is bulging out.
Volvo recommends that you drive to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the
replacement/repair of the damaged tyre.
Advise the workshop that the tyre contains
sealing fluid.
WARNING
You should not drive faster than 80 km/h
after the emergency tyre repair kit has
been used. Volvo recommends that you
visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum
driving distance is 200 km). The staff there
can determine whether or not the tyre can
be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.
Inflating the tyres
The car's original tyres can be inflated by the
compressor.
1. The compressor must be switched off.
Make sure that the switch is in position 0
and locate the cable and air hose.
2. Remove the valve cover (see page 339).
3. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw
in the air hose valve connection to the
bottom of the thread on the tyre's air
valve.
WARNING
Inhaling car exhaust fumes can result in
danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation.
WARNING
Do not leave children in the car without
supervision when the engine is running.
4. Connect the cable to one of the car's
12 V sockets and start the car.
5. Start the compressor by flicking the
switch to position I.
08
341
08 Wheels and tyres
Emergency puncture repair (TMK)
IMPORTANT
Risk of overheating. The compressor must
not run for more than 10 minutes.
Replace the bottle when the expiration date
has passed. Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste.
6. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified in
accordance with the tyre pressure table,
see page 400. (Release air using the
pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.)
The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.
7. Refit the dust cap.
Refit the valve cover by pressing one
edge of the cover (the one without the
hole) into place (nearest the tyre), see the
figure on page 341. Then fold the cover in
toward the wheel rim - and at the same
time, gently press down the angled top
edge in order to help it in under the edge
of the wheel rim. Check that the cover is
flush with the surface of the wheel rim - if
not, gently press in the part that is bulging out.
8. Switch off the compressor Detach the air
hose and cable.
08
342
Replacing the sealing fluid canister
WARNING
Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic
reaction in the event of skin contact.
Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.
Store out of the reach of children.
08 Wheels and tyres
08
343
Engine compartment.............................................................................
Lamps...................................................................................................
Wiper blades and washer fluid..............................................................
Battery...................................................................................................
Fuses.....................................................................................................
Car care................................................................................................
344
346
353
359
362
365
379
MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
09 Maintenance and service
09
Engine compartment
General
Check regularly
Volvo service programme
Check the following oils and fluids at regular
intervals, e.g. when refuelling:
To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as
specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service
and maintenance work. Volvo workshops
have the personnel, special tools and service
literature to guarantee the highest quality of
service.
IMPORTANT
For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and
follow the instructions in the Service and
Warranty Booklet.
Service interval and next service,
charging cable
The hour meter on the charging cable counts
charging time until the next service interval.
Volvo recommends having the control unit
checked by an electrician after every 5000
operating hours.
IMPORTANT
Do not modify the control unit in any way.
346
•
•
•
•
Coolant
Engine oil
Power steering fluid
Washer fluid
WARNING
Remember that the radiator fan (located at
the front of the engine compartment,
behind the radiator) may start automatically some after the engine has been
switched off.
Always have the engine cleaned by a
workshop. There is a risk of fire if the
engine is hot.
Raising the car
NOTE
Volvo recommends only using the jack that
belongs to the car model in question. If a
jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions
for use supplied with the equipment.
If the car is raised with a workshop jack; position the jack against the front edge on the
engine's subframe.
Do not damage the splashguard under the
engine. Ensure that the workshop jack is
positioned so that the car cannot slide off the
jack. Always use axle stands or similar.
If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop lift, ensure that the front and rear lift
arms are fixed under the lifting points. See
preceding illustration.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
Service and repair
Engine compartment, overview
Service the car regularly. Follow Volvo's recommended service intervals.
Some of the car's batteries and several of the
components included in the car's electric
drive system are located under the bonnet.
Exercise caution in this area and only touch
anything that is related to normal maintenance.
If inspection and repair are required then only
an authorised Volvo workshop may carry out
the work.
WARNING
Do not carry out any repairs of your own
on this vehicle. Electrical cables and/or
components that have detached must only
be rectified by an authorised workshop an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Opening and closing the bonnet
09
WARNING
Turn the handle about 20-25 degrees
clockwise. You will hear when the catch
releases.
Move the catch to the left and open the
bonnet. (The catch hook is located
between the headlamp and grille, see
illustration.)
WARNING
Check that the bonnet locks properly when
closed.
Orange cables marked with a high-voltage
decal must only be handled by qualified
personnel.
WARNING
Several components in the car operate
with lethal high-voltage electricity.
•
Do not touch anything that is not
clearly described in this owner's manual.
•
Exercise caution when checking/refilling fluids in the engine compartment.
The handle for bonnet opening is always on the
left-hand side.
347
09 Maintenance and service
09
Engine compartment
WARNING
The car's electrical system must always be
in key position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment, see
page 84.
Checking the engine oil
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Normal checking points - other parts require
specialist expertise.
Checking/refilling the coolant for the cooling and climate control systems.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Checking/filling the power steering fluid
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
Filling engine oil
Checking/filling the brake fluid
Battery
Relay and fuse box
Filling washer fluid
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
When driving under adverse conditions, see
page 394.
Volvo uses different systems for warning of
low/high oil level or low/high oil pressure.
Certain variants have an oil pressure sensor,
and then the combined instrument panel's
warning symbol for low oil pressure is used.
Other variants have an oil level sensor, when
the driver is informed via the instrument's
warning symbol
348
and display texts.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
Certain variants have both systems. Contact
a Volvo dealer for more information.
shown in the combined instrument panel's
information display, see the illustration below.
Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet.
09
IMPORTANT
In the event of the message Oil level low
Refill 0.5 litre, only fill with 0.5 litres.
WARNING
Using oil of a higher than specified grade is
permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a
higher grade, see page 394.
Do not fill more oil if filling level (3) or (4)
appears as shown in the illustration below.
The level must never be above MAX or
below MIN, as this could lead to engine
damage.
For capacities, see page 395 and onwards.
Engine with electronic oil level sensor1
NOTE
Message and graph in the display.
Message
Engine oil level
The oil level is checked using the electronic
oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the
engine is switched off, see page 350.
WARNING
Filler pipe.2
You do not need to take action with respect
to the engine oil level before a message is
1
2
If the message Oil service required is
shown, visit a workshop. The oil level may
be too high.
The oil level is only detected by the system
when certain conditions are fulfilled. For
this reason the system cannot always
directly detect changes when the oil is
filled or drained. Under certain conditions,
internal combustion engine operation may
be required for approx. 30 km.
WARNING
Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.
Only applies to 5-cyl. diesel.
Engines with electronic oil level sensor have no dipstick (5-cyl. diesel).
349
09 Maintenance and service
09
Engine compartment
Measuring the oil level
Coolant
If the oil level needs to be checked then it
should be carried out in accordance with the
sequence below.
Checking the level and topping up
2. Rotate the thumbwheel on the left-hand
stalk switch to position Oil level.
> You will then see information displayed
about the engine oil level.
For more information on menu management, see page 204.
When topping up the coolant, follow the
instructions on the packaging. It is important
that the mixture of coolant concentrate and
water is correct for the prevailing weather
conditions. Never top up with water only. The
risk of freezing increases with both too little
and too much coolant concentrate.
WARNING
350
Check the coolant regularly
The level must lie between the MIN and MAX
marks on the expansion tank. If the system is
not filled sufficiently, high temperatures could
occur, causing a risk of damage to the
engine.
1. Activate key position II, see page 84.
The figures 1-4 represent filling level. Do not fill
more oil if filling level (3) or (4) is shown. Recommended filling level is 4.
For capacities and for standards regarding
water quality, see page 396.
Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant
requires topping up when the engine is at
operating temperature, unscrew the
expansion tank cap slowly to gently
release the overpressure.
09 Maintenance and service
Engine compartment
IMPORTANT
Brake fluid
•
A high content of chlorine, chlorides
and other salts may cause corrosion in
the cooling system.
Checking the level
•
Always use coolant with anti-corrosion
agent as recommended by Volvo.
•
Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50%
water and 50% coolant.
•
Mix the coolant with approved quality
tap water. In the event of any doubt
about water quality, used ready-mixed
coolant in accordance with Volvo recommendations.
•
When changing coolant/replacing
cooling system components, flush the
cooling system clean with approved
quality tap water or flush with readymixed coolant.
•
The engine must only be run with a
well-filled cooling system. Otherwise,
temperatures that are too high may
occur resulting in the risk of damage
(cracks) in the cylinder head.
09
Filling
The level must be between the MIN and MAX
marks that are visible inside the reservoir.
Check the level regularly.
Change the brake fluid every other year or at
every other regular service.
For capacities and recommended fluid grade,
see page 396. The fluid should be changed
annually on cars driven in conditions requiring
hard, frequent braking, such as driving in
mountains or tropical climates with high
humidity.
WARNING
If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in
the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.
Volvo recommends that the reason for the
loss of brake fluid is investigated by an
authorised Volvo workshop.
Brake fluid reservoir location.
The fluid reservoir is protected under the
cover over the cold zone in the engine compartment. The round cover must be removed
first before the reservoir cap can be reached.
1. Turn and open the cover located on the
covering.
2. Unscrew the reservoir cap and fill the
fluid. The level must be between the MIN
and MAX marks, which are located on
the inside of the reservoir.
IMPORTANT
Do not forget to refit the cap.
351
09 Maintenance and service
09
Engine compartment
Power steering fluid
Air conditioning system
Troubleshooting and repair
The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Use ultraviolet light when
looking for leaks.
Volvo recommends that you contact an
authorised Volvo workshop.
WARNING
The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system
must only be serviced and repaired by an
authorised workshop.
IMPORTANT
Keep the area around the power steering
fluid reservoir clean when checking. The
cover must not be opened.
Check the level frequently. The fluid does not
require changing. The fluid level must be
between the MIN and MAX marks. For
capacities and recommended fluid grade, see
page 396.
NOTE
If a fault should arise in the power steering
system or if the engine is switched off and
the car must be towed, it can still be
steered.
352
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
General
The bulbs are specified, see page 358. The
following list contains locations of bulbs and
other light sources that are specialised, such
as LED1 lamps, or are unsuitable for changing
for some other reason, except at a workshop:
•
Active Xenon headlamps - ABL (Xenon
lamps)
•
Daytime running lights/Position/parking
lamps front
•
•
•
•
•
Side marker lamps front
Cornering lights
Side direction indicators, door mirrors
Approach lighting, door mirrors
Interior lighting apart from Courtesy lighting front
•
•
Glovebox lighting
•
Brake light.
Position/parking lamps rear/Side marker
lamps rear
WARNING
On cars with Xenon headlamps, the
replacement of Xenon lamps must be carried out at a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended. Working
with Xenon lamps demands extreme caution because the headlamp is equipped
with a high voltage unit.
09
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily
have condensation on the inside of the
lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is
designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp housing
when the lamp has been switched on for a
time.
WARNING
The car’s electrical system must be in key
position 0 when replacing bulbs, see
page 84
IMPORTANT
Never touch the glass part of the bulbs
with your fingers. Grease and oils from
your fingers are vaporised by the heat,
coating the reflector and then causing
damage.
Headlamps front
All of the headlamp bulbs are replaced via the
engine compartment. Loosen and remove the
whole headlamp.
Removing the headlamp
Set the car's electrical system in key position
0, see page 84.
NOTE
If an error message remains after the broken bulb has been replaced then we recommend that you visit an authorised Volvo
workshop.
1
LED (Light Emitting Diode)
353
09 Maintenance and service
09
Lamps
Pull out the headlamp's locking pins.
Securing the headlamp
Removing the cover
1. Plug in the connector, a clicking sound
should be heard.
Before starting to replace a bulb, see
page 353.
2. Reinstall the headlamp and locking pins.
The short pin is fitted closest to the grille.
Check that they are correctly inserted.
1. Unscrew the cover's four screws using a
Torx tool, size T20 (1). They should not be
loosened completely. (3 - 4 turns are sufficient.)
Release the headlamp by alternately tilting and pulling it out.
IMPORTANT
Do not pull the electrical cable, only the
connector.
Detach the headlamp connector by
pressing down the clip with your thumb.
At the same time, guide out the connector with your other hand.
5. Lift out the headlamp and place it on a
soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.
6. Replace the bulb in question.
354
3. Check the lighting.
The headlamp must be mounted and the connector correctly installed before the lighting is
switched on or the remote control key is
inserted into the ignition switch.
2. Slide the cover to one side.
3. Remove the cover.
Reinstall the cover in reverse order.
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
Dipped beam, halogen
Main beam, Halogen
Extra main beam, ABL headlamps*
1. Detach the headlamp, see page 353.
1. Detach the headlamp.
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Remove the cover.
2. Remove the cover, see page 354.
2. Remove the cover, see page 354.
3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise
and then pulling straight out.
3. Detach the bulb by turning anticlockwise
and then pulling straight out.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
4. Unplug the connector from the bulb.
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It
can be secured in one position.
5. Replace the bulb and align it in the socket
and turn clockwise in order to secure it. It
can only be secured in one position.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
4. Detach the bulb by pulling it straight out.
5. The guide pin on the lamp should be
straight up when it is fitted and a clicking
sound should be heard when it clicks into
place.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
09
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
355
09 Maintenance and service
09
Lamps
Direction indicators
1. Detach the headlamp.
2. Detach the cover by pulling it straight out.
3. Pull the bulb holder in order to extract the
bulb.
4. Press and simultaneously turn the bulb to
detach it.
Reinstall the parts in reverse order.
Lamp housing, rear
The bulbs for reversing lamp, fog lamp and
direction indicator in the rear lamp cluster are
replaced from inside the cargo area.
The lamps are accessible when emergency
puncture repair kit is lifted out.
1. Open the panel.
2. Lift the emergency puncture repair kit.
3. Remove the insulation that is fitted in
front of the bulb holder by pulling it
straight out.
4. Press down the catch and pull out the
bulb holder.
5. Remove the blown bulb by pressing it in
and turning anticlockwise.
6. Fit a new bulb, press down and turn
clockwise.
7. Press down the catch when the bulb
holder is refitted.
8. Refit the insulation, emergency puncture
repair kit and panel.
356
09 Maintenance and service
Lamps
Location of rear bulbs
Lighting in the cargo area
Brake light (LED)
1. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.
Position/parking lamps (LED)/Side marker
lamps (LED)
2. Carefully detach the whole lamp housing
and withdraw it.
1. Insert a screwdriver and gently prize so
that the lamp housing comes loose.
Indicator
3. Replace the bulb.
Brake light (LED)
4. Refit the whole lamp housing and screw it
into place.
G031942
Number plate lighting
09
Reversing lamp
2. Replace the bulb.
3. Check that the bulb illuminates and press
back the lamp housing.
Rear fog lamp
}}
357
09 Maintenance and service
09
Lamps
Vanity mirror lighting
Removal of lamp lens
1. Insert a screwdriver under the lamp lens
and gently prize up the lug on the edge.
2. Carefully detach and lift aside the lamp
lens.
3. Use needle-nose pliers to pull the bulb
straight out to the side and replace with a
new one. Note! - Do not pinch hard with
the pliers. Otherwise the lamp lens could
then be crushed.
Attaching the lamp lens
1. Refit the lamp lens.
2. Press it into place.
Specifications of bulbs
Lighting
WA
Type
Dipped beam,
halogen
55
H7 LL
Main beam, Halogen
65
H9
Extra main beam,
ABL
65
H9
Front direction
indicators
24
PY24W
Courtesy lighting
front
3
T10 Socket
W2.1x9.5d
Glovebox lighting
5
Socket SV8.5
Length 43 mm
1.2
T5 Socket
W2x4.6d
Cargo area lighting
5
Socket SV8.5
Length 43 mm
Number plate
lighting
5
C5W LL
Direction indicators, rear
21
PY21W SV
-
-
Vanity mirror
lighting
-
358
A
Lighting
WA
Type
Reversing lamp
21
P21W LL
Rear fog lamp
21
H21W LL
Watt
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
Wiper blades
Service position
STOP ENGINE button to set the car's
electrical system to key position I. (For
detailed information on key positions, see
page 84.)
09
Replacing the wiper blades
2. Briefly press the START/STOP ENGINE
button again to set the car’s electrical
system in key position 0.
3. Within 3 seconds, move the right stalk
switch up and hold it in position for
approx. 1 second.
> The wipers then move to standing
straight up.
Wiper blades in service position.
In order to change, clean or lift the wiper
blades (for scraping off ice from the windscreen, for example) they must be in service
position.
IMPORTANT
Before placing the wiper blades in the
service position, make sure that they are
not frozen down.
The wipers return to their starting position
when you briefly press the START/STOP
ENGINE button to set the car’s electrical system to key position I (or when the car is
started).
IMPORTANT
If the wiper arms in service position have
been folded up from the windscreen, they
must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the wipers are allowed to
return to their starting position. This is to
avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet.
1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch1 and briefly press the START/
1
Not necessary in cars with Keyless function.
359
09 Maintenance and service
09
Wiper blades and washer fluid
Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Press the button located on
the wiper blade mounting and pull
straight out parallel with the wiper arm.
Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click"
is heard.
Check that the blade is firmly installed.
NOTE
The wiper blades are different lengths. The
blade on the driver's side is longer than
the blade on the passenger side.
Replacing the wiper blades, rear
window
4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the
windscreen.
Cleaning
For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen,
see page 379 and onwards.
IMPORTANT
Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service
life of the wiper blades.
Filling washer fluid
The wipers return from service position to
their starting position when you briefly press
the START/STOP ENGINE button to set the
car’s electrical system to key position I (or
when the car is started).
1. Fold out the wiper arm.
2. Grip the inner section of the blade (by the
arrow).
3. Turn anticlockwise to use the blade's end
position against the wiper arm as a lever
to detach the blade more easily.
4. Press the new wiper blade into position.
Check that it is firmly installed.
5. Lower the wiper arm.
360
The windscreen and headlamp washers share
a common reservoir.
09 Maintenance and service
Wiper blades and washer fluid
09
IMPORTANT
Use washer fluid with antifreeze during the
winter to avoid freezing in the pump, reservoir and hoses.
For capacities, see page 396.
361
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
09
Operation
The service life and function of the battery is
influenced by factors such as the number of
starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc.
•
Never disconnect the battery when the
engine is running.
•
Check that the cables to the battery are
correctly connected and properly tightened.
WARNING
•
362
The battery can generate oxyhydrogen
gas, which is highly explosive. A spark
can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be
enough for the battery to explode.
•
The battery contains sulphuric acid,
which can cause serious burns.
•
If sulphuric acid comes into contact
with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with
large quantities of water. If acid
splashes into the eyes - seek medical
attention immediately.
NOTE
The life of the battery is shortened if it
becomes discharged repeatedly.
The life of the battery is affected by several
factors, including driving conditions and
climate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore
needs to be recharged if the car is not
used for a longer time or when it is only
driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity.
To maintain the battery in good condition,
at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic
trickle charging.
A battery that is kept fully charged has a
maximum service life.
IMPORTANT
Never use a quick charger to charge the
battery.
IMPORTANT
If the following instruction is not observed
then the energy saving function for infotainment system may be temporarily disengaged, and/or the message in the combined instrument panel's information display about the starter battery's state of
charge may be temporarily inapplicable,
following the connection of an external
battery or battery charger:
•
The negative battery terminal on the
car's starter battery must never be
used for connecting an external battery or battery charger - only the car
chassis may be used as the grounding point.
See the section "Start assistance" - for a
description of how the cable clamps must
be attached.
09 Maintenance and service
Battery
Symbols on the battery
Avoid sparks and naked
flames.
Use protective goggles.
09
Hybrid battery
The car is equipped with a maintenance-free
rechargeable Lithium-ion type battery for
electric motor operation.
WARNING
Risk of explosion.
Further information in the
owner's manual.
The hybrid battery must only be replaced
by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Coolant
Must be taken for recycling.
Store the battery out of
the reach of children.
The battery contains corrosive acid.
The hybrid battery's cooling system has a
separate expansion tank.
NOTE
An expended battery must be recycled in
an environmentally responsible manner - it
contains lead.
363
09 Maintenance and service
09
Battery
IMPORTANT
The hybrid battery's coolant must only be
topped up by a workshop - an authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended.
Replacing the starter battery
WARNING
The starter battery must only be replaced
by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
364
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
General
WARNING
Orange cables marked with a high-voltage
decal must only be handled by qualified
personnel.
2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side
to see whether the curved wire has
blown.
3. If this is the case, replace it with a new
fuse of the same colour and amperage.
WARNING
WARNING
Several components in the car operate
with lethal high-voltage electricity.
Do not touch anything that is not clearly
described in this owner's manual.
All electrical functions and components are
protected by a number of fuses in order to
protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading.
Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with
an amperage higher than that specified
when replacing a fuse. This could cause
significant damage to the electrical system
and possibly lead to fire.
09
electrical units under the glovebox change
sides.
Engine compartment
Under the glovebox
Under the glovebox
Cargo area
Engine compartment, cold zone
Location of central electrical units
If an electrical component or function does
not work, it may be because the component's
fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If
the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a
fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends that
you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for
checking.
Changing
1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the
fuse.
Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand
drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central
365
09 Maintenance and service
09
Fuses
Engine compartment
366
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
General fuses, engine compartment
On the inside of the cover there are tweezers
that facilitate the procedure for the removal
and fitting of fuses.
1
A
-
-
ABS valves
20
Headlamp washers*
20
Headlamp levelling*; Active
Xenon headlamps - ABL*
10
Primary fuse for the central
electronic module (CEM) under
the glovebox
20
Engine compartment, front
-
Engine compartment, lower
Primary fuse for relay/fuse box
under the glovebox
On the inside of the cover is a label that
shows the location of the fuses.
•
Function
Engine compartment, upper
These fuses are all located in the engine compartment box. The fuses in (C) are located
under (A).
•
A
Primary fuse for the central
electronic module (CEM) under
the glovebox
Positions (see preceding illustration)
•
Function
Fuses 1-7 and 42-44 are of the "Midi
Fuse" type and must only be replaced by
a workshop1.
Fuses 8-15 and 34 are of the "JCASE"
type and should be replaced by a workshop1.
Fuses 16-33 and 35-41 are of the "Mini
Fuse" type.
50
60
-
-
ABS
5
-
-
Speed related power steering*
5
-
-
Engine control module; Transmission control module; Airbags
10
Heated washer nozzles*
10
Heated windscreen*, left-hand
side
40
Windscreen wipers
30
Parking heater*
25
-
-
Heated windscreen*, righthand side
40
ABS pump
40
-
-
Headlamp control
5
-
-
-
-
-
-
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
09
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
367
09 Maintenance and service
09
368
Fuses
Function
A
Function
A
Relay coils
5
Lambda-sond
10
Auxiliary lamps*
20
Horn
15
Diesel filter heater
20
Relay coil in main relay for
engine management system;
Engine control module
10
Crankcase ventilation heater
5
Glow plugs
70
Transmission control module
15
Cooling fan
80
Electro-hydraulic power steering
100
-
-
Relay coil in relay for coolant
pump; Relay coils in central
electrical unit in engine compartment cold zone
5
Start relay
30
Glow control module
10
Engine Control Module (ECM)
15
Mass air flow sensor; Control
valves
15
Valves; Oil level sensor
10
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Behind the engine
A: Left-hand drive car. B: Right-hand drive car.
Fuse
Function
A
Monitoring of vacuum pump for
brake system
5
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
Under the glovebox - Relay/Fuse box
Positions
On the inside of the cover is a label that
shows the location of the fuses.
Function
A
Function
A
-
-
Control panel, rear passenger
door, left
20
Keyless*
7.5
Power seat driver's side*
20
Power seat passenger side*
20
Windscreen washers; Rear window washer
25
Infotainment control module
5
Function
A
Door handle (Keyless*)
5
Primary fuse for audio control
module*; Primary fuse for fuses
16-20: Infotainment
40
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Control panel, driver's door
20
Control panel, front passenger
door
20
Control panel, rear passenger
door, right
20
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
369
09 Maintenance and service
09
Fuses
Function
A
Function
A
Audio control unit (amplifier)*;
Digital radio*; TV*
10
-
-
Audio
15
-
-
Telematics*; Bluetooth*
5
-
-
Sunroof*; Interior lighting roof;
Climate sensor*; Damper
motors, air intake
5
12 V socket, tunnel console
15
Seat heating, rear right*
15
Seat heating, rear left*
15
Electrically-driven heater
5
Seat heating (passenger side)
15
Seat heating (driver's side)
15
Parking assistance*; Parking
camera*; Towbar control module *
5
BLIS*
Electrically-driven heater
370
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
Under the glovebox - Central electronic module (CEM)
Positions
Function
A
Rear window wiper
15
Interior lighting; Driver's door
control panel, power windows;
Power seats, front*; Remote
controlled garage door opener*
Combined instrument panel
7.5
5
Function
A
Function
A
Adaptive cruise control, ACC*;
collision warning system*
10
Unlocking, tailgate
10
Interior lighting; Rain sensor
7.5
Folding head restraint*
10
Steering wheel module
7.5
Fuel pump
20
Central locking system, fuel
filler flap
10
Movement detector alarm*; Climate panel
5
Heated steering wheel*
15
Steering lock
15
Heated windscreen*
15
Siren alarm*; Data link connector OBDII
5
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
371
09 Maintenance and service
09
372
Fuses
Function
A
-
-
Airbags
10
Collision warning system*
5
Accelerator pedal sensor; Dimming interior rearview mirror*;
Seat heating, rear*
7.5
Infotainment control module
(Performance); Audio (Performance)
15
Brake light
5
Sunroof*
20
Immobiliser
5
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
Cargo area
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.
}}
373
09 Maintenance and service
09
Fuses
Box A
Function
A
-
-
-
-
-
-
Trailer socket 1*
The emergency puncture repair kit needs to be
lifted out for the central electrical unit to be
accessible.
Positions
Box A
Function
A
Electric parking brake, left
30
Electric parking brake, right
30
Rear window defroster
30
Trailer socket 2*
15
12 V socket, cargo area
-
374
15
-
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
40
-
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
The fuse box is located behind the upholstery on the left-hand side.
Box
B
The emergency puncture repair kit needs to be
lifted out for the central electrical unit to be
accessible.
Function
A
Coolant pump 1 for hybrid
battery; Valve for coolant
pumps 1 and 2
Box
B
Function
A
10
Coolant pump for the cooling system's low temperature circuit
15
Coolant pump 2 for hybrid
battery
10
10
Charging unit; Voltage converter 400 V-12 V; Control
module for hybrid battery
5
Charging unit; Voltage converter 400 V-12 V; Control
module for hybrid battery
Relay coils; high voltage
converter for electric motor
and integrated starter generator
10
}}
375
09 Maintenance and service
09
Fuses
Box
B
Function
A
Disengaging the electric
motor from the rear axle
15
-
376
-
High voltage converter for
electric motor and integrated
starter generator; control
module for hybrid battery
10
Coolant valves for the cooling system's low temperature circuit; Electric A/C
compressor; Valve for heat
exchanger; Valve for climate
control system
10
-
-
-
-
09 Maintenance and service
Fuses
09
Engine compartment, cold zone - Start/Stop
Location of fuses for the Start/Stop function.
•
•
•
Fuses A1 and A2 are of the "MEGA Fuse"
type and must only be replaced by a
workshop2.
Fuses 1-11 are of the "Midi Fuse" type
and must only be replaced by a workshop2.
Fuse 12 is of the "Mini Fuse" type.
For more information on Start/Stop - see
page 125.
2
An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.
Positions
Function
A
Main fuse for central electrical
unit in the engine compartment
175
Main fuse for central electronic
module (CEM) under the glovebox, relay/fuse box under the
glovebox, central electrical
units in cargo area
175
Function
A
Vacuum pump for brake system
40
Primary fuse for the central
electronic module (CEM) under
the glovebox
50
Primary fuse for relay/fuse box
under the glovebox
60
}}
377
09 Maintenance and service
09
Fuses
Function
A
Primary fuse for central electrical unit B in cargo area
50
Primary fuse for central electrical unit A in cargo area
60
Ventilation fan
40
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Oil pump automatic gearbox
-
378
30
-
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
Washing the car
Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty.
Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator.
Use car shampoo.
•
Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings
contain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. An authorised
Volvo workshop is recommended for the
removal of any discoloration.
•
•
Hose down the underbody.
•
If necessary, use cold degreasing agent
on very dirty surfaces. Note that the surfaces must not then be warmed up by the
sun!
Rinse the whole car until the loose dirt
has been removed in order to reduce the
risk of scratches from washing. Do not
spray directly onto the locks.
•
Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and
plenty of lukewarm water.
•
Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm
soap solution or car shampoo.
•
Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or
a water scraper. If you avoid allowing
water droplets to dry in strong sunlight
then the risk of water stains that may
need to be polished away is reduced.
WARNING
Always have the engine cleaned by a
workshop. There is a risk of fire if the
engine is hot.
IMPORTANT
Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, when refuelling
for example.
Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents
but use water and a non-scratching
sponge instead.
NOTE
Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog
lamps and rear lamps may temporarily
have condensation on the inside of the
lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is
designed to withstand this. Condensation
is normally vented out of the lamp housing
when the lamp has been switched on for a
time.
Cleaning the wiper blades
Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper
blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the
windscreen, impair the service life of wiper
blades.
09
For cleaning:
–
Set the wiper blades in service position,
see page 359.
NOTE
Wash the wiper blades and windscreen
regularly with lukewarm soap solution or
car shampoo.
Do not use any strong solvents.
Automatic car washes
An automatic car wash is a simple and quick
way of washing the car, but it cannot reach
everywhere. Handwashing the car is recommended for achieving optimum results.
NOTE
During the first few months a new car must
only be handwashed. This is because the
paintwork is more sensitive when it is new.
High-pressure washing
When using high-pressure washing, use
sweeping movements and make sure that the
nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to
the surface of the car (the distance applies to
all exterior parts). Do not spray directly onto
the locks.
379
09 Maintenance and service
09
Car care
Testing the brakes
WARNING
Always test the brakes after washing the
car, including the parking brake, to ensure
that moisture and corrosion do not attack
the brake linings and reduce braking performance.
Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then
when driving long distances in rain or slush.
The heat from the friction causes the brake
linings to warm up and dry. Do the same
thing after starting in very damp or cold
weather.
Exterior plastic, rubber and trim
components
A special cleaning agent available from Volvo
dealers is recommended for the cleaning and
care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim
components, such as glossy trim mouldings.
When using such a cleaning agent the
instructions must be followed carefully.
380
IMPORTANT
Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and
rubber.
When using degreasant on plastic and
rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is
necessary. Use a soft washing sponge.
Polishing glossy trim mouldings could
wear away or damage the glossy surface
layer.
Polishing agent that contains abrasive
must not be used.
Rims
Only use rim cleaning agent recommended
by Volvo.
Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the
surface and cause stains on chrome-plated
aluminium rims.
Polishing and waxing
Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull
or to give the paintwork extra protection.
and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed
using fine rubbing paste designed for car
paintwork.
Polish first with a polish and then wax with
liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on
the packaging carefully. Many preparations
contain both polish and wax.
IMPORTANT
Only paint treatment recommended by
Volvo should be used. Other treatment
such as preserving, sealing, protection,
lustre sealing or similar could damage the
paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by
such treatments is not covered by Volvo
warranty.
Water-repellent coating*
Never use products such as car
wax, degreaser or similar on glass
surfaces as this could ruin their
water-repellent properties.
The car does not need to be polished until it
is at least one year old. However, the car can
be waxed during this time. Do not polish or
wax the car in direct sunlight.
Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface.
Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you
begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt
There is natural wear of the water-repellent
coating.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
To avoid damaging glass surfaces when
removing ice – only use plastic ice scrapers.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended in
order to maintain the water-repellent properties. This should be used first after three
years and then each year.
Rustproofing – inspection and
maintenance
Cleaning the interior
Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly
and follow the instructions included with the
car care product.
Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.
The car received a thorough and complete
rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body
are made of galvanised sheet metal. The
underbody is protected by a wear-resistant
anti-corrosion compound. A thin, penetrating
rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the
exposed members, cavities, closed sections
and side doors.
Carpets and cargo area
Under normal conditions the rustproofing
does not require treatment for approximately
12 years. After this period, it should be treated at three-year intervals. Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo
workshop for assistance if the car needs further treatment.
Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at
each pin.
Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion so it
is important to keep the car clean. The car's
rustproofing needs to be checked regularly
and touched-up if necessary in order for it to
be maintained.
Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning
of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use
a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt.
Each inlay mat is secured with pins.
–
Take hold of the inlay mat at each pin and
lift the mat straight up.
WARNING
Before setting off check that the inlaid mat
in the driver area is firmly affixed and
secured in the pins in order to avoid getting caught adjacent to and under the pedals.
A special textile cleaner is recommended for
stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor
mats should be cleaned with agents recommended by your Volvo dealer!
09
Stains on fabric upholstery and roof
upholstery
A special fabric cleaning agent, available from
authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to
avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of
the upholstery.
IMPORTANT
Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the
fabric upholstery.
Treating stains on leather upholstery
Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free
and is treated to preserve its original appearance.
Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beautiful patina over time. The leather is refined
and processed so that it retains its natural
characteristics. It is given a protective coating, but regular cleaning is required in order
to maintain both characteristics and appearance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product
for the cleaning and treatment of leather
upholstery which, when used in accordance
with the instructions, preserves the leather's
protective coating. After a period of use the
natural appearance of the leather will nevertheless emerge, depending more or less on
the surface texture of the leather. This is a
381
09 Maintenance and service
09
Car care
natural maturing of the leather and shows
that it is a natural product.
Protective treatment of leather
upholstery
To achieve best results Volvo recommends
cleaning and the application of protective
cream once to four times per year (or more if
necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is
available from your Volvo dealer.
1. Pour a small amount of the protective
cream on the felted cloth and massage in
a thin layer of cream with gentle circular
movements on the leather.
IMPORTANT
•
•
Certain items of coloured clothing (for
example, jeans and suede garments)
may stain the upholstery.
Never use strong solvents. Such products may damage fabric, vinyl and
leather upholstery.
Washing instructions for leather
upholstery
1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened sponge and squeeze out a strong
foam.
2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular
movements.
3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the
stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the
stain. Do not rub.
4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and
allow the leather to dry completely.
382
2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes
before use.
The leather has now been given improved
protection against stains and improved UV
protection.
Washing instructions for the leather
steering wheel
•
Remove dirt and dust with a soft premoistened sponge and neutral soap.
•
Leather needs to breathe. Never cover
the leather steering wheel with protective
plastic.
•
Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care
agents are recommended for best results.
If the steering wheel has stains:
Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and
blood)
–
Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5%
ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use
a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)
Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)
1. Same procedure as for group 1.
2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.
Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)
1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.
2. Same procedure as for group 1.
Treating stains on interior plastic, metal
and wood parts
A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly
moistened with water, available from Volvo
dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior
parts and surfaces.
Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong
stain removers. A special cleaning agent
available from Volvo dealers can be used for
more difficult cleaning.
Cleaning seatbelts
Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from
your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is
dry before allowing it to retract.
09 Maintenance and service
Car care
Touching up minor paintwork damage
Colour code (Paint code)
Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked
regularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately. The most common types of paintwork
damage are stone chips, scratches, and
marks on the edges of wings, doors and
bumpers.
09
Repairing minor paint damage such as
stone chips and scratches
primer1 - for e.g. plastic-clad bumpers
there are special adhesive primers available in spray cans
•
base coat and clear coat - are available in
spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks2
•
•
masking tape
G021832
Materials
•
Code for car's colour
It is important that the correct colour is used.
For product decal location, see page 388.
fine sand paper1.
Before work is started, the car must be clean
and dry as well as at a temperature above
15 °C.
1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the
damaged surface. Then remove the tape
to remove any loose paint.
If the damage has reached down to a
metal surface (sheet steel), it is preferable
to use a primer. In the event of damage to
a plastic surface, an adhesive primer
should be used for better results - spray
into the spray can's cap and brush thinly.
1
2
If required.
Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick.
}}
383
09 Maintenance and service
09
Car care
2. A light sanding with very fine abrasive
material can be performed locally before
painting if necessary (e.g. if there are
rough edges). Clean the surface thoroughly and allow to dry.
3. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine
brush, matchstick or similar. Finish with
base coat and clear coat once the primer
has dried.
4. For scratches, proceed as above, but
mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.
NOTE
If the stone chip has not penetrated down
to the meal and an undamaged layer of
paint remains in place, fill in with base coat
and clear coat as soon as the surface has
been cleaned.
384
09 Maintenance and service
09
385
Type designations.................................................................................
Dimensions and weights.......................................................................
Engine specifications............................................................................
Engine oil...............................................................................................
Fluids and lubricants.............................................................................
Fuel.......................................................................................................
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure .........................................
Electrical system...................................................................................
Type approval.......................................................................................
Licenses................................................................................................
Symbols in the display..........................................................................
386
388
390
393
394
396
398
399
401
402
407
410
SPECIFICATIONS
10 Specifications
Type designations
Label location
10
388
10 Specifications
Type designations
Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle
identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo
dealer regarding the car and when ordering
spare parts and accessories.
10
Type designation, vehicle identification
number, maximum permissible weights,
codes for colour and upholstery and type
approval number. The label is visible
when the right rear door is opened.
Label for parking heater.
Engine code and engine serial number.
Label for engine oil.
Gearbox type designation and serial number.
Car's identification number. (VIN Vehicle
Identification Number)
Further information on the car is presented in
the registration document.
NOTE
The labels shown in the owner's manual
are not provided as exact reproductions of
those in the car. The purpose is to show
their approximate appearance and location
in the car. The information that applies to
your car in particular is available on the
label in question in your car.
389
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Dimensions
10
390
Dimensions
mm
A
Wheelbase
2776
B
Length
4635
C
Load length, floor, folded rear
seat
1749
D
Load length, floor
E
Height
F
Load height
658
G
Front track
1578
978
1484
Dimensions
mm
H
Rear track
1575
I
Load width, floor
1082
J
Width
1865
K
Width including door mirrors
2097
L
Width including folded-in door
mirrors
1899
Weights
Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank
90% full and all fluids.
The weight of passengers and accessories,
and towball load (when a trailer is hitched,
see table page 392) influences the payload
and is not included in the kerb weight.
Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight.
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
NOTE
The documented kerb weight applies to
cars in the standard version - i.e. a car
without extra equipment or accessories.
This means that for every accessory added
the loading capacity of the car is reduced
correspondingly by the weight of the
accessory.
WARNING
The car's driving characteristics change
depending on how heavily it is loaded and
how the load is distributed.
Max. load: See registration document.
Max. roof load: 75 kg.
10
Examples of accessories that reduce loading capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/
Summum equipment levels, as well as
other accessories such as Towbar, Load
carriers, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety
grille, Carpets, Cargo cover, Power seats,
etc.
Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular car.
For information on decal location, see page 388.
Max. gross vehicle weight
Max. train weight (car+trailer)
Max. front axle load
Max. rear axle load
Equipment level
391
10 Specifications
Dimensions and weights
Towing capacity and towball load
10
A
Engine
Engine codeA
Gearbox
D6 AWD
D82PHEV
Automatic, TF-80SD
Max. towball load (kg)
1800
90
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 388.
Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg)
Max. towball load (kg)
750
392
Max. weight braked trailer (kg)
50
10 Specifications
Engine specifications
Diesel engine
A
Engine
Engine
codeA
Output
(kW/rpm)
Output
(hp/rpm)
Torque (Nm/
rpm)
No. of
cylinders
Bore
(mm)
Stroke
(mm)
Swept
volume
(litres)
Compression
ratio
D6 AWD
D82PHEV
158/4000
215/4000
440/1500-3000
5
81.0
93.15
2.400
16.5:1
10
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 388.
Electric drive motor (ERAD - Electric
Rear Axle Drive)
Max. power output: 50 kW (70 hp).
Torque: 200 Nm.
393
10 Specifications
Engine oil
Adverse driving conditions
10
Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption.
Below are some examples of adverse driving
conditions.
Check the oil level more frequently for long
journeys:
•
•
•
•
towing a caravan or trailer
in mountainous regions
at high speeds
in temperatures colder than -30 °C or
hotter than +40 °C
The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures.
Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse
driving conditions. It provides extra protection
for the engine.
Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.
IMPORTANT
In order to fulfil the requirements for the
engine's service intervals all engines are
filled with a specially adapted synthetic
engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil
has been made very carefully with regard
to service life, starting characteristics, fuel
consumption and environmental impact.
An approved engine oil must be used in
order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed
grade of oil for both filling and oil change,
otherwise you will risk affecting service life,
starting characteristics, fuel consumption
and environmental impact.
Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all warranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed
grade and viscosity is not used.
Volvo recommends that oil changes are
carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop.
394
10 Specifications
Engine oil
Engine oil grade
Engine
Engine codeA
Recommended oil grade
Volume, incl. oil filter
10
(litres)
D6 AWD
D82PHEV
Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5
approx. 5.9
Viscosity: SAE 0W–30
A
Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 388.
For filling engine oil, see page 348.
395
10 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
Coolant
10
Prescribed grade: Coolant recommended by
Volvo mixed with 50% water1, see the packaging.
Engine
Volume
(litres)
D6 AWD
12.9
Other fluids and lubricants
Automatic gearbox
TF-80SD
Volume (litres)
7.0
Prescribed transmission fluid
AW1
NOTE
Under normal driving conditions, the gearbox oil does not need to be changed during its service life. However, it may be necessary under adverse driving conditions,see page 394.
1
396
Fluid
System
Brake fluid
Brake system
Power steering fluid
Power steering
Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1.
Volume
(litres)
0.6
-
Prescribed grade
DOT 4
WSS M2C204-A2 or equivalent product.
10 Specifications
Fluids and lubricants
Fluid
System
Washer fluid
Cars with headlamp washing
3,4
Cars without headlamp washing
3,4
Fuel
Diesel engine
Volume
(litres)
approx. 45
Prescribed grade
10
Washer fluid recommended by Volvo - with frost protection during
cold weather and below freezing point.
Diesel: see page 301
397
10 Specifications
Fuel
CO2 emissions and fuel consumption
10
car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and
carbon dioxide emissions.
There are several reasons for increased fuel
consumption compared with the table's values. Examples of this are:
D6 AWD
(D82PHEV)
48
1.8
•
•
Explanation
398
The driver's driving style.
•
If the customer has specified wheels
larger than those fitted as standard on the
model's basic version, then resistance
increases.
Drive with the correct air pressure in the
tyres and check this regularly - select
ECO tyre pressure for best results, see
the tyre pressure table on page 400.
•
Choice of tyres can affect fuel consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from a
dealer.
gram/km
litre/100 km
•
Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions,
weather and the condition of the car.
Fuel consumption and emission values in the
table above are based on specific EU cycles1,
that apply to cars with kerb weight in the
basic version and without extra equipment.
The car's weight may increase depending on
equipment. This, as well as how heavily the
1
Drive gently and avoid unnecessary
acceleration as well as braking too hard.
High speed results in increased wind
resistance.
Fuel consumption and emissions of
carbon dioxide
Tips that the driver can use in order to reduce
consumption:
•
•
Combined driving
To bear in mind
Even a combination of the above-mentioned
examples can result in significantly improved
consumption. For further information, please
refer to the regulations referred to 1.
See further information and more advice on
pages 11 and 296.
See page 301 for general information on fuel.
Large deviations in fuel consumption may
arise in a comparison with the EU driving
cycles1 which are used in the certification of
the car and on which the consumption figures
in the table are based.
Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU
Regulation no 692/2008 and 715/2007 (Euro 5)and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for urban driving and extra-urban driving. - Urban driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Extra-urban driving - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. The value for
combined driving, which is given in the table, according to legislation, is a combination of urban driving and extra-urban driving. CO2 emission - to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions from the
two driving cycles, the exhaust gases are collected. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.
10 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
Approved dimensions
In certain countries not all approved dimensions are indicated by the registration document or other documents. The following table
shows all approved combinations of wheel
rims and tyres.
D82PHEV
Load index and speed rating
The table below shows the minimum permitted load index (LI) and speed rating (SS).
Engine
D6 AWD
A
B
D82PHEV
10
For information on the minimum permitted
load index (LI) and the minimum permitted
speed rating (SS), see page 399.
Engine
D6 AWD
✓ = Approved
man/
235/45 R 17
aut
8Jx17x55
aut
✓
Information on engine, front-wheel drive
(FWD) or all-wheel drive (AWD) and the type
of transmission is needed to read the table.
For information with respect to these details,
see page 388.
man/
aut
Minimum permitted load index (LI)A
Minimum permitted speed rating (SS)B
aut
97
V
The tyre's load index must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table. For more information, see page 331.
The tyre's speed rating must be at least equal to or greater than indicated in the table. For more information, see page 331.
}}
399
10 Specifications
Wheel and tyres, dimensions and pressure
Approved tyre pressures
10
Engine
D6 AWD (D82PHEV)
A
B
400
Tyre size
235/45 R 17
Speed
Load, 1 - 3 persons
(km/h)
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front/rear
(kPa)B
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
(kPa)
0 - 160
280
280
280
280
280
160 +
280
280
320
320
-
Economical driving.
In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa.
Max. load
ECO pressureA
10 Specifications
Electrical system
Electrical system
The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator. The electrical system is single-pole and
uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.
Starter battery capacity is dependent upon
the equipment level in the car.
IMPORTANT
If the battery is replaced, replace it with a
battery of the same cold start capacity and
reserve capacity as the original (see the
decal on the battery).
Hybrid battery (battery for drive
motor)
Type: Lithium-ion
10
Energy quantity: 11.2 kWh.
Service life: Longer than 10 years.
Vehicle range
The car's range during electric operation
(drive mode PURE): up to 50 km.
Battery
NOTE
•
The starter battery's container size
should be consistent with the original
battery's dimensions.
•
The starter battery's height is different
depending on size.
Voltage: 12 V.
Cold start capacity, CCA - Cold Cranking
Amperes: 700-800 A.
Reserve capacity: 135-160 minutes.
401
10 Specifications
Type approval
Remote control key system
10
Lock system, standard
Country
EU
Keyless lock system (Keyless drive)
Country
EU
402
Radar system
Country
Europe
Delphi Electronics &
Safety hereby declares that
L2C0038TR and L2C0049TR
are in compliance with the
essential requirements and
other relevant provisions of
Directive 1999/5/EC. This declaration of conformity may, if
necessary, be consulted with
Delphi Electronics & Safety /
One Corporate Center /
Kokomo, Indiana 46904-9005
USA.
10 Specifications
Type approval
Bluetooth®
Declaration of Conformity (Declaration of Conformity)
10
Country
Countries
in the EU:
Exporting country: Japan
Manufacturer: Alpine Electronics Inc.
Type of equipment: Bluetooth® device
For further information visit http://ec.europa.eu/enterprise/rtte/faq.htm #informing
}}
403
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
404
Czech
Republic:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. tímto prohlašuje, že tento Bluetooth® Module je ve shodě se základními požadavky a dalšími příslušnými
ustanoveními směrnice 1999/5/ES.
Denmark:
Undertegnede Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved, at følgende udstyr Bluetooth® Module overholder de væsentlige krav og
øvrige relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
Germany:
Hiermit erklärt Alpine Electronics, Inc., dass sich das Gerät Bluetooth® Module in Übereinstimmung mit den grundlegenden
Anforderungen und den übrigen einschlägigen Bestimmungen der Richtlinie 1999/5/EG befindet.
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
Estonia:
Käesolevaga kinnitab Alpine Electronics, Inc. seadme Bluetooth® Module vastavust direktiivi 1999/5/EÜ põhinõuetele ja nimetatud
direktiivist tulenevatele teistele asjakohastele sätetele.
UK
Hereby, Alpine Electronics, Inc., declares that this Bluetooth® Module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other
relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Spain:
Por medio de la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que el Bluetooth® Module cumple con los requisitos esenciales y
cualesquiera otras disposiciones aplicables o exigibles de la Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Greece:
ΜΕ ΗΝ ΠΑΡΟ ΣΑ Alpine Electronics, Inc. ΗΛΩΝΕ Ο Bluetooth® Module Σ ΜΜΟΡΦΩΝΕ Α ΠΡΟΣ
ΑΠΑ ΗΣΕ Σ Α Σ ΛΟ ΠΕΣ ΣΧΕ
ΕΣ Α ΑΞΕ Σ ΗΣ Ο Η ΑΣ 1999/5/Ε .
France:
Par la présente Alpine Electronics, Inc. déclare que l'appareil Bluetooth® Module est conforme aux exigences essentielles et aux
autres dispositions pertinentes de la directive 1999/5/CE.
Italy:
Con la presente Alpine Electronics, Inc. dichiara che questo Bluetooth® Module è conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed alle altre
disposizioni pertinenti stabilite dalla direttiva 1999/5/CE.
Latvia:
Ar šo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklarē, ka Bluetooth® Module atbilst Direktīvas 1999/5/EK būtiskajām prasībām un citiem ar to
saistītajiem noteikumiem.
Lithuania:
Šiuo Alpine Electronics, Inc. deklaruoja, kad šis Bluetooth® Module atitinka esminius reikalavimus ir kitas 1999/5/EB Direktyvos
nuostatas.
Netherlands:
Hierbij verklaart Alpine Electronics, Inc. dat het toestel Bluetooth® Module in overeenstemming is met de essentiële eisen en de
andere relevante bepalingen van richtlijn 1999/5/EG.
Malta:
Hawnhekk, Alpine Electronics, Inc., jiddikjara li dan Bluetooth® Module jikkonforma mal-ħtiġijiet essenzjali u ma provvedimenti
oħrajn relevanti li hemm fid-Dirrettiva 1999/5/EC.
Hungary:
Alulírott, Alpine Electronics, Inc. nyilatkozom, hogy a Bluetooth® Module megfelel a vonatkozó alapvetõ követelményeknek és az
1999/5/EC irányelv egyéb elõírásainak.
10
ΣΟ ΣΩ ΕΣ
}}
405
10 Specifications
Type approval
Country
10
406
Poland:
Niniejszym Alpine Electronics, Inc. oświadcza, że Bluetooth® Module jest zgodny z zasadniczymi wymogami oraz pozostałymi
stosownymi postanowieniami Dyrektywy 1999/5/EC.
Portugal:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. declara que este Bluetooth® Module está conforme com os requisitos essenciais e outras disposições da
Directiva 1999/5/CE.
Slovenia:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. izjavlja, da je ta Bluetooth® Module v skladu z bistvenimi zahtevami in ostalimi relevantnimi določili direktive 1999/5/ES.
Slovakia:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. týmto vyhlasuje, že Bluetooth® Module spĺňa základné požiadavky a všetky príslušné ustanovenia Smernice 1999/5/ES.
Finland:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. vakuuttaa täten että Bluetooth® Module tyyppinen laite on direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleellisten vaatimusten ja
sitä koskevien direktiivin muiden ehtojen mukainen.
Sweden:
Härmed intygar Alpine Electronics, Inc. att denna Bluetooth® Module står I överensstämmelse med de väsentliga egenskapskrav
och övriga relevanta bestämmelser som framgår av direktiv 1999/5/EG.
Iceland:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. hereby certifies that this Bluetooth® Module conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and
other relevant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.
Norway:
Alpine Electronics, Inc. erklærer herved at utstyret Bluetooth® Module er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og øvrige
relevante krav i direktiv 1999/5/EF.
10 Specifications
Licenses
Sensus software
This software uses parts of sources from
clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991,
1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright
(c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University
of California. All or some portions are derived
from material licensed to the University of
California by American Telephone and
Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories,
Inc. and are reproduced herein with the
permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc.
Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are
permitted provided that the following
conditions are met: Redistributions of source
code must retain the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form
must reproduce the above copyright notice,
this list of conditions and the following
disclaimer in the documentation and/or other
materials provided with the distribution.
Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION>
nor the names of its contributors may be
used to endorse or promote products derived
from this software without specific prior
written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS
PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS
AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT
OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING,
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND
ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)
ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
This software is based in part on the work of
the Independent JPEG Group.
This software uses parts of sources from
"libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL
Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1,
released January 26, 2000, developed by
Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is
Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics,
Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third
parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All
Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000]
Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge,
to any person obtaining a copy of this
software and associated documentation files
(the "Software"), to deal in the Software
without restriction, including without limitation
the rights to use, copy, modify, merge,
publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell
copies of the Software, and to permit persons
to whom the Software is furnished to do so,
subject to the following conditions: The
above copyright notice including the dates of
first publication and either this permission
notice or a reference to http://oss.sgi.com/
projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies
or substantial portions of the Software. THE
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS",
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT
NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL
SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR
ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF
CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE,
ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR
THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE
SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this
notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc.
shall not be used in advertising or otherwise
10
}}
407
10 Specifications
Licenses
10
to promote the sale, use or other dealings in
this Software without prior written
authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc.
as the cost of media, shipping and handling,
upon written request. Please contact your
nearest Volvo Dealer.
This software is based in parts on the work of
the FreeType Team.
This offer is valid for a period of at least three
(3) years from the date of the distribution of
this product by VCC / or for as long as VCC
offers spare parts or customer support.
This software uses parts of SSLeay Library:
Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young
([email protected]). All rights reserved
Combined Instrument Panel Software
Open Source Software Notice
This product uses certain free / open source
and other software originating from third
parties, that is subject to the GNU General
Public License version 2 and 3 (GPLv2/
GPLv3), GNU Lesser General Public License
version 3 (LGPLv3), The FreeType Project
License (“FreeType License”) and other
different and/or additional copyright licenses,
disclaimers and notices. The links how to
access the exact terms of GPLv2, GPLv3,
LGPLv3, and the other open source software
licenses, disclaimers, acknowledgements and
notices are provided to you below. Please
refer to the exact terms of the relevant
License, regarding your rights under said
licenses. Volvo Car Corporation (VCC) offers
to provide the source code of said free/open
source software to you for a charge covering
the cost of performing such distribution, such
408
The FreeType Project License: http://
www.freetype.org/FTL.TXT
•
libfreetype.so.6 (version 2.4.3)
DivX®
Portions of this product uses software
copyrighted © v2.4.3/2010 The
FreeTypeProject (www.freetype.org). All rights
reserved.
This product includes software under
following licenses:
GPL v2 : http://www.gnu.org/licenses/oldlicenses/gpl-2.0.html
•
•
•
Linux kernel (merge between MontaVista
2.6.31 kernel and kernel from
L2.6.31_MX51_ER_1007 BSP)
uBoot (based on v2009.08)
busybox (based on version 1.13.2.)
GCC runtime library exception: http://
www.gnu.org/licenses/gcc-exception.html
•
libgcc_s.so.1
LGPL v3: http://www.gnu.org/licenses/
lgpl.html
•
Libc.so.6, libpthread.so.0, Librt.so.1
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video. DivX®,
DivX Certified® and associated logos are
registered trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are
used under license. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO:
DivX® is a digital video format created by
DivX, Inc. This is an official DivX Certified
device that plays DivX video. Visit
www.divx.com for more information and
software tools to convert your files into DivX
video.
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX
Certified® device must be registered in order
to play DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD)
content. To generate the registration code,
locate the DivX VOD section in the device
10 Specifications
Licenses
setup menu. Go to http://vod.divx.com with
this code to complete the registration
process and learn more about DivX VOD.
Covered by one or more of the following U.S.
Patents: 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710;
7,519,274.
10
409
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
General
10
There are a variety of different symbols in the
display in the car. The symbols are divided
into warning, indicator and information symbols. Shown below are the most common
symbols with their meanings and a reference
to where in the manual further information
can be found. For more information on symbols and text messages, see pages 78, 80
and 204.
Symbols in the display
Symbol
- Red warning symbol, illuminates
when a fault has been indicated which could
affect the safety and/or driveability of the car.
An explanatory text is shown in the combined
instrument panel at the same time.
- Yellow information symbol, comes on
and a text appears on the combined instrument panel when one of the car's systems
does not behave as intended. The yellow
symbol information can also illuminate in
combination with other symbols.
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
Meaning
Page
Fault in the ABS
system
79, 134
Rear fog lamp on
79, 99
Stability system,
DSTC, Trailer stability assist*
79, 147,
322
Meaning
Page
Parking brake
applied
80, 136,
138
Airbags - SRS
21, 80
Seatbelt reminder
18, 80
Stability system,
sport mode
79, 147
Starter battery
not charging
80
Engine preheater
(diesel)
79
Fault in the brake
system
80, 134
Low level in fuel
tank
79, 229
Warning, safety
mode
21, 31, 80,
81
Information, read
display text
79
Main beam on
79, 98
Left-hand direction
indicators
79
Right-hand direction indicators
79
Control symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
410
Symbol
Warning symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Meaning
Page
Fault in the ABL
system*
79, 98
Emissions system
79
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
Information symbols in the combined
instrument panel
Symbol
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Symbol
Meaning
Page
Meaning
Page
Foot brake
134
Low battery
229
Main beam with
automatic dimming
- AHB*
96
Speed limiter
151
Parking brake
138
173,
181,
186, 189
103
96
Camera sensor*,
Laser sensor*
Rain sensor*
Camera sensor*
164
168,
173, 181
Adaptive cruise
control*
157, 164
164, 168
Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning*
189
Adaptive cruise
control*, Distance
Warning* (Distance
Alert)
Auto Brake*, Distance Warning*
(Distance Alert),
City SafetyTM, Collision warning system*
Driver Alert System*, Lane Departure Warning*
186, 189
Adaptive cruise
control*
229
Driver Alert System*, Time for a
break
186
Adaptive cruise
control*
164
Engine block heater
and passenger
compartment
heater*
148
Activated timer*
229
Recorded speed
information*
Adaptive cruise
control*
158
Parking inside
226
Cruise control*
153
Radar sensor*
164,
168, 181
ABL system*
98
Fuel filler flap, righthand side
300
10
}}
* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.
411
10 Specifications
Symbols in the display
Symbol
10
Meaning
Page
Parking outside
226
Heating the seat
226, 226
Information symbols in the roof console
display
Symbol
412
Meaning
Page
Seatbelt reminder
20
Airbag, passenger
seat, activated
24, 25
Airbag, passenger
seat, deactivated
25
10 Specifications
10
413
11 Alphabetical Index
A
ACC – Adaptive cruise control................. 155
Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 98
Active Xenon headlamps........................... 98
11
Adaptive cruise control............................ 155
fault tracing......................................... 163
radar sensor........................................ 161
Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 102
Adjusting the steering wheel...................... 91
Airbag
activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 24
driver's and front passenger side......... 22
key switch off........................................ 24
AIRBAG ..................................................... 22
Airbag system ........................................... 21
Air conditioning........................................ 221
general................................................ 214
Air conditioning, AC................................. 221
Air conditioning system
repair................................................... 352
Air distribution.................................. 216, 224
Air quality system IAQS .......................... 223
Air vents................................................... 216
66
66
67
66
49
66
67
67
Auto
climate control settings...................... 220
Alcolock................................................... 115
Automatic relocking................................... 60
Allergy and asthma inducing substances. 215
AUX input......................................... 246, 268
All-wheel drive, AWD............................... 132
AWD, All-wheel drive............................... 132
Alarm..........................................................
alarm indicator......................................
alarm signals.........................................
arming...................................................
checking the alarm...............................
deactivate.............................................
deactivating a triggered alarm..............
reduced alarm level..............................
Automatic car washes............................. 379
Automatic gearbox.................................. 128
manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 129
trailer................................................... 317
Automatic locking...................................... 62
All Wheel Drive (AWD).............................. 132
Approach light, duration.................... 48, 102
Audio
settings............................................... 251
surround..................................... 246, 251
B
Backrest..................................................... 86
front seat, lowering............................... 86
audio system .......................................... 246
Backrest rear seat, lowering...................... 89
Audio system........................................... 246
functions............................................. 251
overview.............................................. 246
Battery............................................. 362, 401
maintenance....................................... 362
remote control ................................... 292
remote control key/PCC....................... 54
start assistance................................... 121
symbols on the battery....................... 363
warning symbols................................. 363
Audio volume ..........................................
phone..................................................
phone/media player............................
ring signal, phone...............................
speed/noise compensation................
247
277
277
277
251
Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 198
BLIS......................................................... 197
414
11 Alphabetical Index
Bluetooth®
handsfree ...........................................
media .................................................
microphone off ..................................
streaming audio .................................
transfer call to mobile ........................
start charging...................................... 309
temperature monitoring...................... 311
C
274
271
277
271
277
Calls
incoming............................................. 276
operation............................................. 276
Bonnet, opening...................................... 347
Car care................................................... 379
Brake fluid................................................ 351
Car care, leather upholstery.................... 381
Brake light.................................................. 99
Cargo area
cargo cover.........................................
coolant................................................
lighting................................................
loading................................................
mounting points..................................
safety grille..........................................
safety net............................................
Brakes...................................................... 133
anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 133
brake light............................................. 99
brake system...................................... 133
electric parking brake......................... 136
Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 134
emergency brake lights........................ 99
filling brake fluid.................................. 351
handbrake........................................... 136
symbols in the combined instrument
panel................................................... 134
Bulbs, see Lighting.................................. 353
Camera sensor................................ 171, 180
315
363
101
312
313
315
314
Cargo cover............................................. 315
Car upholstery......................................... 381
Car wash.................................................. 379
Charging cable........................................ 305
control unit.......................................... 306
Checking the engine oil level................... 348
Children.....................................................
child safety locks..................................
child seats and side airbags.................
location in the car.................................
safety....................................................
32
38
26
32
32
Child safety locks...................................... 65
Child seat................................................... 32
Child seats.................................................
integrated two-stage booster cushion.
ISOFIX fixture system for child seats...
recommended......................................
size classes for child seats with the
ISOFIX fixture system...........................
upper mounting points for child seats..
32
36
39
33
39
42
Catalytic converter................................... 301
recovery.............................................. 323
Cigarette lighter socket............................ 240
CD ........................................................... 264
Cleaning
automatic car washes......................... 379
car wash............................................. 379
rims..................................................... 380
Centre console........................................ 206
Charging.................................................. 308
finish charging.................................... 310
11
City Safety™............................................ 169
415
11 Alphabetical Index
11
seatbelts............................................. 382
upholstery........................................... 381
Controls, lights........................................... 93
Direction indicators.................................... 99
Control symbols......................................... 78
Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 131
Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)........ 215
Coolant, checking and filling
Engine compartment.......................... 350
Display lighting.......................................... 94
Cooling system........................................ 297
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II.................... 246
Cornering lights......................................... 98
Corner Traction Control .......................... 146
Door mirrors............................................. 108
automatic dimming............................. 109
Crash, see Collision................................... 31
Drive modes............................................. 123
Cruise control.......................................... 153
Driver Alert Control.................................. 184
CZIP (Clear Zone Interior Package)......... 215
Driver Alert System.................................. 183
Climate control........................................ 214
general................................................ 214
sensors............................................... 214
Clock, setting............................................. 82
CO2 emissions ........................................ 398
Collision..................................................... 31
Collision warning............................. 175, 176
Collision warning system
radar sensor........................ 161, 170, 175
Collision Warning with Auto Brake*......... 175
Colour code, paint................................... 383
Combined instrument panel.............. 74, 204
Comfort inside the passenger compartment......................................................... 239
Compass................................................. 111
calibration........................................... 111
Condensation in headlamps.................... 379
controls
centre console ................................... 247
Controls
centre console.................................... 206
416
Distance Warning.................................... 166
Drive systems.......................................... 123
D
DAB Radio............................................... 261
Daytime running lights............................... 95
Deadlock
deactivation.......................................... 63
temporary deactivation......................... 64
Deadlocks.................................................. 63
Defroster.................................................. 221
Diesel....................................................... 301
Diesel particle filter.................................. 303
Dipstick, electronic.................................. 349
Driving......................................................
cooling system....................................
with the tailgate open.........................
with trailer...........................................
296
297
298
317
Driving in water........................................ 297
Driving with a trailer
towball load........................................ 390
towing capacity.................................. 390
DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 147
DVD ......................................................... 264
11 Alphabetical Index
E
ECC, electronic climate control............... 218
EcoGuide................................................... 77
Economical driving.................................. 296
ECO pressure.................................. 336, 400
Electrical socket...................................... 241
cargo area........................................... 313
front seat............................................. 241
Electric drive motor
specifications...................................... 393
Electricity-driven heater........................... 231
Electric parking brake..............................
low battery voltage.............................
releasing automatically.......................
releasing manually..............................
136
136
137
137
Engine compartment
coolant................................................
oil........................................................
overview..............................................
power steering fluid............................
350
348
347
352
Engine drag control ................................ 146
Engine oil......................................... 348, 394
adverse driving conditions.................. 394
capacities........................................... 394
filter..................................................... 348
oil grade.............................................. 394
Fan........................................................... 220
Fault tracing for the camera sensor. 171, 180
First aid equipment.................................. 337
First aid kit .............................................. 337
Fluids and oils.......................................... 396
Fog lamps
rear........................................................ 99
Foot brake............................................... 133
Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's
manual....................................................... 11
FSC, environmental labelling..................... 11
Emergency equipment
warning triangle.................................. 337
Emergency puncture repair..................... 338
Error messages in BLIS........................... 200
Emissions of carbon dioxide................... 303
Error messages in Distance Alert............ 168
Engine
overheating......................................... 317
starting................................................ 119
Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 19
External dimensions................................ 390
11
Fluids, capacities..................................... 396
Engine specifications............................... 393
Error messages
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 164
Driver Alert Control............................. 186
Lane Departure Warning..................... 189
see Messages and symbols....... 138, 164
Engine block heater
fuel-driven........................................... 231
F
Fuel..........................................................
fuel consumption................................
fuel economy......................................
fuel filter..............................................
301
398
336
302
Fuel-driven heater.................................... 231
parking on a hill.................................. 232
starter battery and fuel....................... 232
Fuse box.................................................. 365
glovebox..................................... 369, 371
Fuses.......................................................
behind the engine...............................
box in cargo area................................
changing.............................................
365
368
373
365
417
11 Alphabetical Index
Handbrake............................................... 136
Hybrid battery
charging.............................................. 304
specifications...................................... 401
366
377
Hazard warning flashers............................ 99
Hybrid guide.............................................. 77
Fuse table
fuses in engine compartment............. 367
Headlamp pattern, adjusting................... 102
cold zone............................................
general................................................
relay/fuse box in engine
compartment......................................
Start/Stop...........................................
11
377
365
Headlamp levelling.................................... 94
Headlamps............................................... 353
G
Head restraint
centre seat, rear.................................... 88
lowering.......................................... 88, 90
Gearbox
automatic............................................ 128
Heated washer nozzles............................ 104
IAQS – Interior Air Quality System........... 215
IC – Inflatable Curtain................................ 27
Ignition keys............................................... 84
Ignition positions....................................... 84
Gear selector inhibitor, mechanical disengagement................................................. 131
Geartronic................................................ 129
Heat-reflecting windscreen...................... 106
Information button, PCC............................ 49
Glass
laminated/reinforced........................... 106
High engine temperature......................... 317
Information display.................................... 75
High-pressure headlamp washing........... 104
Global opening........................................ 215
HomeLink® .............................................. 140
Glovebox................................................. 240
locking.................................................. 62
Home safe lighting................................... 101
Hoot........................................................... 91
Infotainment system ...............................
menus ................................................
overview .............................................
source buttons ...................................
voice control.......................................
Horn........................................................... 91
Inlaid mats............................................... 240
Gross vehicle weight............................... 390
Ground fault breaker................................ 311
GSI - Gear selector assistance................ 128
221
109
109
218
I
Heating....................................................
rearview and door mirrors..................
rear window........................................
seats...................................................
Gear selector inhibitor............................. 130
418
H
Immobiliser................................................ 47
Indicator lamps, PCC................................ 49
Inflatable curtain........................................ 27
246
249
246
247
283
Instrument lighting, see Lighting................ 94
11 Alphabetical Index
Instrument overview
left-hand drive....................................... 70
right-hand drive.................................... 72
Key positions............................................. 84
Instruments and controls........................... 70
L
Interior lighting, see Lighting................... 100
Interior rearview mirror............................. 110
automatic dimming............................. 110
Intermittent wiping................................... 103
iPod®, connection................................... 268
J
Journey statistics..................................... 237
K
Kerb weight.............................................. 390
Key............................................................. 46
Key blade................................................... 50
Keyless drive...................................... 56, 119
Keyless start (keyless drive)............... 56, 119
Keypad in the steering
wheel................................. 91, 153, 207, 247
rear fog lamp........................................ 99
tunnel detection.................................... 95
Laser sensor............................................ 172
Lighting, bulb replacement......................
bulb holder, rear, direction indicators.
cargo area...........................................
dipped beam halogen.........................
direction indicators.............................
main beam, Xenon lamp.....................
main beam halogen............................
number plate lighting..........................
vanity mirror........................................
Leather upholstery, washing instructions 381
Light switches............................................ 93
Lighting.................................................... 353
Active Xenon headlamps...................... 98
approach light, duration............... 48, 102
automatic lighting, passenger compartment............................................. 101
bulbs, specifications........................... 358
controls............................................... 100
cornering lights..................................... 98
daytime running lights.......................... 95
display lighting...................................... 94
headlamp levelling................................ 94
home safe lighting.............................. 101
in passenger compartment................. 100
instrument lighting................................ 94
main/dipped beam............................... 95
position/parking lamps......................... 94
Loading
cargo area...........................................
general................................................
mounting points..................................
roof load.............................................
Labels...................................................... 388
Laminated glass....................................... 106
Lamps, see Lighting................................ 353
Lane Departure Control........................... 188
353
356
357
355
356
355
355
357
358
11
312
312
313
312
Lock confirmation ..................................... 46
Locking/unlocking
inside.................................................... 60
tailgate.................................................. 62
Locks
automatic locking................................. 60
locking.................................................. 60
unlocking.............................................. 60
Lubricants................................................ 396
419
11 Alphabetical Index
Lubricants, capacities.............................. 396
M
11
Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 95
Main beam, automatic activation.............. 96
Maintenance
rustproofing........................................ 381
Messages and symbols
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 164
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 173, 181
Distance Alert..................................... 168
Driver Alert Control............................. 186
Lane Departure Warning..................... 189
O
Oil, see also Engine oil............................. 394
Oil level low.............................................. 348
Overheating............................................. 317
Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 11
Messages in BLIS.................................... 200
Messages in the combined instrument
panel........................................................ 204
P
Manual gearbox
GSI - Gear selector assistance........... 128
Messages in the information display....... 147
PACOS....................................................... 24
Microphone.............................................. 274
PACOS, switch.......................................... 24
Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 129
Misting.....................................................
attending to the windows...................
condensation in headlamps...............
remove with the air vents...................
timer function......................................
221
215
379
224
223
Paintwork
colour code......................................... 383
damage and touch-up........................ 383
Menus and messages.............................. 204
Mobile phone
connect...............................................
handsfree............................................
register phone.....................................
voice control.......................................
275
274
275
283
Menu system MY CAR............................ 206
Mood lighting........................................... 101
Making calls............................................. 276
Max. roof load ......................................... 390
Media, Bluetooth® ................................... 271
media player ........................................... 264
Memory function in seats.......................... 87
Menu navigation, Infotainment ............... 249
Menus/functions...................................... 208
MY CAR................................................... 206
Panel lighting............................................. 94
Panic function............................................ 48
Park assist camera.................................. 194
Parking assistance................................... 191
parking assistance sensors................ 193
Parking brake........................................... 136
Parking heater
time setting......................................... 228
Passenger compartment......................... 239
Passenger compartment filter................. 215
420
11 Alphabetical Index
Passenger compartment heater
electrically-driven................................ 231
fuel-driven........................................... 231
PCC – Personal Car Communicator
functions............................................... 47
range............................................... 48, 49
Pedestrian protection.............................. 175
Phone
connect...............................................
handsfree............................................
incoming calls.....................................
making calls........................................
phone book.........................................
phone book, shortcut.........................
receiving a call....................................
register phone.....................................
voice control.......................................
275
274
276
276
278
278
277
275
283
Symbols and messages..................... 229
timer.................................................... 228
Privacy locking........................................... 52
electrically retractable......................... 109
heating................................................ 109
interior................................................. 110
Rear window, defrosting.......................... 109
Recirculation............................................ 222
Q
Recommendations during driving............ 296
Queue Assist............................................ 160
Recommended child seats, table.............. 33
Queue Assistant....................................... 160
Recovery.................................................. 324
Refrigerant............................................... 352
R
Radar sensor........................................... 155
limitations........................................... 161
Refuelling.................................................
fuel cap...............................................
fuel filler flap, electrical opening.........
fuel filler flap, manual opening............
refuelling.............................................
300
300
300
300
300
Relay/fuse box, see Fuses....................... 365
Pinch protection, sunroof........................ 114
Radio ...................................................... 257
AM/FM ............................................... 257
DAB ................................................... 261
Polishing.................................................. 380
Rain sensor.............................................. 103
Position/parking lamps.............................. 94
Range
during electric operation..................... 401
Remote control, HomeLink®
programmable ................................... 140
Power seat................................................. 87
Power sunroof......................................... 113
Power windows....................................... 106
Preconditioning........................................ 225
direct start and immediate stop......... 227
setting................................................. 226
11
Rear bulbs
location............................................... 357
Rearview and door mirrors
compass............................................. 111
door.................................................... 108
Remote control ....................................... 291
battery replacement ........................... 292
Remote control key...................................
battery replacement..............................
detachable key blade...........................
functions...............................................
range.....................................................
46
54
50
47
48
421
11 Alphabetical Index
Resetting the power windows................. 108
Seats.......................................................... 86
head restraints, rear.............................. 88
heating................................................ 218
lowering the front backrest................... 86
lowering the rear backrest.................... 89
power seats.......................................... 87
Retractable power door mirrors............... 109
Securing loads (Loading)......................... 313
Rims
cleaning.............................................. 380
Sensus....................................................... 83
Remote control key system, type approval............................................................ 402
Resetting, trip meter........................ 235, 236
Resetting the door mirrors....................... 109
11
Road sign information............................. 148
Roof load, max. weight ........................... 390
Rustproofing............................................ 381
Service position....................................... 359
Service programme................................. 346
Set time interval....................................... 166
Side airbags............................................... 26
Signal input, external....................... 246, 268
S
Safety grille.............................................. 315
Safety mode.............................................. 31
Safety net................................................. 314
Seat, see Seats.......................................... 86
Seatbelt
rear seat................................................ 20
seatbelt tensioner................................. 20
SIPS bags.................................................. 26
Soot filter................................................. 303
Soot filter full............................................ 303
Spare wheel............................................. 333
Spin control............................................. 146
Spin control function............................... 146
Stability and traction control system....... 146
Stability system....................................... 146
Seatbelt reminder...................................... 20
Stains....................................................... 381
Seatbelts.................................................... 18
Start/Stop function.................................. 125
Start assistance....................................... 121
422
Steering force, speed related.................. 238
Steering force level, see Steering force... 238
Steering lock............................................ 120
Steering wheel........................................... 91
keypad.......................... 91, 153, 207, 247
keypad, adaptive cruise control......... 157
steering wheel adjustment.................... 91
Stone chips and scratches...................... 383
Storage spaces in the passenger compartment.................................................. 239
Sunroof
opening and closing...........................
pinch protection..................................
sunscreen...........................................
ventilation position..............................
113
114
114
113
Sunscreen, sunroof.................................. 114
Surround.......................................... 246, 251
Symbols................................................... 147
indicator symbols................................. 78
warning symbols................................... 78
Symbols and messages
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 164
Collision Warning with Auto
Brake.......................................... 173, 181
Distance Alert..................................... 168
11 Alphabetical Index
Driver Alert Control............................. 186
Lane Departure Warning..................... 189
speed ratings...................................... 331
tread wear indicators.......................... 329
winter tyres......................................... 330
driving with a trailer............................ 317
snaking............................................... 321
Trailer stability assist .............................. 146
T
Trailer Stability Assist.............................. 321
Transponder............................................ 106
Tailgate
locking/unlocking.................................. 62
Trip computer.......................................... 233
Temperature
actual temperature............................. 214
Trip meter, resetting........................ 235, 236
Temperature control................................ 221
Trip meter.................................................. 81
Trip statistics........................................... 126
Timer........................................................ 223
Troubleshooting
Adaptive Cruise Control..................... 163
Total airing function........................... 62, 215
TSA - trailer stability assist ............. 146, 321
Towbar
detachable, attachment ..................... 319
detachable, removal .......................... 321
Tunnel detection........................................ 95
Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 318
Towing..................................................... 323
towing eye.......................................... 323
Towing capacity....................................... 390
Towing equipment................................... 318
specifications...................................... 319
Towing eye.............................................. 323
Trailer....................................................... 317
cable................................................... 317
TV............................................................. 287
Type approval, remote control key system........................................................... 402
U
11
Unlocking
from the inside...................................... 61
from the outside................................... 60
USB, connection...................................... 268
V
Vanity mirror.................................... 101, 241
Ventilation................................................ 216
Vibration damper..................................... 318
Type designation..................................... 388
Voice control, mobile phone.................... 283
Tyres
dimensions......................................... 399
direction of rotation............................ 328
driving characteristics......................... 328
maintenance....................................... 328
pressure...................................... 336, 400
puncture repair................................... 338
specifications...................... 331, 399, 400
Volvo Sensus............................................. 83
423
11 Alphabetical Index
Waxing..................................................... 380
W
11
Warning lamp
adaptive cruise control....................... 155
collision warning system.................... 177
stability and traction control system.. 146
Warning lamps
airbags SRS..........................................
fault in brake system............................
parking brake applied...........................
seatbelt reminder..................................
starter battery not charging..................
warning.................................................
80
80
80
80
80
80
Wheels
changing.............................................
installation...........................................
rims.....................................................
snow chains........................................
spare wheel........................................
334
335
329
331
333
Wheels and tyres..................................... 328
Whiplash injury, WHIPS............................. 28
Warning sound
collision warning system.................... 177
WHIPS
child seat/booster cushion................... 28
whiplash injury...................................... 28
Warning symbol, airbag system................ 21
Windows, rearview and door mirrors....... 106
Warning symbols....................................... 78
Windscreen
Heating....................................... 109, 221
Warning triangle....................................... 337
Washer fluid, filling................................... 360
Washer nozzles, heated........................... 104
Washers
rear window........................................ 104
washer fluid, filling.............................. 360
windscreen......................................... 104
Water and dirt-repellent coating.............. 106
Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 380
424
Weights
kerb weight......................................... 390
Windscreen washing................................ 104
Windscreen wipers.................................. 103
rain sensor.......................................... 103
Winter driving........................................... 298
Winter tyres.............................................. 330
Wiper blades............................................ 359
changing............................................. 359
cleaning.............................................. 360
replacing, rear window....................... 360
service position................................... 359
Wipers and washing................................ 103
Volvo Car Corporation TP 16093 (English), AT 1320, Printed in Sweden, Göteborg 2013, Copyright © 2000-2013 Volvo Car Corporation
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement